US20080248010A1 - Compositions and methods of using apoptosis signaling kinase related kinase (ASKRK) - Google Patents
Compositions and methods of using apoptosis signaling kinase related kinase (ASKRK) Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- US20080248010A1 US20080248010A1 US12/077,408 US7740808A US2008248010A1 US 20080248010 A1 US20080248010 A1 US 20080248010A1 US 7740808 A US7740808 A US 7740808A US 2008248010 A1 US2008248010 A1 US 2008248010A1
- Authority
- US
- United States
- Prior art keywords
- polypeptide
- askrk
- cell
- activity
- agent
- Prior art date
- Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
- Abandoned
Links
- 238000000034 method Methods 0.000 title claims abstract description 139
- 108091000080 Phosphotransferase Proteins 0.000 title claims abstract description 29
- 102000020233 phosphotransferase Human genes 0.000 title claims abstract description 29
- 230000006882 induction of apoptosis Effects 0.000 title abstract description 3
- 239000000203 mixture Substances 0.000 title description 37
- 108090000765 processed proteins & peptides Chemical group 0.000 claims abstract description 206
- 102000004196 processed proteins & peptides Human genes 0.000 claims abstract description 191
- 229920001184 polypeptide Chemical group 0.000 claims abstract description 182
- 150000007523 nucleic acids Chemical group 0.000 claims abstract description 135
- 102000004169 proteins and genes Human genes 0.000 claims abstract description 131
- 102000039446 nucleic acids Human genes 0.000 claims abstract description 118
- 108020004707 nucleic acids Proteins 0.000 claims abstract description 118
- 206010012601 diabetes mellitus Diseases 0.000 claims abstract description 84
- 206010018429 Glucose tolerance impaired Diseases 0.000 claims abstract description 19
- 108090000623 proteins and genes Proteins 0.000 claims description 174
- 210000004027 cell Anatomy 0.000 claims description 165
- 230000000694 effects Effects 0.000 claims description 84
- 230000014509 gene expression Effects 0.000 claims description 79
- 239000003795 chemical substances by application Substances 0.000 claims description 68
- 150000001413 amino acids Chemical class 0.000 claims description 50
- 230000006907 apoptotic process Effects 0.000 claims description 30
- 238000003018 immunoassay Methods 0.000 claims description 30
- 241000282414 Homo sapiens Species 0.000 claims description 29
- 241001465754 Metazoa Species 0.000 claims description 27
- 108091032973 (ribonucleotides)n+m Proteins 0.000 claims description 23
- 239000000758 substrate Substances 0.000 claims description 23
- 238000006243 chemical reaction Methods 0.000 claims description 16
- 108020004459 Small interfering RNA Proteins 0.000 claims description 13
- 230000007423 decrease Effects 0.000 claims description 12
- 210000002237 B-cell of pancreatic islet Anatomy 0.000 claims description 10
- 239000013604 expression vector Substances 0.000 claims description 10
- 230000000865 phosphorylative effect Effects 0.000 claims description 10
- 230000003321 amplification Effects 0.000 claims description 9
- 238000003199 nucleic acid amplification method Methods 0.000 claims description 9
- 108020005544 Antisense RNA Proteins 0.000 claims description 5
- 239000003184 complementary RNA Substances 0.000 claims description 4
- 210000003734 kidney Anatomy 0.000 claims description 4
- 210000004153 islets of langerhan Anatomy 0.000 claims description 3
- 210000003292 kidney cell Anatomy 0.000 claims description 2
- 238000001514 detection method Methods 0.000 abstract description 23
- 108091005461 Nucleic proteins Proteins 0.000 abstract description 9
- 238000011282 treatment Methods 0.000 abstract description 5
- 201000009104 prediabetes syndrome Diseases 0.000 abstract description 2
- 208000001280 Prediabetic State Diseases 0.000 abstract 1
- 238000004393 prognosis Methods 0.000 abstract 1
- 235000018102 proteins Nutrition 0.000 description 121
- MWUXSHHQAYIFBG-UHFFFAOYSA-N Nitric oxide Chemical compound O=[N] MWUXSHHQAYIFBG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 99
- 239000000523 sample Substances 0.000 description 69
- 238000003556 assay Methods 0.000 description 68
- 102000040430 polynucleotide Human genes 0.000 description 55
- 108091033319 polynucleotide Proteins 0.000 description 55
- 239000002157 polynucleotide Substances 0.000 description 55
- 239000013598 vector Substances 0.000 description 52
- 235000001014 amino acid Nutrition 0.000 description 48
- 229940024606 amino acid Drugs 0.000 description 48
- 150000001875 compounds Chemical class 0.000 description 41
- NOESYZHRGYRDHS-UHFFFAOYSA-N insulin Chemical compound N1C(=O)C(NC(=O)C(CCC(N)=O)NC(=O)C(CCC(O)=O)NC(=O)C(C(C)C)NC(=O)C(NC(=O)CN)C(C)CC)CSSCC(C(NC(CO)C(=O)NC(CC(C)C)C(=O)NC(CC=2C=CC(O)=CC=2)C(=O)NC(CCC(N)=O)C(=O)NC(CC(C)C)C(=O)NC(CCC(O)=O)C(=O)NC(CC(N)=O)C(=O)NC(CC=2C=CC(O)=CC=2)C(=O)NC(CSSCC(NC(=O)C(C(C)C)NC(=O)C(CC(C)C)NC(=O)C(CC=2C=CC(O)=CC=2)NC(=O)C(CC(C)C)NC(=O)C(C)NC(=O)C(CCC(O)=O)NC(=O)C(C(C)C)NC(=O)C(CC(C)C)NC(=O)C(CC=2NC=NC=2)NC(=O)C(CO)NC(=O)CNC2=O)C(=O)NCC(=O)NC(CCC(O)=O)C(=O)NC(CCCNC(N)=N)C(=O)NCC(=O)NC(CC=3C=CC=CC=3)C(=O)NC(CC=3C=CC=CC=3)C(=O)NC(CC=3C=CC(O)=CC=3)C(=O)NC(C(C)O)C(=O)N3C(CCC3)C(=O)NC(CCCCN)C(=O)NC(C)C(O)=O)C(=O)NC(CC(N)=O)C(O)=O)=O)NC(=O)C(C(C)CC)NC(=O)C(CO)NC(=O)C(C(C)O)NC(=O)C1CSSCC2NC(=O)C(CC(C)C)NC(=O)C(NC(=O)C(CCC(N)=O)NC(=O)C(CC(N)=O)NC(=O)C(NC(=O)C(N)CC=1C=CC=CC=1)C(C)C)CC1=CN=CN1 NOESYZHRGYRDHS-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 40
- 238000009396 hybridization Methods 0.000 description 37
- 230000027455 binding Effects 0.000 description 28
- 238000009739 binding Methods 0.000 description 28
- 210000000227 basophil cell of anterior lobe of hypophysis Anatomy 0.000 description 26
- 108020004414 DNA Proteins 0.000 description 25
- 239000000126 substance Substances 0.000 description 25
- 210000001519 tissue Anatomy 0.000 description 24
- 238000012360 testing method Methods 0.000 description 22
- 239000003112 inhibitor Substances 0.000 description 21
- 102000004877 Insulin Human genes 0.000 description 20
- 108090001061 Insulin Proteins 0.000 description 20
- 229940125396 insulin Drugs 0.000 description 20
- 239000003446 ligand Substances 0.000 description 20
- WQZGKKKJIJFFOK-VFUOTHLCSA-N beta-D-glucose Chemical compound OC[C@H]1O[C@@H](O)[C@H](O)[C@@H](O)[C@@H]1O WQZGKKKJIJFFOK-VFUOTHLCSA-N 0.000 description 19
- 229960001031 glucose Drugs 0.000 description 19
- WQZGKKKJIJFFOK-GASJEMHNSA-N Glucose Natural products OC[C@H]1OC(O)[C@H](O)[C@@H](O)[C@@H]1O WQZGKKKJIJFFOK-GASJEMHNSA-N 0.000 description 18
- 125000003275 alpha amino acid group Chemical group 0.000 description 18
- 239000008103 glucose Substances 0.000 description 18
- 239000007787 solid Substances 0.000 description 18
- 230000002163 immunogen Effects 0.000 description 17
- 238000012546 transfer Methods 0.000 description 17
- 241000700605 Viruses Species 0.000 description 16
- -1 phosphoramidite triester Chemical class 0.000 description 16
- 102100033127 Mitogen-activated protein kinase kinase kinase 5 Human genes 0.000 description 15
- 108091028043 Nucleic acid sequence Proteins 0.000 description 15
- 239000011230 binding agent Substances 0.000 description 15
- 239000002773 nucleotide Substances 0.000 description 15
- 125000003729 nucleotide group Chemical group 0.000 description 15
- 108020004705 Codon Proteins 0.000 description 14
- 101001018196 Homo sapiens Mitogen-activated protein kinase kinase kinase 5 Proteins 0.000 description 14
- 238000001415 gene therapy Methods 0.000 description 14
- 108020004999 messenger RNA Proteins 0.000 description 14
- 108090000744 Mitogen-Activated Protein Kinase Kinases Proteins 0.000 description 13
- 102000004232 Mitogen-Activated Protein Kinase Kinases Human genes 0.000 description 13
- 210000004369 blood Anatomy 0.000 description 13
- 239000008280 blood Substances 0.000 description 13
- 230000003612 virological effect Effects 0.000 description 13
- 102000004190 Enzymes Human genes 0.000 description 12
- 108090000790 Enzymes Proteins 0.000 description 12
- 239000012491 analyte Substances 0.000 description 12
- 238000004422 calculation algorithm Methods 0.000 description 12
- 229940088598 enzyme Drugs 0.000 description 12
- 239000013615 primer Substances 0.000 description 12
- 241000699666 Mus <mouse, genus> Species 0.000 description 11
- 239000003153 chemical reaction reagent Substances 0.000 description 11
- 239000002299 complementary DNA Substances 0.000 description 11
- 238000009472 formulation Methods 0.000 description 11
- 230000006870 function Effects 0.000 description 11
- 238000002372 labelling Methods 0.000 description 11
- 238000003752 polymerase chain reaction Methods 0.000 description 11
- 238000012216 screening Methods 0.000 description 11
- 241000701161 unidentified adenovirus Species 0.000 description 11
- YBJHBAHKTGYVGT-ZKWXMUAHSA-N (+)-Biotin Chemical compound N1C(=O)N[C@@H]2[C@H](CCCCC(=O)O)SC[C@@H]21 YBJHBAHKTGYVGT-ZKWXMUAHSA-N 0.000 description 10
- 108091026890 Coding region Proteins 0.000 description 10
- 241000702421 Dependoparvovirus Species 0.000 description 10
- 230000030833 cell death Effects 0.000 description 10
- 239000003814 drug Substances 0.000 description 10
- 238000002493 microarray Methods 0.000 description 10
- 238000004458 analytical method Methods 0.000 description 9
- 208000037265 diseases, disorders, signs and symptoms Diseases 0.000 description 9
- 239000012634 fragment Substances 0.000 description 9
- 239000013612 plasmid Substances 0.000 description 9
- 238000000159 protein binding assay Methods 0.000 description 9
- 238000006467 substitution reaction Methods 0.000 description 9
- 239000013603 viral vector Substances 0.000 description 9
- 241000700159 Rattus Species 0.000 description 8
- 239000000427 antigen Substances 0.000 description 8
- 108091007433 antigens Proteins 0.000 description 8
- 102000036639 antigens Human genes 0.000 description 8
- 238000013459 approach Methods 0.000 description 8
- 229940079593 drug Drugs 0.000 description 8
- 238000001727 in vivo Methods 0.000 description 8
- 230000001965 increasing effect Effects 0.000 description 8
- 229920000642 polymer Polymers 0.000 description 8
- 238000000746 purification Methods 0.000 description 8
- 208000001072 type 2 diabetes mellitus Diseases 0.000 description 8
- 241000701447 unidentified baculovirus Species 0.000 description 8
- 241000894006 Bacteria Species 0.000 description 7
- 241000699670 Mus sp. Species 0.000 description 7
- 238000003491 array Methods 0.000 description 7
- 230000000295 complement effect Effects 0.000 description 7
- 201000010099 disease Diseases 0.000 description 7
- 210000003527 eukaryotic cell Anatomy 0.000 description 7
- 108020001507 fusion proteins Proteins 0.000 description 7
- 102000037865 fusion proteins Human genes 0.000 description 7
- 238000000338 in vitro Methods 0.000 description 7
- 238000011534 incubation Methods 0.000 description 7
- 208000015181 infectious disease Diseases 0.000 description 7
- 239000002502 liposome Substances 0.000 description 7
- 239000012528 membrane Substances 0.000 description 7
- 210000004379 membrane Anatomy 0.000 description 7
- 238000002360 preparation method Methods 0.000 description 7
- 230000001177 retroviral effect Effects 0.000 description 7
- 239000007790 solid phase Substances 0.000 description 7
- 230000009261 transgenic effect Effects 0.000 description 7
- 108700028369 Alleles Proteins 0.000 description 6
- ZHNUHDYFZUAESO-UHFFFAOYSA-N Formamide Chemical compound NC=O ZHNUHDYFZUAESO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 6
- 108091034117 Oligonucleotide Proteins 0.000 description 6
- 108060008682 Tumor Necrosis Factor Proteins 0.000 description 6
- 102000000852 Tumor Necrosis Factor-alpha Human genes 0.000 description 6
- JLCPHMBAVCMARE-UHFFFAOYSA-N [3-[[3-[[3-[[3-[[3-[[3-[[3-[[3-[[3-[[3-[[3-[[5-(2-amino-6-oxo-1H-purin-9-yl)-3-[[3-[[3-[[3-[[3-[[3-[[5-(2-amino-6-oxo-1H-purin-9-yl)-3-[[5-(2-amino-6-oxo-1H-purin-9-yl)-3-hydroxyoxolan-2-yl]methoxy-hydroxyphosphoryl]oxyoxolan-2-yl]methoxy-hydroxyphosphoryl]oxy-5-(5-methyl-2,4-dioxopyrimidin-1-yl)oxolan-2-yl]methoxy-hydroxyphosphoryl]oxy-5-(6-aminopurin-9-yl)oxolan-2-yl]methoxy-hydroxyphosphoryl]oxy-5-(6-aminopurin-9-yl)oxolan-2-yl]methoxy-hydroxyphosphoryl]oxy-5-(6-aminopurin-9-yl)oxolan-2-yl]methoxy-hydroxyphosphoryl]oxy-5-(6-aminopurin-9-yl)oxolan-2-yl]methoxy-hydroxyphosphoryl]oxyoxolan-2-yl]methoxy-hydroxyphosphoryl]oxy-5-(5-methyl-2,4-dioxopyrimidin-1-yl)oxolan-2-yl]methoxy-hydroxyphosphoryl]oxy-5-(4-amino-2-oxopyrimidin-1-yl)oxolan-2-yl]methoxy-hydroxyphosphoryl]oxy-5-(5-methyl-2,4-dioxopyrimidin-1-yl)oxolan-2-yl]methoxy-hydroxyphosphoryl]oxy-5-(5-methyl-2,4-dioxopyrimidin-1-yl)oxolan-2-yl]methoxy-hydroxyphosphoryl]oxy-5-(6-aminopurin-9-yl)oxolan-2-yl]methoxy-hydroxyphosphoryl]oxy-5-(6-aminopurin-9-yl)oxolan-2-yl]methoxy-hydroxyphosphoryl]oxy-5-(4-amino-2-oxopyrimidin-1-yl)oxolan-2-yl]methoxy-hydroxyphosphoryl]oxy-5-(4-amino-2-oxopyrimidin-1-yl)oxolan-2-yl]methoxy-hydroxyphosphoryl]oxy-5-(4-amino-2-oxopyrimidin-1-yl)oxolan-2-yl]methoxy-hydroxyphosphoryl]oxy-5-(6-aminopurin-9-yl)oxolan-2-yl]methoxy-hydroxyphosphoryl]oxy-5-(4-amino-2-oxopyrimidin-1-yl)oxolan-2-yl]methyl [5-(6-aminopurin-9-yl)-2-(hydroxymethyl)oxolan-3-yl] hydrogen phosphate Polymers Cc1cn(C2CC(OP(O)(=O)OCC3OC(CC3OP(O)(=O)OCC3OC(CC3O)n3cnc4c3nc(N)[nH]c4=O)n3cnc4c3nc(N)[nH]c4=O)C(COP(O)(=O)OC3CC(OC3COP(O)(=O)OC3CC(OC3COP(O)(=O)OC3CC(OC3COP(O)(=O)OC3CC(OC3COP(O)(=O)OC3CC(OC3COP(O)(=O)OC3CC(OC3COP(O)(=O)OC3CC(OC3COP(O)(=O)OC3CC(OC3COP(O)(=O)OC3CC(OC3COP(O)(=O)OC3CC(OC3COP(O)(=O)OC3CC(OC3COP(O)(=O)OC3CC(OC3COP(O)(=O)OC3CC(OC3COP(O)(=O)OC3CC(OC3COP(O)(=O)OC3CC(OC3COP(O)(=O)OC3CC(OC3COP(O)(=O)OC3CC(OC3CO)n3cnc4c(N)ncnc34)n3ccc(N)nc3=O)n3cnc4c(N)ncnc34)n3ccc(N)nc3=O)n3ccc(N)nc3=O)n3ccc(N)nc3=O)n3cnc4c(N)ncnc34)n3cnc4c(N)ncnc34)n3cc(C)c(=O)[nH]c3=O)n3cc(C)c(=O)[nH]c3=O)n3ccc(N)nc3=O)n3cc(C)c(=O)[nH]c3=O)n3cnc4c3nc(N)[nH]c4=O)n3cnc4c(N)ncnc34)n3cnc4c(N)ncnc34)n3cnc4c(N)ncnc34)n3cnc4c(N)ncnc34)O2)c(=O)[nH]c1=O JLCPHMBAVCMARE-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 6
- 230000004913 activation Effects 0.000 description 6
- 125000000539 amino acid group Chemical group 0.000 description 6
- 239000005557 antagonist Substances 0.000 description 6
- 239000002585 base Substances 0.000 description 6
- 230000003833 cell viability Effects 0.000 description 6
- 230000009260 cross reactivity Effects 0.000 description 6
- 230000002950 deficient Effects 0.000 description 6
- 210000002472 endoplasmic reticulum Anatomy 0.000 description 6
- 239000000499 gel Substances 0.000 description 6
- 238000004519 manufacturing process Methods 0.000 description 6
- 238000004806 packaging method and process Methods 0.000 description 6
- 230000036961 partial effect Effects 0.000 description 6
- 230000001105 regulatory effect Effects 0.000 description 6
- 230000010076 replication Effects 0.000 description 6
- 238000012552 review Methods 0.000 description 6
- 241000894007 species Species 0.000 description 6
- 230000014616 translation Effects 0.000 description 6
- 108060003951 Immunoglobulin Proteins 0.000 description 5
- 108010008281 Recombinant Fusion Proteins Proteins 0.000 description 5
- 102000007056 Recombinant Fusion Proteins Human genes 0.000 description 5
- 239000006180 TBST buffer Substances 0.000 description 5
- 102100036407 Thioredoxin Human genes 0.000 description 5
- 108700019146 Transgenes Proteins 0.000 description 5
- 208000036142 Viral infection Diseases 0.000 description 5
- 238000007792 addition Methods 0.000 description 5
- 239000000556 agonist Substances 0.000 description 5
- 230000015572 biosynthetic process Effects 0.000 description 5
- 235000020958 biotin Nutrition 0.000 description 5
- 229960002685 biotin Drugs 0.000 description 5
- 239000011616 biotin Substances 0.000 description 5
- 239000000872 buffer Substances 0.000 description 5
- 230000001186 cumulative effect Effects 0.000 description 5
- 238000012217 deletion Methods 0.000 description 5
- 230000037430 deletion Effects 0.000 description 5
- 238000003745 diagnosis Methods 0.000 description 5
- 239000007850 fluorescent dye Substances 0.000 description 5
- 230000001900 immune effect Effects 0.000 description 5
- 102000018358 immunoglobulin Human genes 0.000 description 5
- 230000005764 inhibitory process Effects 0.000 description 5
- 230000003993 interaction Effects 0.000 description 5
- 238000007834 ligase chain reaction Methods 0.000 description 5
- 239000006166 lysate Substances 0.000 description 5
- 210000004962 mammalian cell Anatomy 0.000 description 5
- 238000007899 nucleic acid hybridization Methods 0.000 description 5
- 230000037361 pathway Effects 0.000 description 5
- 102000005962 receptors Human genes 0.000 description 5
- 108020003175 receptors Proteins 0.000 description 5
- 230000002829 reductive effect Effects 0.000 description 5
- 239000000243 solution Substances 0.000 description 5
- 238000010561 standard procedure Methods 0.000 description 5
- 230000035882 stress Effects 0.000 description 5
- 238000003786 synthesis reaction Methods 0.000 description 5
- 230000001225 therapeutic effect Effects 0.000 description 5
- 108060008226 thioredoxin Proteins 0.000 description 5
- 238000013519 translation Methods 0.000 description 5
- 241001430294 unidentified retrovirus Species 0.000 description 5
- 230000035899 viability Effects 0.000 description 5
- 230000009385 viral infection Effects 0.000 description 5
- 238000001262 western blot Methods 0.000 description 5
- 241000282412 Homo Species 0.000 description 4
- 108010021625 Immunoglobulin Fragments Proteins 0.000 description 4
- 206010022489 Insulin Resistance Diseases 0.000 description 4
- FFEARJCKVFRZRR-BYPYZUCNSA-N L-methionine Chemical group CSCC[C@H](N)C(O)=O FFEARJCKVFRZRR-BYPYZUCNSA-N 0.000 description 4
- 241000124008 Mammalia Species 0.000 description 4
- 101710182846 Polyhedrin Proteins 0.000 description 4
- 108010090804 Streptavidin Proteins 0.000 description 4
- 239000012190 activator Substances 0.000 description 4
- 239000013543 active substance Substances 0.000 description 4
- 238000002820 assay format Methods 0.000 description 4
- 239000011324 bead Substances 0.000 description 4
- 229940049706 benzodiazepine Drugs 0.000 description 4
- 150000001557 benzodiazepines Chemical class 0.000 description 4
- 239000012472 biological sample Substances 0.000 description 4
- 230000003197 catalytic effect Effects 0.000 description 4
- 238000002648 combination therapy Methods 0.000 description 4
- 230000009918 complex formation Effects 0.000 description 4
- 230000000875 corresponding effect Effects 0.000 description 4
- 238000001502 gel electrophoresis Methods 0.000 description 4
- 230000002068 genetic effect Effects 0.000 description 4
- 239000011521 glass Substances 0.000 description 4
- 230000003053 immunization Effects 0.000 description 4
- 238000000099 in vitro assay Methods 0.000 description 4
- 230000002401 inhibitory effect Effects 0.000 description 4
- 230000010354 integration Effects 0.000 description 4
- 238000002955 isolation Methods 0.000 description 4
- 238000000021 kinase assay Methods 0.000 description 4
- 125000005647 linker group Chemical group 0.000 description 4
- 150000002632 lipids Chemical class 0.000 description 4
- 238000001638 lipofection Methods 0.000 description 4
- 230000007246 mechanism Effects 0.000 description 4
- 229930182817 methionine Chemical group 0.000 description 4
- 230000003287 optical effect Effects 0.000 description 4
- 239000000816 peptidomimetic Substances 0.000 description 4
- 239000008194 pharmaceutical composition Substances 0.000 description 4
- 239000000047 product Substances 0.000 description 4
- 230000009467 reduction Effects 0.000 description 4
- 230000004044 response Effects 0.000 description 4
- 238000000926 separation method Methods 0.000 description 4
- 230000009870 specific binding Effects 0.000 description 4
- 238000010361 transduction Methods 0.000 description 4
- 230000026683 transduction Effects 0.000 description 4
- 238000001890 transfection Methods 0.000 description 4
- 210000002700 urine Anatomy 0.000 description 4
- QKNYBSVHEMOAJP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-amino-2-(hydroxymethyl)propane-1,3-diol;hydron;chloride Chemical compound Cl.OCC(N)(CO)CO QKNYBSVHEMOAJP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 239000013607 AAV vector Substances 0.000 description 3
- 108090000994 Catalytic RNA Proteins 0.000 description 3
- 102000053642 Catalytic RNA Human genes 0.000 description 3
- 102000004127 Cytokines Human genes 0.000 description 3
- 108090000695 Cytokines Proteins 0.000 description 3
- IAZDPXIOMUYVGZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N Dimethylsulphoxide Chemical compound CS(C)=O IAZDPXIOMUYVGZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 239000006144 Dulbecco’s modified Eagle's medium Substances 0.000 description 3
- 108010070675 Glutathione transferase Proteins 0.000 description 3
- 102100029100 Hematopoietic prostaglandin D synthase Human genes 0.000 description 3
- 241000238631 Hexapoda Species 0.000 description 3
- 102000008394 Immunoglobulin Fragments Human genes 0.000 description 3
- 108700005091 Immunoglobulin Genes Proteins 0.000 description 3
- 102100021244 Integral membrane protein GPR180 Human genes 0.000 description 3
- 108010055717 JNK Mitogen-Activated Protein Kinases Proteins 0.000 description 3
- QNAYBMKLOCPYGJ-REOHCLBHSA-N L-alanine Chemical compound C[C@H](N)C(O)=O QNAYBMKLOCPYGJ-REOHCLBHSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 108091054455 MAP kinase family Proteins 0.000 description 3
- 102000043136 MAP kinase family Human genes 0.000 description 3
- 241000283973 Oryctolagus cuniculus Species 0.000 description 3
- 229910019142 PO4 Inorganic materials 0.000 description 3
- 241000276498 Pollachius virens Species 0.000 description 3
- 108020004511 Recombinant DNA Proteins 0.000 description 3
- PLXBWHJQWKZRKG-UHFFFAOYSA-N Resazurin Chemical compound C1=CC(=O)C=C2OC3=CC(O)=CC=C3[N+]([O-])=C21 PLXBWHJQWKZRKG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 229940123464 Thiazolidinedione Drugs 0.000 description 3
- 206010067584 Type 1 diabetes mellitus Diseases 0.000 description 3
- 239000002671 adjuvant Substances 0.000 description 3
- 235000004279 alanine Nutrition 0.000 description 3
- 230000000692 anti-sense effect Effects 0.000 description 3
- 230000000890 antigenic effect Effects 0.000 description 3
- 230000001640 apoptogenic effect Effects 0.000 description 3
- 230000001580 bacterial effect Effects 0.000 description 3
- 230000008901 benefit Effects 0.000 description 3
- 230000001413 cellular effect Effects 0.000 description 3
- 238000010367 cloning Methods 0.000 description 3
- 230000009137 competitive binding Effects 0.000 description 3
- 230000001419 dependent effect Effects 0.000 description 3
- 239000003937 drug carrier Substances 0.000 description 3
- 239000000975 dye Substances 0.000 description 3
- DEFVIWRASFVYLL-UHFFFAOYSA-N ethylene glycol bis(2-aminoethyl)tetraacetic acid Chemical compound OC(=O)CN(CC(O)=O)CCOCCOCCN(CC(O)=O)CC(O)=O DEFVIWRASFVYLL-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 238000002474 experimental method Methods 0.000 description 3
- 210000002950 fibroblast Anatomy 0.000 description 3
- 230000004927 fusion Effects 0.000 description 3
- 238000010353 genetic engineering Methods 0.000 description 3
- 238000007446 glucose tolerance test Methods 0.000 description 3
- ZNNLBTZKUZBEKO-UHFFFAOYSA-N glyburide Chemical compound COC1=CC=C(Cl)C=C1C(=O)NCCC1=CC=C(S(=O)(=O)NC(=O)NC2CCCCC2)C=C1 ZNNLBTZKUZBEKO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 238000013537 high throughput screening Methods 0.000 description 3
- 210000005260 human cell Anatomy 0.000 description 3
- 238000002649 immunization Methods 0.000 description 3
- 238000005462 in vivo assay Methods 0.000 description 3
- 210000003000 inclusion body Anatomy 0.000 description 3
- 238000007912 intraperitoneal administration Methods 0.000 description 3
- 239000011159 matrix material Substances 0.000 description 3
- 238000005259 measurement Methods 0.000 description 3
- 230000001404 mediated effect Effects 0.000 description 3
- 239000002609 medium Substances 0.000 description 3
- 238000000520 microinjection Methods 0.000 description 3
- 235000013336 milk Nutrition 0.000 description 3
- 239000008267 milk Substances 0.000 description 3
- 210000004080 milk Anatomy 0.000 description 3
- 230000004048 modification Effects 0.000 description 3
- 238000012986 modification Methods 0.000 description 3
- 230000035772 mutation Effects 0.000 description 3
- 239000002245 particle Substances 0.000 description 3
- NBIIXXVUZAFLBC-UHFFFAOYSA-K phosphate Chemical compound [O-]P([O-])([O-])=O NBIIXXVUZAFLBC-UHFFFAOYSA-K 0.000 description 3
- 239000010452 phosphate Substances 0.000 description 3
- 230000026731 phosphorylation Effects 0.000 description 3
- 238000006366 phosphorylation reaction Methods 0.000 description 3
- 230000002285 radioactive effect Effects 0.000 description 3
- 238000003753 real-time PCR Methods 0.000 description 3
- 238000011160 research Methods 0.000 description 3
- 108091092562 ribozyme Proteins 0.000 description 3
- 150000003839 salts Chemical class 0.000 description 3
- 230000035945 sensitivity Effects 0.000 description 3
- 238000012163 sequencing technique Methods 0.000 description 3
- 238000002560 therapeutic procedure Methods 0.000 description 3
- 238000013518 transcription Methods 0.000 description 3
- 230000035897 transcription Effects 0.000 description 3
- 238000011179 visual inspection Methods 0.000 description 3
- MZOFCQQQCNRIBI-VMXHOPILSA-N (3s)-4-[[(2s)-1-[[(2s)-1-[[(1s)-1-carboxy-2-hydroxyethyl]amino]-4-methyl-1-oxopentan-2-yl]amino]-5-(diaminomethylideneamino)-1-oxopentan-2-yl]amino]-3-[[2-[[(2s)-2,6-diaminohexanoyl]amino]acetyl]amino]-4-oxobutanoic acid Chemical compound OC[C@@H](C(O)=O)NC(=O)[C@H](CC(C)C)NC(=O)[C@H](CCCN=C(N)N)NC(=O)[C@H](CC(O)=O)NC(=O)CNC(=O)[C@@H](N)CCCCN MZOFCQQQCNRIBI-VMXHOPILSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 102000040650 (ribonucleotides)n+m Human genes 0.000 description 2
- HRPVXLWXLXDGHG-UHFFFAOYSA-N Acrylamide Chemical compound NC(=O)C=C HRPVXLWXLXDGHG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 239000004475 Arginine Substances 0.000 description 2
- IJGRMHOSHXDMSA-UHFFFAOYSA-N Atomic nitrogen Chemical compound N#N IJGRMHOSHXDMSA-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 206010006187 Breast cancer Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 101800001415 Bri23 peptide Proteins 0.000 description 2
- 101800000655 C-terminal peptide Proteins 0.000 description 2
- 102400000107 C-terminal peptide Human genes 0.000 description 2
- 108020004635 Complementary DNA Proteins 0.000 description 2
- 241000557626 Corvus corax Species 0.000 description 2
- BWGNESOTFCXPMA-UHFFFAOYSA-N Dihydrogen disulfide Chemical compound SS BWGNESOTFCXPMA-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 102100023274 Dual specificity mitogen-activated protein kinase kinase 4 Human genes 0.000 description 2
- 238000002965 ELISA Methods 0.000 description 2
- 241000713813 Gibbon ape leukemia virus Species 0.000 description 2
- DHMQDGOQFOQNFH-UHFFFAOYSA-N Glycine Chemical compound NCC(O)=O DHMQDGOQFOQNFH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 101710154606 Hemagglutinin Proteins 0.000 description 2
- 241000725303 Human immunodeficiency virus Species 0.000 description 2
- 108010058683 Immobilized Proteins Proteins 0.000 description 2
- 102000009786 Immunoglobulin Constant Regions Human genes 0.000 description 2
- 108010009817 Immunoglobulin Constant Regions Proteins 0.000 description 2
- 108010050904 Interferons Proteins 0.000 description 2
- 102000014150 Interferons Human genes 0.000 description 2
- 102000000589 Interleukin-1 Human genes 0.000 description 2
- 108010002352 Interleukin-1 Proteins 0.000 description 2
- 108091092195 Intron Proteins 0.000 description 2
- 108010041872 Islet Amyloid Polypeptide Proteins 0.000 description 2
- 102000036770 Islet Amyloid Polypeptide Human genes 0.000 description 2
- LRQKBLKVPFOOQJ-YFKPBYRVSA-N L-norleucine Chemical group CCCC[C@H]([NH3+])C([O-])=O LRQKBLKVPFOOQJ-YFKPBYRVSA-N 0.000 description 2
- QIVBCDIJIAJPQS-VIFPVBQESA-N L-tryptophane Chemical compound C1=CC=C2C(C[C@H](N)C(O)=O)=CNC2=C1 QIVBCDIJIAJPQS-VIFPVBQESA-N 0.000 description 2
- 241000713666 Lentivirus Species 0.000 description 2
- 102000001291 MAP Kinase Kinase Kinase Human genes 0.000 description 2
- 108060006687 MAP kinase kinase kinase Proteins 0.000 description 2
- 241000714177 Murine leukemia virus Species 0.000 description 2
- 108091061960 Naked DNA Proteins 0.000 description 2
- 108090000590 Neurotransmitter Receptors Proteins 0.000 description 2
- 238000000636 Northern blotting Methods 0.000 description 2
- 101710093908 Outer capsid protein VP4 Proteins 0.000 description 2
- 101710135467 Outer capsid protein sigma-1 Proteins 0.000 description 2
- 241001494479 Pecora Species 0.000 description 2
- 108010067902 Peptide Library Proteins 0.000 description 2
- ATUOYWHBWRKTHZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N Propane Chemical compound CCC ATUOYWHBWRKTHZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 101710176177 Protein A56 Proteins 0.000 description 2
- 238000012228 RNA interference-mediated gene silencing Methods 0.000 description 2
- YASAKCUCGLMORW-UHFFFAOYSA-N Rosiglitazone Chemical compound C=1C=CC=NC=1N(C)CCOC(C=C1)=CC=C1CC1SC(=O)NC1=O YASAKCUCGLMORW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 240000004808 Saccharomyces cerevisiae Species 0.000 description 2
- 241000713311 Simian immunodeficiency virus Species 0.000 description 2
- FKNQFGJONOIPTF-UHFFFAOYSA-N Sodium cation Chemical compound [Na+] FKNQFGJONOIPTF-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- FAPWRFPIFSIZLT-UHFFFAOYSA-M Sodium chloride Chemical compound [Na+].[Cl-] FAPWRFPIFSIZLT-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 2
- 238000002105 Southern blotting Methods 0.000 description 2
- 229940100389 Sulfonylurea Drugs 0.000 description 2
- 241000282898 Sus scrofa Species 0.000 description 2
- 210000001744 T-lymphocyte Anatomy 0.000 description 2
- 101710120037 Toxin CcdB Proteins 0.000 description 2
- 229920004890 Triton X-100 Polymers 0.000 description 2
- 239000013504 Triton X-100 Substances 0.000 description 2
- QIVBCDIJIAJPQS-UHFFFAOYSA-N Tryptophan Natural products C1=CC=C2C(CC(N)C(O)=O)=CNC2=C1 QIVBCDIJIAJPQS-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 102100033732 Tumor necrosis factor receptor superfamily member 1A Human genes 0.000 description 2
- 101710187743 Tumor necrosis factor receptor superfamily member 1A Proteins 0.000 description 2
- 108020005202 Viral DNA Proteins 0.000 description 2
- 239000000443 aerosol Substances 0.000 description 2
- 238000013019 agitation Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000004075 alteration Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000010171 animal model Methods 0.000 description 2
- 239000007864 aqueous solution Substances 0.000 description 2
- ODKSFYDXXFIFQN-UHFFFAOYSA-N arginine Natural products OC(=O)C(N)CCCNC(N)=N ODKSFYDXXFIFQN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 238000000376 autoradiography Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000009286 beneficial effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 229920001222 biopolymer Polymers 0.000 description 2
- 210000004899 c-terminal region Anatomy 0.000 description 2
- 125000003178 carboxy group Chemical group [H]OC(*)=O 0.000 description 2
- 239000013592 cell lysate Substances 0.000 description 2
- 230000004663 cell proliferation Effects 0.000 description 2
- 239000007795 chemical reaction product Substances 0.000 description 2
- HVYWMOMLDIMFJA-DPAQBDIFSA-N cholesterol Chemical compound C1C=C2C[C@@H](O)CC[C@]2(C)[C@@H]2[C@@H]1[C@@H]1CC[C@H]([C@H](C)CCCC(C)C)[C@@]1(C)CC2 HVYWMOMLDIMFJA-DPAQBDIFSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 238000004590 computer program Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000021615 conjugation Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000010276 construction Methods 0.000 description 2
- 238000013500 data storage Methods 0.000 description 2
- FMGSKLZLMKYGDP-USOAJAOKSA-N dehydroepiandrosterone Chemical compound C1[C@@H](O)CC[C@]2(C)[C@H]3CC[C@](C)(C(CC4)=O)[C@@H]4[C@@H]3CC=C21 FMGSKLZLMKYGDP-USOAJAOKSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 238000002716 delivery method Methods 0.000 description 2
- 238000013461 design Methods 0.000 description 2
- 235000005911 diet Nutrition 0.000 description 2
- 230000037213 diet Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000029087 digestion Effects 0.000 description 2
- 239000013024 dilution buffer Substances 0.000 description 2
- 239000000539 dimer Substances 0.000 description 2
- XEYBHCRIKKKOSS-UHFFFAOYSA-N disodium;azanylidyneoxidanium;iron(2+);pentacyanide Chemical compound [Na+].[Na+].[Fe+2].N#[C-].N#[C-].N#[C-].N#[C-].N#[C-].[O+]#N XEYBHCRIKKKOSS-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 208000035475 disorder Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 238000006073 displacement reaction Methods 0.000 description 2
- 238000005516 engineering process Methods 0.000 description 2
- HKSZLNNOFSGOKW-UHFFFAOYSA-N ent-staurosporine Natural products C12=C3N4C5=CC=CC=C5C3=C3CNC(=O)C3=C2C2=CC=CC=C2N1C1CC(NC)C(OC)C4(C)O1 HKSZLNNOFSGOKW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 230000002255 enzymatic effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 239000012530 fluid Substances 0.000 description 2
- 235000013305 food Nutrition 0.000 description 2
- 238000005194 fractionation Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000009368 gene silencing by RNA Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000007429 general method Methods 0.000 description 2
- 229960004580 glibenclamide Drugs 0.000 description 2
- 230000004153 glucose metabolism Effects 0.000 description 2
- PCHJSUWPFVWCPO-UHFFFAOYSA-N gold Chemical compound [Au] PCHJSUWPFVWCPO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 239000000185 hemagglutinin Substances 0.000 description 2
- 238000012203 high throughput assay Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000006801 homologous recombination Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000002744 homologous recombination Methods 0.000 description 2
- 239000005556 hormone Substances 0.000 description 2
- 229940088597 hormone Drugs 0.000 description 2
- 125000002887 hydroxy group Chemical group [H]O* 0.000 description 2
- 230000028993 immune response Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000000984 immunochemical effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000007901 in situ hybridization Methods 0.000 description 2
- 238000012296 in situ hybridization assay Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000001939 inductive effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000001802 infusion Methods 0.000 description 2
- 239000007924 injection Substances 0.000 description 2
- 238000002347 injection Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000002452 interceptive effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 229940079322 interferon Drugs 0.000 description 2
- 150000002611 lead compounds Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- 230000002934 lysing effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 239000000463 material Substances 0.000 description 2
- 229910052751 metal Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- 239000002184 metal Substances 0.000 description 2
- 150000002739 metals Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- XZWYZXLIPXDOLR-UHFFFAOYSA-N metformin Chemical compound CN(C)C(=N)NC(N)=N XZWYZXLIPXDOLR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 229960003105 metformin Drugs 0.000 description 2
- 238000013508 migration Methods 0.000 description 2
- 238000002156 mixing Methods 0.000 description 2
- 239000000178 monomer Substances 0.000 description 2
- 230000036963 noncompetitive effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000001216 nucleic acid method Methods 0.000 description 2
- 238000002966 oligonucleotide array Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000003204 osmotic effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000036542 oxidative stress Effects 0.000 description 2
- 210000004923 pancreatic tissue Anatomy 0.000 description 2
- 230000007170 pathology Effects 0.000 description 2
- 210000001322 periplasm Anatomy 0.000 description 2
- HYAFETHFCAUJAY-UHFFFAOYSA-N pioglitazone Chemical compound N1=CC(CC)=CC=C1CCOC(C=C1)=CC=C1CC1C(=O)NC(=O)S1 HYAFETHFCAUJAY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 229920002401 polyacrylamide Polymers 0.000 description 2
- 239000013641 positive control Substances 0.000 description 2
- 210000001236 prokaryotic cell Anatomy 0.000 description 2
- 239000003642 reactive oxygen metabolite Substances 0.000 description 2
- 230000009257 reactivity Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000007894 restriction fragment length polymorphism technique Methods 0.000 description 2
- 239000012723 sample buffer Substances 0.000 description 2
- 230000003248 secreting effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000035939 shock Effects 0.000 description 2
- 229910001415 sodium ion Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- 229940083618 sodium nitroprusside Drugs 0.000 description 2
- 238000002764 solid phase assay Methods 0.000 description 2
- HKSZLNNOFSGOKW-FYTWVXJKSA-N staurosporine Chemical compound C12=C3N4C5=CC=CC=C5C3=C3CNC(=O)C3=C2C2=CC=CC=C2N1[C@H]1C[C@@H](NC)[C@@H](OC)[C@]4(C)O1 HKSZLNNOFSGOKW-FYTWVXJKSA-N 0.000 description 2
- CGPUWJWCVCFERF-UHFFFAOYSA-N staurosporine Natural products C12=C3N4C5=CC=CC=C5C3=C3CNC(=O)C3=C2C2=CC=CC=C2N1C1CC(NC)C(OC)C4(OC)O1 CGPUWJWCVCFERF-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 150000003431 steroids Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- 230000000638 stimulation Effects 0.000 description 2
- 235000000346 sugar Nutrition 0.000 description 2
- 239000013589 supplement Substances 0.000 description 2
- 239000000725 suspension Substances 0.000 description 2
- 208000024891 symptom Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 150000001467 thiazolidinediones Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- 230000009466 transformation Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000010200 validation analysis Methods 0.000 description 2
- DIGQNXIGRZPYDK-WKSCXVIASA-N (2R)-6-amino-2-[[2-[[(2S)-2-[[2-[[(2R)-2-[[(2S)-2-[[(2R,3S)-2-[[2-[[(2S)-2-[[2-[[(2S)-2-[[(2S)-2-[[(2R)-2-[[(2S,3S)-2-[[(2R)-2-[[(2S)-2-[[(2S)-2-[[(2S)-2-[[2-[[(2S)-2-[[(2R)-2-[[2-[[2-[[2-[(2-amino-1-hydroxyethylidene)amino]-3-carboxy-1-hydroxypropylidene]amino]-1-hydroxy-3-sulfanylpropylidene]amino]-1-hydroxyethylidene]amino]-1-hydroxy-3-sulfanylpropylidene]amino]-1,3-dihydroxypropylidene]amino]-1-hydroxyethylidene]amino]-1-hydroxypropylidene]amino]-1,3-dihydroxypropylidene]amino]-1,3-dihydroxypropylidene]amino]-1-hydroxy-3-sulfanylpropylidene]amino]-1,3-dihydroxybutylidene]amino]-1-hydroxy-3-sulfanylpropylidene]amino]-1-hydroxypropylidene]amino]-1,3-dihydroxypropylidene]amino]-1-hydroxyethylidene]amino]-1,5-dihydroxy-5-iminopentylidene]amino]-1-hydroxy-3-sulfanylpropylidene]amino]-1,3-dihydroxybutylidene]amino]-1-hydroxy-3-sulfanylpropylidene]amino]-1,3-dihydroxypropylidene]amino]-1-hydroxyethylidene]amino]-1-hydroxy-3-sulfanylpropylidene]amino]-1-hydroxyethylidene]amino]hexanoic acid Chemical compound C[C@@H]([C@@H](C(=N[C@@H](CS)C(=N[C@@H](C)C(=N[C@@H](CO)C(=NCC(=N[C@@H](CCC(=N)O)C(=NC(CS)C(=N[C@H]([C@H](C)O)C(=N[C@H](CS)C(=N[C@H](CO)C(=NCC(=N[C@H](CS)C(=NCC(=N[C@H](CCCCN)C(=O)O)O)O)O)O)O)O)O)O)O)O)O)O)O)N=C([C@H](CS)N=C([C@H](CO)N=C([C@H](CO)N=C([C@H](C)N=C(CN=C([C@H](CO)N=C([C@H](CS)N=C(CN=C(C(CS)N=C(C(CC(=O)O)N=C(CN)O)O)O)O)O)O)O)O)O)O)O)O DIGQNXIGRZPYDK-WKSCXVIASA-N 0.000 description 1
- XUFXOAAUWZOOIT-SXARVLRPSA-N (2R,3R,4R,5S,6R)-5-[[(2R,3R,4R,5S,6R)-5-[[(2R,3R,4S,5S,6R)-3,4-dihydroxy-6-methyl-5-[[(1S,4R,5S,6S)-4,5,6-trihydroxy-3-(hydroxymethyl)-1-cyclohex-2-enyl]amino]-2-oxanyl]oxy]-3,4-dihydroxy-6-(hydroxymethyl)-2-oxanyl]oxy]-6-(hydroxymethyl)oxane-2,3,4-triol Chemical compound O([C@H]1O[C@H](CO)[C@H]([C@@H]([C@H]1O)O)O[C@H]1O[C@@H]([C@H]([C@H](O)[C@H]1O)N[C@@H]1[C@@H]([C@@H](O)[C@H](O)C(CO)=C1)O)C)[C@@H]1[C@@H](CO)O[C@@H](O)[C@H](O)[C@H]1O XUFXOAAUWZOOIT-SXARVLRPSA-N 0.000 description 1
- UKAUYVFTDYCKQA-UHFFFAOYSA-N -2-Amino-4-hydroxybutanoic acid Natural products OC(=O)C(N)CCO UKAUYVFTDYCKQA-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- ZOBPZXTWZATXDG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 1,3-thiazolidine-2,4-dione Chemical compound O=C1CSC(=O)N1 ZOBPZXTWZATXDG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- BOVGTQGAOIONJV-BETUJISGSA-N 1-[(3ar,6as)-3,3a,4,5,6,6a-hexahydro-1h-cyclopenta[c]pyrrol-2-yl]-3-(4-methylphenyl)sulfonylurea Chemical compound C1=CC(C)=CC=C1S(=O)(=O)NC(=O)NN1C[C@H]2CCC[C@H]2C1 BOVGTQGAOIONJV-BETUJISGSA-N 0.000 description 1
- LLJFMFZYVVLQKT-UHFFFAOYSA-N 1-cyclohexyl-3-[4-[2-(7-methoxy-4,4-dimethyl-1,3-dioxo-2-isoquinolinyl)ethyl]phenyl]sulfonylurea Chemical compound C=1C(OC)=CC=C(C(C2=O)(C)C)C=1C(=O)N2CCC(C=C1)=CC=C1S(=O)(=O)NC(=O)NC1CCCCC1 LLJFMFZYVVLQKT-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 108020004463 18S ribosomal RNA Proteins 0.000 description 1
- PRDFBSVERLRRMY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2'-(4-ethoxyphenyl)-5-(4-methylpiperazin-1-yl)-2,5'-bibenzimidazole Chemical compound C1=CC(OCC)=CC=C1C1=NC2=CC=C(C=3NC4=CC(=CC=C4N=3)N3CCN(C)CC3)C=C2N1 PRDFBSVERLRRMY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- VGONTNSXDCQUGY-RRKCRQDMSA-N 2'-deoxyinosine Chemical group C1[C@H](O)[C@@H](CO)O[C@H]1N1C(N=CNC2=O)=C2N=C1 VGONTNSXDCQUGY-RRKCRQDMSA-N 0.000 description 1
- QVXUOWQZLYVTNI-UHFFFAOYSA-M 2-(2,5-diphenyltetrazol-1-ium-1-yl)-1,3-thiazole;bromide Chemical compound [Br-].C1=CSC([N+]=2N(N=NC=2C=2C=CC=CC=2)C=2C=CC=CC=2)=N1 QVXUOWQZLYVTNI-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 1
- BHNQPLPANNDEGL-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-(4-octylphenoxy)ethanol Chemical compound CCCCCCCCC1=CC=C(OCCO)C=C1 BHNQPLPANNDEGL-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- VOUAQYXWVJDEQY-QENPJCQMSA-N 33017-11-7 Chemical compound OC(=O)CC[C@H](N)C(=O)N[C@@H](C)C(=O)N[C@@H](CCC(O)=O)C(=O)N[C@@H](CC(O)=O)C(=O)N[C@@H](CC(C)C)C(=O)N[C@@H](CCC(N)=O)C(=O)N[C@@H](C(C)C)C(=O)NCC(=O)N[C@@H](CCC(N)=O)C(=O)N[C@@H](C(C)C)C(=O)N[C@@H](CCC(O)=O)C(=O)N[C@@H](CC(C)C)C(=O)NCC(=O)NCC(=O)NCC(=O)N1CCC[C@H]1C(=O)NCC(=O)N[C@@H](C)C(=O)NCC(=O)N[C@@H](CO)C(=O)N[C@@H](CC(C)C)C(=O)N[C@@H](CCC(N)=O)C(=O)N1[C@H](C(=O)N[C@@H](CC(C)C)C(=O)N[C@@H](C)C(=O)N[C@@H](CC(C)C)C(=O)N[C@@H](CCC(O)=O)C(=O)NCC(=O)N[C@@H](CO)C(=O)N[C@@H](CC(C)C)C(=O)N[C@@H](CCC(N)=O)C(O)=O)CCC1 VOUAQYXWVJDEQY-QENPJCQMSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229920000936 Agarose Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 102000002260 Alkaline Phosphatase Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108020004774 Alkaline Phosphatase Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 229940077274 Alpha glucosidase inhibitor Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 244000105975 Antidesma platyphyllum Species 0.000 description 1
- DCXYFEDJOCDNAF-UHFFFAOYSA-N Asparagine Natural products OC(=O)C(N)CC(N)=O DCXYFEDJOCDNAF-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 108090001008 Avidin Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 241000194110 Bacillus sp. (in: Bacteria) Species 0.000 description 1
- 229940123208 Biguanide Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 241000283690 Bos taurus Species 0.000 description 1
- 208000026310 Breast neoplasm Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 241000208199 Buxus sempervirens Species 0.000 description 1
- 108010075254 C-Peptide Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102000000905 Cadherin Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108050007957 Cadherin Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 108090000565 Capsid Proteins Proteins 0.000 description 1
- OKTJSMMVPCPJKN-UHFFFAOYSA-N Carbon Chemical compound [C] OKTJSMMVPCPJKN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 102000014914 Carrier Proteins Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108010078791 Carrier Proteins Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102000011727 Caspases Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108010076667 Caspases Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 108050000299 Chemokine receptor Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102000009410 Chemokine receptor Human genes 0.000 description 1
- RKWGIWYCVPQPMF-UHFFFAOYSA-N Chloropropamide Chemical compound CCCNC(=O)NS(=O)(=O)C1=CC=C(Cl)C=C1 RKWGIWYCVPQPMF-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- VYZAMTAEIAYCRO-UHFFFAOYSA-N Chromium Chemical compound [Cr] VYZAMTAEIAYCRO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- KPSRODZRAIWAKH-JTQLQIEISA-N Ciprofibrate Natural products C1=CC(OC(C)(C)C(O)=O)=CC=C1[C@H]1C(Cl)(Cl)C1 KPSRODZRAIWAKH-JTQLQIEISA-N 0.000 description 1
- 108700010070 Codon Usage Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 241000699800 Cricetinae Species 0.000 description 1
- 102000053602 DNA Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 238000000018 DNA microarray Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000003155 DNA primer Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000001712 DNA sequencing Methods 0.000 description 1
- 241000450599 DNA viruses Species 0.000 description 1
- FMGSKLZLMKYGDP-UHFFFAOYSA-N Dehydroepiandrosterone Natural products C1C(O)CCC2(C)C3CCC(C)(C(CC4)=O)C4C3CC=C21 FMGSKLZLMKYGDP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 108091027757 Deoxyribozyme Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 239000004338 Dichlorodifluoromethane Substances 0.000 description 1
- 108010016626 Dipeptides Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 108010065556 Drug Receptors Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102000013138 Drug Receptors Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 102100023275 Dual specificity mitogen-activated protein kinase kinase 3 Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 101710146518 Dual specificity mitogen-activated protein kinase kinase 4 Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102100023332 Dual specificity mitogen-activated protein kinase kinase 7 Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 102100027723 Endogenous retrovirus group K member 6 Rec protein Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 102100030013 Endoribonuclease Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 101800001467 Envelope glycoprotein E2 Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 101710091045 Envelope protein Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 241000283073 Equus caballus Species 0.000 description 1
- 241000588724 Escherichia coli Species 0.000 description 1
- 108700024394 Exon Proteins 0.000 description 1
- XZWYTXMRWQJBGX-VXBMVYAYSA-N FLAG peptide Chemical compound NCCCC[C@@H](C(O)=O)NC(=O)[C@H](CC(O)=O)NC(=O)[C@H](CC(O)=O)NC(=O)[C@H](CC(O)=O)NC(=O)[C@H](CC(O)=O)NC(=O)[C@H](CCCCN)NC(=O)[C@@H](NC(=O)[C@@H](N)CC(O)=O)CC1=CC=C(O)C=C1 XZWYTXMRWQJBGX-VXBMVYAYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 108010020195 FLAG peptide Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 108091006010 FLAG-tagged proteins Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 241000724791 Filamentous phage Species 0.000 description 1
- HEMJJKBWTPKOJG-UHFFFAOYSA-N Gemfibrozil Chemical compound CC1=CC=C(C)C(OCCCC(C)(C)C(O)=O)=C1 HEMJJKBWTPKOJG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- FAEKWTJYAYMJKF-QHCPKHFHSA-N GlucoNorm Chemical compound C1=C(C(O)=O)C(OCC)=CC(CC(=O)N[C@@H](CC(C)C)C=2C(=CC=CC=2)N2CCCCC2)=C1 FAEKWTJYAYMJKF-QHCPKHFHSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 208000002705 Glucose Intolerance Diseases 0.000 description 1
- WHUUTDBJXJRKMK-UHFFFAOYSA-N Glutamic acid Natural products OC(=O)C(N)CCC(O)=O WHUUTDBJXJRKMK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000004471 Glycine Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229920000209 Hexadimethrine bromide Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 108010093488 His-His-His-His-His-His Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 101001115394 Homo sapiens Dual specificity mitogen-activated protein kinase kinase 3 Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 101001115395 Homo sapiens Dual specificity mitogen-activated protein kinase kinase 4 Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 101000624594 Homo sapiens Dual specificity mitogen-activated protein kinase kinase 7 Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 101001010783 Homo sapiens Endoribonuclease Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 101000851181 Homo sapiens Epidermal growth factor receptor Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 101001033249 Homo sapiens Interleukin-1 beta Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 101001109800 Homo sapiens Pro-neuregulin-1, membrane-bound isoform Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 101001050288 Homo sapiens Transcription factor Jun Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 101000611183 Homo sapiens Tumor necrosis factor Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 108010001336 Horseradish Peroxidase Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 108090000144 Human Proteins Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102000003839 Human Proteins Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 241000701044 Human gammaherpesvirus 4 Species 0.000 description 1
- PMMYEEVYMWASQN-DMTCNVIQSA-N Hydroxyproline Chemical compound O[C@H]1CN[C@H](C(O)=O)C1 PMMYEEVYMWASQN-DMTCNVIQSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 206010020772 Hypertension Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 108010067060 Immunoglobulin Variable Region Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 206010056997 Impaired fasting glucose Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 208000026350 Inborn Genetic disease Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 108010074328 Interferon-gamma Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102000008070 Interferon-gamma Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108090000193 Interleukin-1 beta Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102000003777 Interleukin-1 beta Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108010063738 Interleukins Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102000015696 Interleukins Human genes 0.000 description 1
- ODKSFYDXXFIFQN-BYPYZUCNSA-P L-argininium(2+) Chemical compound NC(=[NH2+])NCCC[C@H]([NH3+])C(O)=O ODKSFYDXXFIFQN-BYPYZUCNSA-P 0.000 description 1
- DCXYFEDJOCDNAF-REOHCLBHSA-N L-asparagine Chemical compound OC(=O)[C@@H](N)CC(N)=O DCXYFEDJOCDNAF-REOHCLBHSA-N 0.000 description 1
- CKLJMWTZIZZHCS-REOHCLBHSA-N L-aspartic acid Chemical compound OC(=O)[C@@H](N)CC(O)=O CKLJMWTZIZZHCS-REOHCLBHSA-N 0.000 description 1
- UKAUYVFTDYCKQA-VKHMYHEASA-N L-homoserine Chemical group OC(=O)[C@@H](N)CCO UKAUYVFTDYCKQA-VKHMYHEASA-N 0.000 description 1
- AGPKZVBTJJNPAG-WHFBIAKZSA-N L-isoleucine Chemical compound CC[C@H](C)[C@H](N)C(O)=O AGPKZVBTJJNPAG-WHFBIAKZSA-N 0.000 description 1
- ROHFNLRQFUQHCH-YFKPBYRVSA-N L-leucine Chemical compound CC(C)C[C@H](N)C(O)=O ROHFNLRQFUQHCH-YFKPBYRVSA-N 0.000 description 1
- QEFRNWWLZKMPFJ-ZXPFJRLXSA-N L-methionine (R)-S-oxide Chemical group C[S@@](=O)CC[C@H]([NH3+])C([O-])=O QEFRNWWLZKMPFJ-ZXPFJRLXSA-N 0.000 description 1
- QEFRNWWLZKMPFJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N L-methionine sulphoxide Chemical group CS(=O)CCC(N)C(O)=O QEFRNWWLZKMPFJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- COLNVLDHVKWLRT-QMMMGPOBSA-N L-phenylalanine Chemical compound OC(=O)[C@@H](N)CC1=CC=CC=C1 COLNVLDHVKWLRT-QMMMGPOBSA-N 0.000 description 1
- OUYCCCASQSFEME-QMMMGPOBSA-N L-tyrosine Chemical compound OC(=O)[C@@H](N)CC1=CC=C(O)C=C1 OUYCCCASQSFEME-QMMMGPOBSA-N 0.000 description 1
- KZSNJWFQEVHDMF-BYPYZUCNSA-N L-valine Chemical compound CC(C)[C@H](N)C(O)=O KZSNJWFQEVHDMF-BYPYZUCNSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 108090001090 Lectins Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102000004856 Lectins Human genes 0.000 description 1
- ROHFNLRQFUQHCH-UHFFFAOYSA-N Leucine Natural products CC(C)CC(N)C(O)=O ROHFNLRQFUQHCH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000004472 Lysine Substances 0.000 description 1
- KDXKERNSBIXSRK-UHFFFAOYSA-N Lysine Natural products NCCCCC(N)C(O)=O KDXKERNSBIXSRK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 108010075639 MAP Kinase Kinase Kinase 5 Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 238000000134 MTT assay Methods 0.000 description 1
- 231100000002 MTT assay Toxicity 0.000 description 1
- 102000003792 Metallothionein Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108090000157 Metallothionein Proteins 0.000 description 1
- IBAQFPQHRJAVAV-ULAWRXDQSA-N Miglitol Chemical compound OCCN1C[C@H](O)[C@@H](O)[C@H](O)[C@H]1CO IBAQFPQHRJAVAV-ULAWRXDQSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 241000713869 Moloney murine leukemia virus Species 0.000 description 1
- 102000016943 Muramidase Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108010014251 Muramidase Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 241001529936 Murinae Species 0.000 description 1
- 241000699660 Mus musculus Species 0.000 description 1
- 101001044384 Mus musculus Interferon gamma Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 101100344292 Mus musculus Map3k5 gene Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 108010021466 Mutant Proteins Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102000008300 Mutant Proteins Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 102100038895 Myc proto-oncogene protein Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 101710135898 Myc proto-oncogene protein Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 108010062010 N-Acetylmuramoyl-L-alanine Amidase Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 206010028980 Neoplasm Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 108700019961 Neoplasm Genes Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102000048850 Neoplasm Genes Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 102000004108 Neurotransmitter Receptors Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108020004711 Nucleic Acid Probes Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 239000004677 Nylon Substances 0.000 description 1
- 108700020796 Oncogene Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102000043276 Oncogene Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108700026244 Open Reading Frames Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 108010028924 PPAR alpha Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102000023984 PPAR alpha Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108010016731 PPAR gamma Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102000000536 PPAR gamma Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108010044210 PPAR-beta Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 239000002033 PVDF binder Substances 0.000 description 1
- 241001631646 Papillomaviridae Species 0.000 description 1
- 102000057297 Pepsin A Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108090000284 Pepsin A Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 108091005804 Peptidases Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102000035195 Peptidases Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108091093037 Peptide nucleic acid Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 108010043958 Peptoids Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 241000577979 Peromyscus spicilegus Species 0.000 description 1
- OAICVXFJPJFONN-UHFFFAOYSA-N Phosphorus Chemical compound [P] OAICVXFJPJFONN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 206010035226 Plasma cell myeloma Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 239000004952 Polyamide Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229920002873 Polyethylenimine Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 239000004642 Polyimide Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000004743 Polypropylene Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000004793 Polystyrene Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229920002396 Polyurea Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 241000288906 Primates Species 0.000 description 1
- 241001415846 Procellariidae Species 0.000 description 1
- 102000001253 Protein Kinase Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 101710188315 Protein X Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102000016971 Proto-Oncogene Proteins c-kit Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108010014608 Proto-Oncogene Proteins c-kit Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 241000125945 Protoparvovirus Species 0.000 description 1
- 108010066717 Q beta Replicase Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 239000012083 RIPA buffer Substances 0.000 description 1
- 108010083644 Ribonucleases Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102000006382 Ribonucleases Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108091028664 Ribonucleotide Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 241000283984 Rodentia Species 0.000 description 1
- 241000714474 Rous sarcoma virus Species 0.000 description 1
- 241000607142 Salmonella Species 0.000 description 1
- 102000003800 Selectins Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108090000184 Selectins Proteins 0.000 description 1
- MTCFGRXMJLQNBG-UHFFFAOYSA-N Serine Natural products OCC(N)C(O)=O MTCFGRXMJLQNBG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 241000700584 Simplexvirus Species 0.000 description 1
- 101800001271 Surface protein Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 108090000925 TNF receptor-associated factor 2 Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102100034779 TRAF family member-associated NF-kappa-B activator Human genes 0.000 description 1
- AYFVYJQAPQTCCC-UHFFFAOYSA-N Threonine Natural products CC(O)C(N)C(O)=O AYFVYJQAPQTCCC-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000004473 Threonine Substances 0.000 description 1
- AUYYCJSJGJYCDS-LBPRGKRZSA-N Thyrolar Chemical class IC1=CC(C[C@H](N)C(O)=O)=CC(I)=C1OC1=CC=C(O)C(I)=C1 AUYYCJSJGJYCDS-LBPRGKRZSA-N 0.000 description 1
- JLRGJRBPOGGCBT-UHFFFAOYSA-N Tolbutamide Chemical compound CCCCNC(=O)NS(=O)(=O)C1=CC=C(C)C=C1 JLRGJRBPOGGCBT-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 101710150448 Transcriptional regulator Myc Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102000004338 Transferrin Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108090000901 Transferrin Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 108060008683 Tumor Necrosis Factor Receptor Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102100033733 Tumor necrosis factor receptor superfamily member 1B Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 101710187830 Tumor necrosis factor receptor superfamily member 1B Proteins 0.000 description 1
- KZSNJWFQEVHDMF-UHFFFAOYSA-N Valine Natural products CC(C)C(N)C(O)=O KZSNJWFQEVHDMF-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 241000251539 Vertebrata <Metazoa> Species 0.000 description 1
- 108070000030 Viral receptors Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 229930003316 Vitamin D Natural products 0.000 description 1
- QYSXJUFSXHHAJI-XFEUOLMDSA-N Vitamin D3 Natural products C1(/[C@@H]2CC[C@@H]([C@]2(CCC1)C)[C@H](C)CCCC(C)C)=C/C=C1\C[C@@H](O)CCC1=C QYSXJUFSXHHAJI-XFEUOLMDSA-N 0.000 description 1
- FZNCGRZWXLXZSZ-CIQUZCHMSA-N Voglibose Chemical compound OCC(CO)N[C@H]1C[C@](O)(CO)[C@@H](O)[C@H](O)[C@H]1O FZNCGRZWXLXZSZ-CIQUZCHMSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 238000002835 absorbance Methods 0.000 description 1
- 229960002632 acarbose Drugs 0.000 description 1
- XUFXOAAUWZOOIT-UHFFFAOYSA-N acarviostatin I01 Natural products OC1C(O)C(NC2C(C(O)C(O)C(CO)=C2)O)C(C)OC1OC(C(C1O)O)C(CO)OC1OC1C(CO)OC(O)C(O)C1O XUFXOAAUWZOOIT-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 230000001133 acceleration Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000009825 accumulation Methods 0.000 description 1
- 229960001466 acetohexamide Drugs 0.000 description 1
- VGZSUPCWNCWDAN-UHFFFAOYSA-N acetohexamide Chemical compound C1=CC(C(=O)C)=CC=C1S(=O)(=O)NC(=O)NC1CCCCC1 VGZSUPCWNCWDAN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000002253 acid Substances 0.000 description 1
- 150000007513 acids Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 230000003213 activating effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000001919 adrenal effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 210000004100 adrenal gland Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 230000002411 adverse Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000001261 affinity purification Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000011543 agarose gel Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000007818 agglutination assay Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000003513 alkali Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000003888 alpha glucosidase inhibitor Substances 0.000 description 1
- 150000001408 amides Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 150000001412 amines Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 125000003277 amino group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- BFNBIHQBYMNNAN-UHFFFAOYSA-N ammonium sulfate Chemical compound N.N.OS(O)(=O)=O BFNBIHQBYMNNAN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229910052921 ammonium sulfate Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 235000011130 ammonium sulphate Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 210000004102 animal cell Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 238000005571 anion exchange chromatography Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000000137 annealing Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000003178 anti-diabetic effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000000259 anti-tumor effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000009830 antibody antigen interaction Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000003472 antidiabetic agent Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000003963 antioxidant agent Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000003782 apoptosis assay Methods 0.000 description 1
- 235000009582 asparagine Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 229960001230 asparagine Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 235000003704 aspartic acid Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 210000003719 b-lymphocyte Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- OQFSQFPPLPISGP-UHFFFAOYSA-N beta-carboxyaspartic acid Natural products OC(=O)C(N)C(C(O)=O)C(O)=O OQFSQFPPLPISGP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229960000516 bezafibrate Drugs 0.000 description 1
- IIBYAHWJQTYFKB-UHFFFAOYSA-N bezafibrate Chemical compound C1=CC(OC(C)(C)C(O)=O)=CC=C1CCNC(=O)C1=CC=C(Cl)C=C1 IIBYAHWJQTYFKB-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 150000004283 biguanides Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 239000003012 bilayer membrane Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000004071 biological effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 229960000074 biopharmaceutical Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 230000037396 body weight Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000010804 cDNA synthesis Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000001506 calcium phosphate Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229910000389 calcium phosphate Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 235000011010 calcium phosphates Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 238000004364 calculation method Methods 0.000 description 1
- 235000019577 caloric intake Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 101150039352 can gene Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 201000011510 cancer Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 239000002775 capsule Substances 0.000 description 1
- 150000001720 carbohydrates Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 235000014633 carbohydrates Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 229910052799 carbon Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- UHBYWPGGCSDKFX-UHFFFAOYSA-N carboxyglutamic acid Chemical compound OC(=O)C(N)CC(C(O)=O)C(O)=O UHBYWPGGCSDKFX-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 230000015556 catabolic process Effects 0.000 description 1
- 125000002091 cationic group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 238000000423 cell based assay Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000032823 cell division Effects 0.000 description 1
- 210000000170 cell membrane Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 239000006285 cell suspension Substances 0.000 description 1
- 210000002421 cell wall Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 239000001913 cellulose Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229920002678 cellulose Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 238000005119 centrifugation Methods 0.000 description 1
- 210000001638 cerebellum Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 230000008859 change Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000002738 chelating agent Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000009614 chemical analysis method Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000002925 chemical effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 125000003636 chemical group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 238000006757 chemical reactions by type Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000013626 chemical specie Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000005081 chemiluminescent agent Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229960001761 chlorpropamide Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 235000012000 cholesterol Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 238000004587 chromatography analysis Methods 0.000 description 1
- 210000000349 chromosome Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- YZFWTZACSRHJQD-UHFFFAOYSA-N ciglitazone Chemical compound C=1C=C(CC2C(NC(=O)S2)=O)C=CC=1OCC1(C)CCCCC1 YZFWTZACSRHJQD-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229950009226 ciglitazone Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 229960002174 ciprofibrate Drugs 0.000 description 1
- KPSRODZRAIWAKH-UHFFFAOYSA-N ciprofibrate Chemical compound C1=CC(OC(C)(C)C(O)=O)=CC=C1C1C(Cl)(Cl)C1 KPSRODZRAIWAKH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229960001214 clofibrate Drugs 0.000 description 1
- KNHUKKLJHYUCFP-UHFFFAOYSA-N clofibrate Chemical compound CCOC(=O)C(C)(C)OC1=CC=C(Cl)C=C1 KNHUKKLJHYUCFP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 238000000975 co-precipitation Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000007398 colorimetric assay Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000004440 column chromatography Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000001447 compensatory effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000012875 competitive assay Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000002860 competitive effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000001218 confocal laser scanning microscopy Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000000470 constituent Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000011109 contamination Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000002596 correlated effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000004132 cross linking Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000009402 cross-breeding Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000013078 crystal Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000011461 current therapy Methods 0.000 description 1
- 229920005565 cyclic polymer Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 235000018417 cysteine Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- XUJNEKJLAYXESH-UHFFFAOYSA-N cysteine Natural products SCC(N)C(O)=O XUJNEKJLAYXESH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 102000003675 cytokine receptors Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108010057085 cytokine receptors Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 231100000433 cytotoxic Toxicity 0.000 description 1
- 230000001472 cytotoxic effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000007402 cytotoxic response Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000006378 damage Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000005860 defense response to virus Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000007812 deficiency Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000006731 degradation reaction Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000001934 delay Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000000841 delta opiate receptor agonist Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000005547 deoxyribonucleotide Substances 0.000 description 1
- 125000002637 deoxyribonucleotide group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 230000000368 destabilizing effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000003599 detergent Substances 0.000 description 1
- PXBRQCKWGAHEHS-UHFFFAOYSA-N dichlorodifluoromethane Chemical compound FC(F)(Cl)Cl PXBRQCKWGAHEHS-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 235000019404 dichlorodifluoromethane Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- BFMYDTVEBKDAKJ-UHFFFAOYSA-L disodium;(2',7'-dibromo-3',6'-dioxido-3-oxospiro[2-benzofuran-1,9'-xanthene]-4'-yl)mercury;hydrate Chemical compound O.[Na+].[Na+].O1C(=O)C2=CC=CC=C2C21C1=CC(Br)=C([O-])C([Hg])=C1OC1=C2C=C(Br)C([O-])=C1 BFMYDTVEBKDAKJ-UHFFFAOYSA-L 0.000 description 1
- 238000010494 dissociation reaction Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000005593 dissociations Effects 0.000 description 1
- PMMYEEVYMWASQN-UHFFFAOYSA-N dl-hydroxyproline Natural products OC1C[NH2+]C(C([O-])=O)C1 PMMYEEVYMWASQN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229940000406 drug candidate Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 241001493065 dsRNA viruses Species 0.000 description 1
- 238000001962 electrophoresis Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000004520 electroporation Methods 0.000 description 1
- 210000001671 embryonic stem cell Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 238000000295 emission spectrum Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000012869 ethanol precipitation Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000000605 extraction Methods 0.000 description 1
- 229960002297 fenofibrate Drugs 0.000 description 1
- YMTINGFKWWXKFG-UHFFFAOYSA-N fenofibrate Chemical compound C1=CC(OC(C)(C)C(=O)OC(C)C)=CC=C1C(=O)C1=CC=C(Cl)C=C1 YMTINGFKWWXKFG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 230000004720 fertilization Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000000684 flow cytometry Methods 0.000 description 1
- MHMNJMPURVTYEJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N fluorescein-5-isothiocyanate Chemical compound O1C(=O)C2=CC(N=C=S)=CC=C2C21C1=CC=C(O)C=C1OC1=CC(O)=CC=C21 MHMNJMPURVTYEJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 238000000799 fluorescence microscopy Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000037406 food intake Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000013467 fragmentation Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000006062 fragmentation reaction Methods 0.000 description 1
- 235000021588 free fatty acids Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 238000002825 functional assay Methods 0.000 description 1
- 229960003627 gemfibrozil Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 238000001476 gene delivery Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000003209 gene knockout Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000030279 gene silencing Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000007274 generation of a signal involved in cell-cell signaling Effects 0.000 description 1
- 208000016361 genetic disease Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 208000004104 gestational diabetes Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 229960000346 gliclazide Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 229960004346 glimepiride Drugs 0.000 description 1
- WIGIZIANZCJQQY-RUCARUNLSA-N glimepiride Chemical compound O=C1C(CC)=C(C)CN1C(=O)NCCC1=CC=C(S(=O)(=O)NC(=O)N[C@@H]2CC[C@@H](C)CC2)C=C1 WIGIZIANZCJQQY-RUCARUNLSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229960001381 glipizide Drugs 0.000 description 1
- ZJJXGWJIGJFDTL-UHFFFAOYSA-N glipizide Chemical compound C1=NC(C)=CN=C1C(=O)NCCC1=CC=C(S(=O)(=O)NC(=O)NC2CCCCC2)C=C1 ZJJXGWJIGJFDTL-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229960003468 gliquidone Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 235000013922 glutamic acid Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 239000004220 glutamic acid Substances 0.000 description 1
- ZDXPYRJPNDTMRX-UHFFFAOYSA-N glutamine Natural products OC(=O)C(N)CCC(N)=O ZDXPYRJPNDTMRX-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229940120105 glynase Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 239000010931 gold Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229910052737 gold Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 239000008187 granular material Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000001963 growth medium Substances 0.000 description 1
- 235000009424 haa Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 230000002650 habitual effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000036541 health Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000010438 heat treatment Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000004128 high performance liquid chromatography Methods 0.000 description 1
- 210000001320 hippocampus Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 108091008039 hormone receptors Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102000055650 human NRG1 Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 102000057041 human TNF Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 150000001469 hydantoins Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 239000001257 hydrogen Substances 0.000 description 1
- 150000002431 hydrogen Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 229910052739 hydrogen Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 229960002591 hydroxyproline Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 238000003119 immunoblot Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000003365 immunocytochemistry Methods 0.000 description 1
- 229940072221 immunoglobulins Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 238000003364 immunohistochemistry Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000010324 immunological assay Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000001976 improved effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000006872 improvement Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000000415 inactivating effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000006698 induction Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000000977 initiatory effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000006362 insulin response pathway Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000003914 insulin secretion Effects 0.000 description 1
- 102000006495 integrins Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108010044426 integrins Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 238000009830 intercalation Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000002687 intercalation Effects 0.000 description 1
- 229960003130 interferon gamma Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 102000002467 interleukin receptors Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108010093036 interleukin receptors Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 230000003834 intracellular effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 102000027411 intracellular receptors Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108091008582 intracellular receptors Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 238000007917 intracranial administration Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000007918 intramuscular administration Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000010255 intramuscular injection Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000007927 intramuscular injection Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000001990 intravenous administration Methods 0.000 description 1
- 229960000310 isoleucine Drugs 0.000 description 1
- AGPKZVBTJJNPAG-UHFFFAOYSA-N isoleucine Natural products CCC(C)C(N)C(O)=O AGPKZVBTJJNPAG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229940043355 kinase inhibitor Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 238000011005 laboratory method Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000004816 latex Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229920000126 latex Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 239000002523 lectin Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000013554 lipid monolayer Substances 0.000 description 1
- 210000004185 liver Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 230000007774 longterm Effects 0.000 description 1
- 229960000274 lysozyme Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 239000004325 lysozyme Substances 0.000 description 1
- 235000010335 lysozyme Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 210000002540 macrophage Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- TWRXJAOTZQYOKJ-UHFFFAOYSA-L magnesium chloride Substances [Mg+2].[Cl-].[Cl-] TWRXJAOTZQYOKJ-UHFFFAOYSA-L 0.000 description 1
- 229910001629 magnesium chloride Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- ADKOXSOCTOWDOP-UHFFFAOYSA-L magnesium;aluminum;dihydroxide;trihydrate Chemical compound O.O.O.[OH-].[OH-].[Mg+2].[Al] ADKOXSOCTOWDOP-UHFFFAOYSA-L 0.000 description 1
- 210000001161 mammalian embryo Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 239000003550 marker Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000004949 mass spectrometry Methods 0.000 description 1
- 235000012054 meals Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 238000002844 melting Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000008018 melting Effects 0.000 description 1
- 102000006240 membrane receptors Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108020004084 membrane receptors Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 230000002503 metabolic effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000004060 metabolic process Effects 0.000 description 1
- MYWUZJCMWCOHBA-VIFPVBQESA-N methamphetamine Chemical compound CN[C@@H](C)CC1=CC=CC=C1 MYWUZJCMWCOHBA-VIFPVBQESA-N 0.000 description 1
- LSDPWZHWYPCBBB-UHFFFAOYSA-O methylsulfide anion Chemical compound [SH2+]C LSDPWZHWYPCBBB-UHFFFAOYSA-O 0.000 description 1
- 238000010208 microarray analysis Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000000813 microbial effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 229960001110 miglitol Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 210000003470 mitochondria Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 108091005601 modified peptides Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 230000010070 molecular adhesion Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000010369 molecular cloning Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000004001 molecular interaction Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000003068 molecular probe Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000012544 monitoring process Methods 0.000 description 1
- 125000004573 morpholin-4-yl group Chemical group N1(CCOCC1)* 0.000 description 1
- 238000010172 mouse model Methods 0.000 description 1
- 210000000214 mouth Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 210000003205 muscle Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 201000000050 myeloid neoplasm Diseases 0.000 description 1
- VMGAPWLDMVPYIA-HIDZBRGKSA-N n'-amino-n-iminomethanimidamide Chemical compound N\N=C\N=N VMGAPWLDMVPYIA-HIDZBRGKSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229960000698 nateglinide Drugs 0.000 description 1
- OELFLUMRDSZNSF-BRWVUGGUSA-N nateglinide Chemical compound C1C[C@@H](C(C)C)CC[C@@H]1C(=O)N[C@@H](C(O)=O)CC1=CC=CC=C1 OELFLUMRDSZNSF-BRWVUGGUSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 230000009707 neogenesis Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000002858 neurotransmitter agent Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000007935 neutral effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 108010087904 neutravidin Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 239000002840 nitric oxide donor Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229910052757 nitrogen Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 239000012457 nonaqueous media Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000010606 normalization Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000007826 nucleic acid assay Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000002853 nucleic acid probe Substances 0.000 description 1
- 210000004940 nucleus Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 229920001778 nylon Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920001542 oligosaccharide Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 150000002482 oligosaccharides Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 229940127240 opiate Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 238000007410 oral glucose tolerance test Methods 0.000 description 1
- 210000000496 pancreas Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 230000001575 pathological effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 229940111202 pepsin Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 230000002093 peripheral effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 210000003200 peritoneal cavity Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 230000000144 pharmacologic effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- COLNVLDHVKWLRT-UHFFFAOYSA-N phenylalanine Natural products OC(=O)C(N)CC1=CC=CC=C1 COLNVLDHVKWLRT-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 150000003904 phospholipids Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- BZQFBWGGLXLEPQ-REOHCLBHSA-N phosphoserine Chemical compound OC(=O)[C@@H](N)COP(O)(O)=O BZQFBWGGLXLEPQ-REOHCLBHSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 230000037081 physical activity Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000000704 physical effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000010399 physical interaction Effects 0.000 description 1
- 229960005095 pioglitazone Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 230000036470 plasma concentration Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000004033 plastic Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229920003023 plastic Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 238000002264 polyacrylamide gel electrophoresis Methods 0.000 description 1
- 229920002647 polyamide Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920000412 polyarylene Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 239000004417 polycarbonate Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229920000515 polycarbonate Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 201000010065 polycystic ovary syndrome Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 229920000728 polyester Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920000570 polyether Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920001223 polyethylene glycol Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 230000003234 polygenic effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 229920001721 polyimide Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920001155 polypropylene Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920001296 polysiloxane Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920002223 polystyrene Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920002635 polyurethane Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 239000004814 polyurethane Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229920002981 polyvinylidene fluoride Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 230000008092 positive effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000001124 posttranscriptional effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000003389 potentiating effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000000843 powder Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229960003611 pramlintide Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 108010029667 pramlintide Proteins 0.000 description 1
- NRKVKVQDUCJPIZ-MKAGXXMWSA-N pramlintide acetate Chemical compound C([C@@H](C(=O)NCC(=O)N1CCC[C@H]1C(=O)N[C@@H]([C@@H](C)CC)C(=O)N[C@@H](CC(C)C)C(=O)N1[C@@H](CCC1)C(=O)N1[C@@H](CCC1)C(=O)N[C@@H]([C@@H](C)O)C(=O)N[C@@H](CC(N)=O)C(=O)N[C@@H](C(C)C)C(=O)NCC(=O)N[C@@H](CO)C(=O)N[C@@H](CC(N)=O)C(=O)N[C@@H]([C@@H](C)O)C(=O)N[C@@H](CC=1C=CC(O)=CC=1)C(N)=O)NC(=O)[C@H](CC(N)=O)NC(=O)[C@H](CC(N)=O)NC(=O)[C@H](CO)NC(=O)[C@H](CO)NC(=O)[C@H](CC=1NC=NC=1)NC(=O)[C@@H](NC(=O)[C@H](CC(C)C)NC(=O)[C@H](CC=1C=CC=CC=1)NC(=O)[C@H](CC(N)=O)NC(=O)[C@H](C)NC(=O)[C@H](CC(C)C)NC(=O)[C@H](CCCNC(N)=N)NC(=O)[C@H](CCC(N)=O)NC(=O)[C@@H](NC(=O)[C@H](C)NC(=O)[C@H](CS)NC(=O)[C@@H](NC(=O)[C@H](C)NC(=O)[C@@H](NC(=O)[C@H](CC(N)=O)NC(=O)[C@H](CS)NC(=O)[C@@H](N)CCCCN)[C@@H](C)O)[C@@H](C)O)[C@@H](C)O)C(C)C)C1=CC=CC=C1 NRKVKVQDUCJPIZ-MKAGXXMWSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229960002847 prasterone Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 238000001556 precipitation Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000002243 precursor Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000003755 preservative agent Substances 0.000 description 1
- 125000002924 primary amino group Chemical group [H]N([H])* 0.000 description 1
- 230000000861 pro-apoptotic effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000008569 process Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000005522 programmed cell death Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000007425 progressive decline Effects 0.000 description 1
- AAEVYOVXGOFMJO-UHFFFAOYSA-N prometryn Chemical compound CSC1=NC(NC(C)C)=NC(NC(C)C)=N1 AAEVYOVXGOFMJO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 230000000644 propagated effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000001294 propane Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000003380 propellant Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000000069 prophylactic effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 235000019833 protease Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 108060006633 protein kinase Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 239000003909 protein kinase inhibitor Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000001742 protein purification Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000001243 protein synthesis Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000006337 proteolytic cleavage Effects 0.000 description 1
- 210000001938 protoplast Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 150000003235 pyrrolidines Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 230000005855 radiation Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000011541 reaction mixture Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000010188 recombinant method Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000007115 recruitment Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000002824 redox indicator Substances 0.000 description 1
- BOLDJAUMGUJJKM-LSDHHAIUSA-N renifolin D Natural products CC(=C)[C@@H]1Cc2c(O)c(O)ccc2[C@H]1CC(=O)c3ccc(O)cc3O BOLDJAUMGUJJKM-LSDHHAIUSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229960002354 repaglinide Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 230000003362 replicative effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 229920005989 resin Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 239000011347 resin Substances 0.000 description 1
- 108091008146 restriction endonucleases Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 238000010839 reverse transcription Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000003757 reverse transcription PCR Methods 0.000 description 1
- PYWVYCXTNDRMGF-UHFFFAOYSA-N rhodamine B Chemical compound [Cl-].C=12C=CC(=[N+](CC)CC)C=C2OC2=CC(N(CC)CC)=CC=C2C=1C1=CC=CC=C1C(O)=O PYWVYCXTNDRMGF-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000002336 ribonucleotide Substances 0.000 description 1
- 125000002652 ribonucleotide group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 229960004586 rosiglitazone Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 238000007423 screening assay Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000000580 secretagogue effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000002864 sequence alignment Methods 0.000 description 1
- 210000002966 serum Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 239000013605 shuttle vector Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000011780 sodium chloride Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000002415 sodium dodecyl sulfate polyacrylamide gel electrophoresis Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000010532 solid phase synthesis reaction Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000002904 solvent Substances 0.000 description 1
- 210000004989 spleen cell Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 239000003381 stabilizer Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000011301 standard therapy Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000007619 statistical method Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000008174 sterile solution Substances 0.000 description 1
- 150000008163 sugars Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 229910021653 sulphate ion Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 239000006228 supernatant Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000000375 suspending agent Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229920001059 synthetic polymer Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 238000007910 systemic administration Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000003826 tablet Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000002626 targeted therapy Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000008685 targeting Effects 0.000 description 1
- 208000001608 teratocarcinoma Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 150000003505 terpenes Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- MPLHNVLQVRSVEE-UHFFFAOYSA-N texas red Chemical compound [O-]S(=O)(=O)C1=CC(S(Cl)(=O)=O)=CC=C1C(C1=CC=2CCCN3CCCC(C=23)=C1O1)=C2C1=C(CCC1)C3=[N+]1CCCC3=C2 MPLHNVLQVRSVEE-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 238000011285 therapeutic regimen Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000002562 thickening agent Substances 0.000 description 1
- 150000003568 thioethers Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 125000003396 thiol group Chemical group [H]S* 0.000 description 1
- 150000003573 thiols Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 229940094937 thioredoxin Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 239000005495 thyroid hormone Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229940036555 thyroid hormone Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 230000001550 time effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 229960002277 tolazamide Drugs 0.000 description 1
- OUDSBRTVNLOZBN-UHFFFAOYSA-N tolazamide Chemical compound C1=CC(C)=CC=C1S(=O)(=O)NC(=O)NN1CCCCCC1 OUDSBRTVNLOZBN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229960005371 tolbutamide Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 230000000699 topical effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 231100000419 toxicity Toxicity 0.000 description 1
- 230000001988 toxicity Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000003053 toxin Substances 0.000 description 1
- 231100000765 toxin Toxicity 0.000 description 1
- 108700012359 toxins Proteins 0.000 description 1
- FGMPLJWBKKVCDB-UHFFFAOYSA-N trans-L-hydroxy-proline Natural products ON1CCCC1C(O)=O FGMPLJWBKKVCDB-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000012581 transferrin Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000011830 transgenic mouse model Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000010474 transient expression Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000014621 translational initiation Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000032258 transport Effects 0.000 description 1
- QORWJWZARLRLPR-UHFFFAOYSA-H tricalcium bis(phosphate) Chemical compound [Ca+2].[Ca+2].[Ca+2].[O-]P([O-])([O-])=O.[O-]P([O-])([O-])=O QORWJWZARLRLPR-UHFFFAOYSA-H 0.000 description 1
- UFTFJSFQGQCHQW-UHFFFAOYSA-N triformin Chemical compound O=COCC(OC=O)COC=O UFTFJSFQGQCHQW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- GXPHKUHSUJUWKP-UHFFFAOYSA-N troglitazone Chemical compound C1CC=2C(C)=C(O)C(C)=C(C)C=2OC1(C)COC(C=C1)=CC=C1CC1SC(=O)NC1=O GXPHKUHSUJUWKP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229960001641 troglitazone Drugs 0.000 description 1
- GXPHKUHSUJUWKP-NTKDMRAZSA-N troglitazone Natural products C([C@@]1(OC=2C(C)=C(C(=C(C)C=2CC1)O)C)C)OC(C=C1)=CC=C1C[C@H]1SC(=O)NC1=O GXPHKUHSUJUWKP-NTKDMRAZSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 230000010415 tropism Effects 0.000 description 1
- 229940046728 tumor necrosis factor alpha inhibitor Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 239000002452 tumor necrosis factor alpha inhibitor Substances 0.000 description 1
- 102000003298 tumor necrosis factor receptor Human genes 0.000 description 1
- OUYCCCASQSFEME-UHFFFAOYSA-N tyrosine Natural products OC(=O)C(N)CC1=CC=C(O)C=C1 OUYCCCASQSFEME-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 238000000108 ultra-filtration Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000009281 ultraviolet germicidal irradiation Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000004474 valine Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000003981 vehicle Substances 0.000 description 1
- 231100000611 venom Toxicity 0.000 description 1
- 210000001048 venom Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 239000002435 venom Substances 0.000 description 1
- 231100000747 viability assay Toxicity 0.000 description 1
- 238000003026 viability measurement method Methods 0.000 description 1
- 210000002845 virion Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 239000000277 virosome Substances 0.000 description 1
- 235000019166 vitamin D Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 239000011710 vitamin D Substances 0.000 description 1
- 150000003710 vitamin D derivatives Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 229940046008 vitamin d Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 229960001729 voglibose Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 238000005406 washing Methods 0.000 description 1
- XLYOFNOQVPJJNP-UHFFFAOYSA-N water Substances O XLYOFNOQVPJJNP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 238000001086 yeast two-hybrid system Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000013293 zucker diabetic fatty rat Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000011680 zucker rat Methods 0.000 description 1
Images
Classifications
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
- C07K—PEPTIDES
- C07K14/00—Peptides having more than 20 amino acids; Gastrins; Somatostatins; Melanotropins; Derivatives thereof
- C07K14/435—Peptides having more than 20 amino acids; Gastrins; Somatostatins; Melanotropins; Derivatives thereof from animals; from humans
- C07K14/46—Peptides having more than 20 amino acids; Gastrins; Somatostatins; Melanotropins; Derivatives thereof from animals; from humans from vertebrates
- C07K14/47—Peptides having more than 20 amino acids; Gastrins; Somatostatins; Melanotropins; Derivatives thereof from animals; from humans from vertebrates from mammals
- C07K14/4701—Peptides having more than 20 amino acids; Gastrins; Somatostatins; Melanotropins; Derivatives thereof from animals; from humans from vertebrates from mammals not used
- C07K14/4747—Apoptosis related proteins
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
- A61P3/00—Drugs for disorders of the metabolism
- A61P3/08—Drugs for disorders of the metabolism for glucose homeostasis
- A61P3/10—Drugs for disorders of the metabolism for glucose homeostasis for hyperglycaemia, e.g. antidiabetics
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
- A61P5/00—Drugs for disorders of the endocrine system
- A61P5/48—Drugs for disorders of the endocrine system of the pancreatic hormones
- A61P5/50—Drugs for disorders of the endocrine system of the pancreatic hormones for increasing or potentiating the activity of insulin
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C12—BIOCHEMISTRY; BEER; SPIRITS; WINE; VINEGAR; MICROBIOLOGY; ENZYMOLOGY; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING
- C12N—MICROORGANISMS OR ENZYMES; COMPOSITIONS THEREOF; PROPAGATING, PRESERVING, OR MAINTAINING MICROORGANISMS; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING; CULTURE MEDIA
- C12N9/00—Enzymes; Proenzymes; Compositions thereof; Processes for preparing, activating, inhibiting, separating or purifying enzymes
- C12N9/10—Transferases (2.)
- C12N9/12—Transferases (2.) transferring phosphorus containing groups, e.g. kinases (2.7)
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C12—BIOCHEMISTRY; BEER; SPIRITS; WINE; VINEGAR; MICROBIOLOGY; ENZYMOLOGY; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING
- C12N—MICROORGANISMS OR ENZYMES; COMPOSITIONS THEREOF; PROPAGATING, PRESERVING, OR MAINTAINING MICROORGANISMS; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING; CULTURE MEDIA
- C12N9/00—Enzymes; Proenzymes; Compositions thereof; Processes for preparing, activating, inhibiting, separating or purifying enzymes
- C12N9/10—Transferases (2.)
- C12N9/12—Transferases (2.) transferring phosphorus containing groups, e.g. kinases (2.7)
- C12N9/1205—Phosphotransferases with an alcohol group as acceptor (2.7.1), e.g. protein kinases
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C12—BIOCHEMISTRY; BEER; SPIRITS; WINE; VINEGAR; MICROBIOLOGY; ENZYMOLOGY; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING
- C12Q—MEASURING OR TESTING PROCESSES INVOLVING ENZYMES, NUCLEIC ACIDS OR MICROORGANISMS; COMPOSITIONS OR TEST PAPERS THEREFOR; PROCESSES OF PREPARING SUCH COMPOSITIONS; CONDITION-RESPONSIVE CONTROL IN MICROBIOLOGICAL OR ENZYMOLOGICAL PROCESSES
- C12Q1/00—Measuring or testing processes involving enzymes, nucleic acids or microorganisms; Compositions therefor; Processes of preparing such compositions
- C12Q1/68—Measuring or testing processes involving enzymes, nucleic acids or microorganisms; Compositions therefor; Processes of preparing such compositions involving nucleic acids
- C12Q1/6876—Nucleic acid products used in the analysis of nucleic acids, e.g. primers or probes
- C12Q1/6883—Nucleic acid products used in the analysis of nucleic acids, e.g. primers or probes for diseases caused by alterations of genetic material
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
- A61K38/00—Medicinal preparations containing peptides
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C12—BIOCHEMISTRY; BEER; SPIRITS; WINE; VINEGAR; MICROBIOLOGY; ENZYMOLOGY; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING
- C12Q—MEASURING OR TESTING PROCESSES INVOLVING ENZYMES, NUCLEIC ACIDS OR MICROORGANISMS; COMPOSITIONS OR TEST PAPERS THEREFOR; PROCESSES OF PREPARING SUCH COMPOSITIONS; CONDITION-RESPONSIVE CONTROL IN MICROBIOLOGICAL OR ENZYMOLOGICAL PROCESSES
- C12Q2600/00—Oligonucleotides characterized by their use
- C12Q2600/136—Screening for pharmacological compounds
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C12—BIOCHEMISTRY; BEER; SPIRITS; WINE; VINEGAR; MICROBIOLOGY; ENZYMOLOGY; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING
- C12Q—MEASURING OR TESTING PROCESSES INVOLVING ENZYMES, NUCLEIC ACIDS OR MICROORGANISMS; COMPOSITIONS OR TEST PAPERS THEREFOR; PROCESSES OF PREPARING SUCH COMPOSITIONS; CONDITION-RESPONSIVE CONTROL IN MICROBIOLOGICAL OR ENZYMOLOGICAL PROCESSES
- C12Q2600/00—Oligonucleotides characterized by their use
- C12Q2600/156—Polymorphic or mutational markers
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C12—BIOCHEMISTRY; BEER; SPIRITS; WINE; VINEGAR; MICROBIOLOGY; ENZYMOLOGY; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING
- C12Q—MEASURING OR TESTING PROCESSES INVOLVING ENZYMES, NUCLEIC ACIDS OR MICROORGANISMS; COMPOSITIONS OR TEST PAPERS THEREFOR; PROCESSES OF PREPARING SUCH COMPOSITIONS; CONDITION-RESPONSIVE CONTROL IN MICROBIOLOGICAL OR ENZYMOLOGICAL PROCESSES
- C12Q2600/00—Oligonucleotides characterized by their use
- C12Q2600/158—Expression markers
Definitions
- Type II diabetes In Type II diabetes, there is a progressive decline in insulin secretory function in beta cells in the face of ongoing insulin resistance. Currently available therapies are unable to prevent this decline ( Diabetes 44:1249-1258, 1995; DeFronzo, Diabetes 37:667-687, 1988). Insulin resistance alone is not sufficient to cause Type II diabetes, and in fact, many individuals maintain insulin resistance for extended periods without becoming diabetic due to effective compensation by increased insulin secretion (Polonsky, Int J Obes Relat Metab Disord 24 Suppl 2:S29-31, 200).
- Insulin-resistant rats and mice display a compensatory increase in beta cell mass (Hribal, et al., Am J Physiol Endocrinol Metab 282:E977-981, 2002); the same phenomenon appears to occur in insulin resistant, but non-diabetic, (usually obese) humans (Kloppel, et al., Surv Synth Pathol Res 4:110-125, 1985; Butler, et al., Diabetes 52:102-110, 2003).
- beta cell mass appears to be regulated by a changing balance between the positive effects of beta cell replication and neogenesis and the negative effects of beta cell apoptosis (Bonner-Weir, J Mol Endocrinol 24:297-302, 2000; Bonner-Weir, Trends Endocrinol Metab 11:375-378, 2000; Pick, et al., Diabetes 47:358-364, 1998; Finegood, et al., Diabetes 50:1021-1029, 2001).
- Type II diabetes In humans, the onset of Type II diabetes due to insufficient increases (or actual declines) in beta cell mass is apparently due to increased beta cell apoptosis relative to non-diabetic insulin resistant individuals (Butler, et al., Diabetes 52:102-110, 2003). Agents which could specifically prevent this increase in beta cell apoptosis may therefore prevent insulin resistant individuals from developing Type II diabetes.
- Beta cell death and apoptosis are also central to the onset of Type I diabetes, although the mechanisms that lead to loss of beta cell mass are primarily T-cell mediated in Type I and this is not the case in the majority of Type II cases (Mathis, et al., Nature 414:792-798, 2001).
- IL interleukin
- IFN interferon
- TNF tumor necrosis factor
- NO reactive oxygen species
- Physiological beta cell apoptosis may actually trigger the immune response that results in wholesale islet destruction (Mathis, et al., Nature 414:792-798, 2001).
- TNF Tumor necrosis factor
- TNF-RI deficiency can prevent the onset of diabetes, presumably through reduction in beta cell death or apoptosis (Kagi, et al., J Immunol 162:4598-4605, 1999).
- Various modes of stress can also contribute to beta cell apoptosis (Zhou, et al., J Clin Invest 101:1623-1632, 1998).
- MAP kinases mitogen-activated protein kinases
- MAPKKKs MAP kinase kinase kinases
- MAPKKs MAP kinase kinases
- JNKs which phosphorylate and activate the transcription factor c-Jun among other substrates, are critical mediators of apoptosis (Tournier, et al., Science 288:870-874, 2000).
- Apoptosis signaling kinase (ASK)-1/MAPKKK5 is a ubiquitously expressed component of the kinase cascade that activates JNK and p38 (Takeda, et al., Cell Struct Funct 28:23-29, 2003).
- ASK1 directly phosphorylates MKK4(SEK1)/MKK7 and MKK3/MKK6, which in turn phosphorylate the JNKs and p38 (Ichijo, et al., Science 275:90-94, 1997).
- a constitutively active form of ASK1 is obtained by truncating an N-terminal regulatory domain; expression of this active kinase leads to apoptosis via mitochondria-dependent caspase activation (Hatai, et al., J Biol Chem 275:26576-26581, 2000). Cells from mice that lack ASK1 are resistant to the apoptotic effects of oxidative stress and TNF- ⁇ c (Tobiume, et al., EMBO Rep 2:222-228, 2001).
- ASK1 in oxidative stress-initiated apoptosis may be mediated in part by a direct physical interaction with the redox-regulatory protein thioredoxin (TRX) (Saitoh, et al., Embo J 17:2596-2606, 1998).
- Trx inhibits ASK1 kinase activity upon binding to the N-terminal domain that is lacking in the constitutively active form of ASK1.
- the interaction between ASK1 and Trx is dependent on Trx being in the reduced form; this provides a mechanism by which the redox state of the cell can regulate ASK1 kinase activity (Liu and Min, Circ Res 90:1259-1266, 2002).
- ASK1 promotes apoptosis in cells undergoing endoplasmic reticulum (ER) stress.
- ER protein IRE1 forms a complex with ASK1 and a TNF receptor interacting protein TRAF2 in cells undergoing ER stress, and this leads to activation of the ASK1-JNK pathway.
- the apoptosis initiated by this pathway is reduced in cells that lack ASK1 (Nishitoh, et al., Genes Dev 16:1345-1355, 2002).
- This invention is based on the discovery of a new human protein kinase that is abundant in pancreatic islets of Langerhans, but is not expressed in most other tissues.
- This kinase Apoptosis Signal Regulating Kinase Related Kinase (ASKRK)
- ASKRK Apoptosis Signal Regulating Kinase Related Kinase
- the invention provides composition and methods of using such compositions to screen for inhibitors of ASKRK activity.
- Inhibitors of ASKRK can be used to modulate beta cell death and for the treatment of diabetes.
- the invention provides an isolated nucleic acid encoding a polypeptide having at least 90%, often at least 95%, identity to SEQ ID NO:2.
- the nucleic acid encodes a polypeptide comprising SEQ ID NO:2.
- the polypeptide is encoded by a nucleic acid comprising the sequence set forth in SEQ ID NO:1
- the invention provides an isolated nucleic acid encoding a polypeptide comprising an amino acid sequence having at least 90% identity to SEQ ID NO:4.
- the nucleic acid encodes a polypeptide comprising the amino acid sequence set forth in SEQ ID NO:4.
- the nucleic acid comprises the sequence set forth in SEQ ID NO:3.
- the invention provides a method for identifying an agent for treating a diabetic or pre-diabetic individual, the method comprising the steps of: (i) contacting a candidate agent with a pancreatic or kidney cell that expresses a nucleic acid encoding a polypeptide having kinase activity that comprises at least 50 contiguous amino acids of SEQ ID NO:2; (ii) determining the activity of the polypeptide; and (iii) selecting an agent that inhibits the activity of the polypeptide, thereby identifying an agent for treating a diabetic or pre-diabetic individual.
- the polypeptide comprises SEQ ID NO:2 or SEQ ID NO:4. Additionally, the polypeptide can be overexpressed relative to normal.
- the cell can be, e.g., a pancreatic cell from a diabetic animal.
- the step of determining the activity of the polypeptide comprises determining the ability of the polypeptide to phosphorylate a substrate, determining the level of apoptosis, or determining the amount of protein present using an immunoassay.
- the agent is an siRNA or an antisense RNA.
- the invention provides a method for identifying an agent for treating a diabetic or pre-diabetic individual, the method comprising the steps of: (i) contacting a candidate agent with a kidney or pancreatic cell that expresses a nucleic acid encoding a polypeptide having phosphorylating activity that comprises at least 50 contiguous amino acids of SEQ ID NO:2; (ii) determining the level of an RNA that encodes the polypeptide; and (ii) selecting an agent that inhibits the level of the RNA relative to normal, thereby identifying an agent for treating a diabetic or pre-diabetic individual.
- the pancreatic cell may be from a diabetic animal.
- the polypeptide comprises SEQ ID NO:2 or SEQ ID NO:4.
- the step of determining the level of an RNA can comprise an amplification reaction.
- the agent is an siRNA or an antisense RNA.
- the method further comprises administering the agent to a pancreatic beta cell population; determining the level of apoptosis in the population; and selecting a candidate agent that decreases the level of apoptosis.
- the invention provides a method for identifying an agent for treating a diabetic or pre-diabetic individual, the method comprising the steps of: (i) contacting a candidate agent with a polypeptide having phosphorylating activity that comprises at least 50 contiguous amino acids of SEQ ID NO:2; (ii) determining binding of the agent to the polypeptide; (iii) selecting an agent that binds to the polypeptide; (iv) administering the agent to population of pancreatic beta cells; (v) determining the level of apoptosis in the population relative to a control population of pancreatic beta cells; and (vi) selecting an agent that decreases apoptosis.
- the polypeptide comprises SEQ ID NO:2 or SEQ ID NO:4.
- the step of determining binding of the agent to the polypeptide comprises determining the phosphorylating activity of the polypeptide.
- the invention provides a method of improving insulin response in a diabetic animal or a pre-diabetic animal, e.g., a diabetic or pre-diabetic human, the method comprising administering to the animal a therapeutically effective amount of an agent identified by the methods described herein.
- the agent may be administered to pancreatic tissue.
- the invention also provides a method of introducing an expression cassette into a pancreatic cell, the method comprising, introducing into the cell an expression vector comprising a nucleic acid that, when expressed, inhibits the expression of a nucleic acid encoding a polypeptide having phosphorylating activity that comprises at least 50 contiguous amino acids of SEQ ID NO:2. Often, the polypeptide comprises SEQ ID NO:2. In some embodiments, the cell is introduced into a diabetic animal, typically a human.
- FIG. 1 shows the results of a custom microarray analysis.
- Custom AffymetrixTM oligonucletide arrays were used to survey islet gene expression.
- Microarray probe set MBXMUS25681_at hybridizing to mouse ASKRK mRNA was called “Present” by the Affymetrix GeneChipTM analysis software in 4 independent mouse islet mRNA samples, 2 betaHC9 beta cell line samples and 1 kidney mRNA sample and absent in 13 other tissues examined.
- FIG. 2 shows an amino acid sequence alignment of mouse (partial coding; SEQ ID NO:5) and human (full coding; SEQ ID NO:6) ASKRK.
- FIG. 3 shows the results of a real-time PCR analysis.
- Taqman real-time polymerase chain reaction experiment using human tissue cDNA templates, including cDNA prepared from islets which had been treated or not treated with free fatty acids.
- the probe (300 nM) and primer (900 nM) set used was specific to hASKRK sequence downstream of the kinase domain.
- 18S RNA was used as an internal control.
- FIG. 4 shows the results of a transfection experiment to show ASKRK function.
- hASKRK expression increases MKK6 phosphorylating activity in fibroblasts.
- Mammalian expression constructs of hASK1 ⁇ N, the kinase deficient mutant hASK1 ⁇ N(K709M), hASKRK-H6M, the kinase deficient mutant hASKRK-H6M (K681M), hASKRK-H6, and the kinase deficient mutant hASKRK-H6 (K681M) in pcDNA3.1 or the empty vector were transfected into HEK293 cells.
- Western blot membrane was blocked 3 hrs with 5% milk TBST, treated with rabbit anti-hASK2 antibody (1:2000) or rabbit-anti-hASK1 antibody (1:1000) in 5% milk TBST 1 hour, washed 3 ⁇ 15′ TBST, treated with goat-anti-rabbit-HRP (1:10,000) in 5% milk TBST for 45′, washed 3 ⁇ 15′ TBST, treated with Pierce SuperSignal (50:50) 2′ and put with film for 5-25′ exposures.
- FIG. 5 Purified hASKRK-AN-flag phosphorylates MKK6 and is inhibited by stuarosporine.
- hASKRK-KC-flag (a construct containing the kinase domain and C-terminal domain of ASKRK with a C-terminal flag epitope) or hASKRK-DN-flag baculovirus was used to infect 10 8 sf21 cells two days before lysing the cells in 0.5% Triton X-100, 50 mM Tris-HCl pH 7.5, 0.1 mM EGTA, 15 mM DTT.
- the lysate was incubated with M2-Flag resin, washed and eluted with 500 ml of 400 mg/ml FLAG peptide in 0.1% Triton X-100, 50 mM Tris-HCl pH 7.5, 0.1 mM EGTA, 15 mM DTT.
- the kinase reactions were performed by taking a 30 ⁇ l aliquot of kinase eluate and adding 5 ⁇ l MKK6 (1.5 mg), 10 ⁇ l ATP (10 mCi gamma 32 P ATP 4.5 mM ATP-MgCl 2 ), and 5 ⁇ l Assay Dilution Buffer (500 mM Tris-HCl pH 7.5, 1 mM EGTA, 150 mM DTT). Staurosporine was added to the concentrations indicated. Reactions are incubated for 30 minutes at 30° C. with agitation at 5 min intervals. Reactions were stopped with SDS-gel sample buffer, fractionated by 10% SDS-PAGE and transferred to a PVDF membrane before exposure to a phosphor screen for detection.
- FIG. 6 Ad-hASKRK- ⁇ N Infection induces cell death in HeLa cells.
- HeLa cells were seeded to 96-well plates ( ⁇ 25,000/well) one day before viral infection and allowed to grow to approximately 70% confluency in regular DMEM medium.
- Cells were infected with the Ad-eGFP, Ad-ASKRK-AN or Ad-ASKRK-AN(K681M) virus at MOI of 0-200 in the viral infection medium (DMEM+5% heat-inactivated FCS) for 14-16 hours, and cultured for a second day in regular culture medium.
- the degree of cell death was measured by the XTT assay with the Cell Proliferation Kit-II (Boehringer Mannheim, Indianapolis, Ind.) 48-h after viral infection.
- FIG. 7 Effects of Ad-ASKRK- ⁇ N infection SNP and cytokine-induced cell death in ⁇ HC9 cells.
- the insulin-secreting ⁇ HC9 cells were seeded and grown in 96-well plates one day before the viral infection with Ad-eGFP, Ad-ASKRK-AN or Ad-ASKRK- ⁇ N(K681M) virus at MOI of 50.
- An ASKRK nucleic acid or polypeptide refers to polymorphic variants, alleles, mutants, and interspecies homologs and ASKRK domains thereof that: (1) have an amino acid sequence that has greater than about 65% amino acid sequence identity, 70%, 75%, 80%, 85%, 90%, preferably 91%, 92%, 93%, 94%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98% or 99% or greater amino acid sequence identity, preferably over a window of at least about 25, 50, 100, 200, 500, 1000, or more amino acids, to a sequence of SEQ ID NO:2 or SEQ ID NO4; (2) bind to antibodies raised against an immunogen comprising an amino acid sequence of SEQ ID NO:2 or SEQ ID NO:4 and conservatively modified variants thereof; (3) have at least 15 contiguous amino acids, more often, at least 20, 30, 40, 50 or 100 contiguous amino acids, of SEQ ID NO:2 or SEQ ID NO:4; (4) specifically hybridize (with a size of at least about 100,
- ASKRK polynucleotide or polypeptide sequence of the invention is typically from a mammal including, but not limited to, human, mouse, rat, hamster, cow, pig, horse, sheep, or any mammal.
- a “ASKRK polynucleotide” and a “ASKRK polypeptide,” are both either naturally occurring or recombinant.
- a “kinase domain” as used herein refers to the region of an ASKRK polypeptide that has catalytic activity, i.e., transfers phosphate from a high-energy phosphate donor molecule to the substrate.
- Activity of an ASKRK polypeptide refers to structural, regulatory, or biochemical functions of the polypeptide in its native cell or tissue.
- Activity of ASKRK include both direct activities and indirect activities.
- An exemplary direct activity is catalytic active, i.e., phosphorylation activity.
- Exemplary indirect activities are observed as a change in phenotype or response in a cell or tissue to a polypeptide's direct activity, e.g., apoptosis.
- Catalytic activity can be measured, e.g., by determining the amount of a substrate that is phosphorylated.
- Other activities e.g., apoptoss, may also be assessed as a measure of ASKRK activity.
- Predisposition for diabetes occurs in a person when the person is at high risk for developing diabetes.
- risk factors include: genetic factors (e.g., carrying alleles that result in a higher occurrence of diabetes than in the average population or having parents or siblings with diabetes); overweight (e.g., body mass index (BMI) greater or equal to 25 kg/m 2 ); habitual physical inactivity, race/ethnicity (e.g., African-American, Hispanic-American, Native Americans, Asian-Americans, Pacific Islanders); previously identified impaired fasting glucose or impaired glucose tolerance, hypertension (e.g., greater or equal to 140/90 mmHg in adults); HDL cholesterol less than or equal to 35 mg/dl; triglyceride levels greater or equal to 250 mg/dl; a history of gestational diabetes or delivery of a baby over nine pounds; and/or polycystic ovary syndrome. See, e.g., “Report of the Expert Committee on the Diagno
- a “non-diabetic individual” when used to compare with a sample from a patient, refers to an adult with a fasting blood glucose level less than 110 mg/dl or a 2 hour PG reading of 140 mg/dl. “Fasting” refers to no caloric intake for at least 8 hours.
- a “2 hour PG” refers to the level of blood glucose after challenging a patient to a glucose load containing the equivalent of 75 g anhydrous glucose dissolved in water. The overall test is generally referred to as an oral glucose tolerance test (OGTT). See, e.g., Diabetes Care , Supplement 2002, American Diabetes Association: Clinical Practice Recommendations 2002.
- the level of a polypeptide in a non-diabetic individual can be a reading from a single individual, but is typically a statistically relevant average from a group of non-diabetic individuals.
- the level of a polypeptide in a nondiabetic individual can be represented by a value, for example in a computer program.
- an “antagonist” or “inhibitor” refers to an agent that binds to, partially or totally blocks stimulation, decreases, prevents, delays activation, inactivates, desensitizes, or down regulates the activity or expression of ASKRK.
- Antibody refers to a polypeptide substantially encoded by an immunoglobulin gene or immunoglobulin genes, or fragments thereof which specifically bind and recognize an analyte (antigen).
- the recognized immunoglobulin genes include the kappa, lambda, alpha, gamma, delta, epsilon and mu constant region genes, as well as the myriad immunoglobulin variable region genes.
- Light chains are classified as either kappa or lambda.
- Heavy chains are classified as gamma, mu, alpha, delta, or epsilon, which in turn define the immunoglobulin classes, IgG, IgM, IgA, IgD and IgE, respectively.
- An exemplary immunoglobulin (antibody) structural unit comprises a tetramer.
- Each tetramer is composed of two identical pairs of polypeptide chains, each pair having one “light” (about 25 kD) and one “heavy” chain (about 50-70 kD).
- the N-terminus of each chain defines a variable region of about 100 to 110 or more amino acids primarily responsible for antigen recognition.
- the terms variable light chain (V L ) and variable heavy chain (V H ) refer to these light and heavy chains respectively.
- Antibodies exist, e.g., as intact immunoglobulins or as a number of well-characterized fragments produced by digestion with various peptidases.
- pepsin digests an antibody below the disulfide linkages in the hinge region to produce F(ab)′ 2 , a dimer of Fab which itself is a light chain joined to V H -C H 1 by a disulfide bond.
- the F(ab)′ 2 may be reduced under mild conditions to break the disulfide linkage in the hinge region, thereby converting the F(ab)′ 2 dimer into an Fab′ monomer.
- the Fab′ monomer is essentially an Fab with part of the hinge region (see, Paul (Ed.) Fundamental Immunology , Third Edition, Raven Press, NY (1993)). While various antibody fragments are defined in terms of the digestion of an intact antibody, one of skill will appreciate that such fragments may be synthesized de novo either chemically or by utilizing recombinant DNA methodology. Thus, the term antibody, as used herein, also includes antibody fragments either produced by the modification of whole antibodies or those synthesized de novo using recombinant DNA methodologies (e.g., single chain Fv).
- peptidomimetic and “mimetic” refer to a synthetic chemical compound that has substantially the same structural and functional characteristics of the antagonists or agonists of the invention.
- Peptide analogs are commonly used in the pharmaceutical industry as non-peptide drugs with properties analogous to those of the template peptide. These types of non-peptide compound are termed “peptide mimetics” or “peptidomimetics” (Fauchere, J. Adv. Drug Res. 15:29 (1986); Veber and Freidinger TINS p. 392 (1985); and Evans et al. J. Med. Chem. 30:1229 (1987), which are incorporated herein by reference).
- Peptide mimetics that are structurally similar to therapeutically useful peptides may be used to produce an equivalent or enhanced therapeutic or prophylactic effect.
- peptidomimetics are structurally similar to a paradigm polypeptide (i.e., a polypeptide that has a biological or pharmacological activity), such as a polypeptide exemplified in this application, but have one or more peptide linkages optionally replaced by a linkage selected from the group consisting of, e.g., —CH2NH—, —CH2S—, —CH2—CH2-, —CH ⁇ CH— (cis and trans), —COCH2—, —CH(OH)CH2-, and —CH2SO—.
- a paradigm polypeptide i.e., a polypeptide that has a biological or pharmacological activity
- a linkages optionally replaced by a linkage selected from the group consisting of, e.g., —CH2NH—, —CH2S—
- the mimetic can be either entirely composed of synthetic, non-natural analogues of amino acids, or, is a chimeric molecule of partly natural peptide amino acids and partly non-natural analogs of amino acids.
- the mimetic can also incorporate any amount of natural amino acid conservative substitutions as long as such substitutions also do not substantially alter the mimetic's structure and/or activity.
- a mimetic composition is within the scope of the invention if it is capable of carrying out the binding or other activities of an agonist or antagonist of a polypeptide of the invention.
- gene means the segment of DNA involved in producing a polypeptide chain; it includes regions preceding and following the coding region (leader and trailer) as well as intervening sequences (introns) between individual coding segments (exons).
- nucleic acid or protein when applied to a nucleic acid or protein, denotes that the nucleic acid or protein is essentially free of other cellular components with which it is associated in the natural state. It is preferably in a homogeneous state although it can be in either a dry or aqueous solution. Purity and homogeneity are typically determined using analytical chemistry techniques such as polyacrylamide gel electrophoresis or high performance liquid chromatography. A protein that is the predominant species present in a preparation is substantially purified. In particular, an isolated gene is separated from open reading frames that flank the gene and encode a protein other than the gene of interest. The term “purified” denotes that a nucleic acid or protein gives rise to essentially one band in an electrophoretic gel. Particularly, it means that the nucleic acid or protein is at least 85% pure, more preferably at least 95% pure, and most preferably at least 99% pure.
- nucleic acid or “polynucleotide” refers to deoxyribonucleotides or ribonucleotides and polymers thereof in either single- or double-stranded form. Unless specifically limited, the term encompasses nucleic acids containing known analogues of natural nucleotides that have similar binding properties as the reference nucleic acid and are metabolized in a manner similar to naturally occurring nucleotides. Unless otherwise indicated, a particular nucleic acid sequence also implicitly encompasses conservatively modified variants thereof (e.g., degenerate codon substitutions) and complementary sequences as well as the sequence explicitly indicated.
- degenerate codon substitutions may be achieved by generating sequences in which the third position of one or more selected (or all) codons is substituted with mixed-base and/or deoxyinosine residues (Batzer et al., Nucleic Acid Res. 19:5081 (1991); Ohtsuka et al., J. Biol. Chem. 260:2605-2608 (1985); and Cassol et al. (1992); Rossolini et al., Mol. Cell. Probes 8:91-98 (1994)).
- nucleic acid is used interchangeably with gene, cDNA, and mRNA encoded by a gene.
- RNA refers to small interfering RNAs, that can cause post-transcriptional silencing of specific genes in cells, for example, mammalian cells (including human cells) and in the body, for example, mammalian bodies (including humans).
- the phenomenon of RNA interference is described and discussed in Bass, Nature 411: 428-29 (2001); Elbahir et al., Nature 411: 494-98 (2001); and Fire et al., Nature 391: 806-11 (1998); and WO 01/75164, where methods of making interfering RNA also are discussed.
- siRNAs based upon the sequences and nucleic acids encoding the gene products disclosed herein typically have fewer than 100 base pairs and can be, e.g., about 30 bps or shorter, and can be made by approaches known in the art, including the use of complementary DNA strands or synthetic approaches.
- Exemplary siRNAs according to the invention can have up to 29 bps, 25 bps, 22 bps, 21 bps, 20 bps, 15 bps, 10 bps, 5 bps or any integer thereabout or therebetween.
- Tools for designing optimal inhibitory siRNAs include that available from DNA engine Inc. (Seattle, Wash.) and Ambion, Inc. (Austin, Tex.).
- polypeptide “peptide” and “protein” are used interchangeably herein to refer to a polymer of amino acid residues.
- the terms apply to amino acid polymers in which one or more amino acid residue is an artificial chemical mimetic of a corresponding naturally occurring amino acid, as well as to naturally occurring amino acid polymers and non-naturally occurring amino acid polymers.
- the terms encompass amino acid chains of any length, including full-length proteins (i.e., antigens), wherein the amino acid residues are linked by covalent peptide bonds.
- amino acid refers to naturally occurring and synthetic amino acids, as well as amino acid analogs and amino acid mimetics that function in a manner similar to the naturally occurring amino acids.
- Naturally occurring amino acids are those encoded by the genetic code, as well as those amino acids that are later modified, e.g., hydroxyproline, ⁇ -carboxyglutamate, and O-phosphoserine.
- Amino acid analogs refers to compounds that have the same basic chemical structure as a naturally occurring amino acid, i.e., an ae carbon that is bound to a hydrogen, a carboxyl group, an amino group, and an R group, e.g., homoserine, norleucine, methionine sulfoxide, methionine methyl sulfonium. Such analogs have modified R groups (e.g., norleucine) or modified peptide backbones, but retain the same basic chemical structure as a naturally occurring amino acid.
- Amino acid mimetics refers to chemical compounds that have a structure that is different from the general chemical structure of an amino acid, but which functions in a manner similar to a naturally occurring amino acid.
- Amino acids may be referred to herein by either the commonly known three letter symbols or by the one-letter symbols recommended by the IUPAC-IUB Biochemical Nomenclature Commission. Nucleotides, likewise, may be referred to by their commonly accepted single-letter codes.
- “Conservatively modified variants” applies to both amino acid and nucleic acid sequences. With respect to particular nucleic acid sequences, “conservatively modified variants” refers to those nucleic acids that encode identical or essentially identical amino acid sequences, or where the nucleic acid does not encode an amino acid sequence, to essentially identical sequences. Because of the degeneracy of the genetic code, a large number of functionally identical nucleic acids encode any given protein. For instance, the codons GCA, GCC, GCG and GCU all encode the amino acid alanine. Thus, at every position where an alanine is specified by a codon, the codon can be altered to any of the corresponding codons described without altering the encoded polypeptide.
- nucleic acid variations are “silent variations,” which are one species of conservatively modified variations. Every nucleic acid sequence herein that encodes a polypeptide also describes every possible silent variation of the nucleic acid.
- each codon in a nucleic acid except AUG, which is ordinarily the only codon for methionine, and TGG, which is ordinarily the only codon for tryptophan
- TGG which is ordinarily the only codon for tryptophan
- amino acid sequences one of skill will recognize that individual substitutions, deletions or additions to a nucleic acid, peptide, polypeptide, or protein sequence which alters, adds or deletes a single amino acid or a small percentage of amino acids in the encoded sequence is a “conservatively modified variant” where the alteration results in the substitution of an amino acid with a chemically similar amino acid. Conservative substitution tables providing functionally similar amino acids are well known in the art. Such conservatively modified variants are in addition to and do not exclude polymorphic variants, interspecies homologs, and alleles of the invention.
- Percentage of sequence identity is determined by comparing two optimally aligned sequences over a comparison window, wherein the portion of the polynucleotide sequence in the comparison window may comprise additions or deletions (i.e., gaps) as compared to the reference sequence (e.g., a polypeptide of the invention), which does not comprise additions or deletions, for optimal alignment of the two sequences.
- the percentage is calculated by determining the number of positions at which the identical nucleic acid base or amino acid residue occurs in both sequences to yield the number of matched positions, dividing the number of matched positions by the total number of positions in the window of comparison and multiplying the result by 100 to yield the percentage of sequence identity.
- nucleic acids or polypeptide sequences refer to two or more sequences or subsequences that are the same sequences are substantially identical if two sequences have a specified percentage of amino acid residues or nucleotides that are the same (i.e., 60% identity, optionally 65%, 70%, 75%, 80%, 85%, 90%, or 95% identity over a specified region, or, when not specified, over the entire sequence), when compared and aligned for maximum correspondence over a comparison window, or designated region as measured using one of the following sequence comparison algorithms or by manual alignment and visual inspection.
- the invention provides polypeptides or polynucleotides that are substantially identical to the polynucleotides or polypeptides, respectively, exemplified herein in SEQ ID NOs:1 and 2. This definition also refers to the complement of a test sequence. Optionally, the identity exists over a region that is at least about 50 nucleotides in length, or more preferably over a region that is 100 to 500 or 1000 or more nucleotides in length.
- sequence comparison typically one sequence acts as a reference sequence, to which test sequences are compared.
- test and reference sequences are entered into a computer, subsequence coordinates are designated, if necessary, and sequence algorithm program parameters are designated. Default program parameters can be used, or alternative parameters can be designated.
- sequence comparison algorithm then calculates the percent sequence identities for the test sequences relative to the reference sequence, based on the program parameters.
- a “comparison window”, as used herein, includes reference to a segment of any one of the number of contiguous positions selected from the group consisting of from 20 to 600, usually about 50 to about 200, more usually about 100 to about 150 in which a sequence may be compared to a reference sequence of the same number of contiguous positions after the two sequences are optimally aligned.
- Methods of alignment of sequences for comparison are well known in the art. Optimal alignment of sequences for comparison can be conducted, e.g., by the local homology algorithm of Smith and Waterman (1970) Adv. Appl. Math. 2:482c, by the homology alignment algorithm of Needleman and Wunsch (1970) J. Mol. Biol.
- BLAST and BLAST 2.0 algorithms Two examples of algorithms that are suitable for determining percent sequence identity and sequence similarity are the BLAST and BLAST 2.0 algorithms, which are described in Altschul et al. (1977) Nuc. Acids Res. 25:3389-3402, and Altschul et al. (1990) J. Mol. Biol. 215:403-410, respectively.
- Software for performing BLAST analyses is publicly available through the National Center for Biotechnology Information (at www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov). This algorithm involves first identifying high scoring sequence pairs (HSPs) by identifying short words of length W in the query sequence, which either match or satisfy some positive-valued threshold score T when aligned with a word of the same length in a database sequence.
- HSPs high scoring sequence pairs
- T is referred to as the neighborhood word score threshold (Altschul et al., supra). These initial neighborhood word hits act as seeds for initiating searches to find longer HSPs containing them. The word hits are extended in both directions along each sequence for as far as the cumulative alignment score can be increased. Cumulative scores are calculated using, for nucleotide sequences, the parameters M (reward score for a pair of matching residues; always >0) and N (penalty score for mismatching residues; always ⁇ 0). For amino acid sequences, a scoring matrix is used to calculate the cumulative score.
- Extension of the word hits in each direction are halted when: the cumulative alignment score falls off by the quantity X from its maximum achieved value; the cumulative score goes to zero or below, due to the accumulation of one or more negative-scoring residue alignments; or the end of either sequence is reached.
- the BLAST algorithm parameters W, T, and X determine the sensitivity and speed of the alignment.
- the BLASTP program uses as defaults a wordlength of 3, and expectation (E) of 10, and the BLOSUM62 scoring matrix (see Henikoff and Henikoff (1989) Proc.
- the BLAST algorithm also performs a statistical analysis of the similarity between two sequences (see, e.g., Karlin and Altschul (1993) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 90:5873-5787).
- One measure of similarity provided by the BLAST algorithm is the smallest sum probability (P(N)), which provides an indication of the probability by which a match between two nucleotide or amino acid sequences would occur by chance.
- P(N) the smallest sum probability
- a nucleic acid is considered similar to a reference sequence if the smallest sum probability in a comparison of the test nucleic acid to the reference nucleic acid is less than about 0.2, more preferably less than about 0.01, and most preferably less than about 0.001.
- nucleic acid sequences or polypeptides are substantially identical is that the polypeptide encoded by the first nucleic acid is immunologically cross reactive with the antibodies raised against the polypeptide encoded by the second nucleic acid, as described below.
- a polypeptide is typically substantially identical to a second polypeptide, for example, where the two peptides differ only by conservative substitutions.
- Another indication that two nucleic acid sequences are substantially identical is that the two molecules or their complements hybridize to each other under stringent conditions, as described below.
- Yet another indication that two nucleic acid sequences are substantially identical is that the same primers can be used to amplify the sequence.
- the phrase “selectively (or specifically) hybridizes to” refers to the binding, duplexing, or hybridizing of a molecule only to a particular nucleotide sequence under stringent hybridization conditions when that sequence is present in a complex mixture (e.g., total cellular or library DNA or RNA).
- stringent hybridization conditions refers to conditions under which a probe will hybridize to its target subsequence, typically in a complex mixture of nucleic acid, but to no other sequences. Stringent conditions are sequence-dependent and will be different in different circumstances. Longer sequences hybridize specifically at higher temperatures. An extensive guide to the hybridization of nucleic acids is found in Tijssen, Techniques in Biochemistry and Molecular Biology—Hybridization with Nucleic Probes , “Overview of principles of hybridization and the strategy of nucleic acid assays” (1993). Generally, stringent conditions are selected to be about 5-10° C. lower than the thermal melting point (T m ) for the specific sequence at a defined ionic strength pH.
- T m thermal melting point
- the T m is the temperature (under defined ionic strength, pH, and nucleic concentration) at which 50% of the probes complementary to the target hybridize to the target sequence at equilibrium (as the target sequences are present in excess, at T m , 50% of the probes are occupied at equilibrium).
- Stringent conditions will be those in which the salt concentration is less than about 1.0 M sodium ion, typically about 0.01 to 1.0 M sodium ion concentration (or other salts) at pH 7.0 to 8.3 and the temperature is at least about 30° C. for short probes (e.g., 10 to 50 nucleotides) and at least about 60° C. for long probes (e.g., greater than 50 nucleotides).
- Stringent conditions may also be achieved with the addition of destabilizing agents such as formamide.
- a positive signal is at least two times background, optionally 10 times background hybridization.
- Exemplary stringent hybridization conditions can be as following: 50% formamide, 5 ⁇ SSC, and 1% SDS, incubating at 42° C., or 5 ⁇ SSC, 1% SDS, incubating at 65° C., with wash in 0.2 ⁇ SSC, and 0.1% SDS at 55° C., 60° C., or 65° C. Such washes can be performed for 5, 15, 30, 60, 120, or more minutes.
- Nucleic acids that do not hybridize to each other under stringent conditions are still substantially identical if the polypeptides that they encode are substantially identical. This occurs, for example, when a copy of a nucleic acid is created using the maximum codon degeneracy permitted by the genetic code. In such cases, the nucleic acids typically hybridize under moderately stringent hybridization conditions.
- Exemplary “moderately stringent hybridization conditions” include a hybridization in a buffer of 40% formamide, 1 M NaCl, 1% SDS at 37° C., and a wash in 1 ⁇ SSC at 45° C. Such washes can be performed for 5, 15, 30, 60, 120, or more minutes. A positive hybridization is at least twice background. Those of ordinary skill will readily recognize that alternative hybridization and wash conditions can be utilized to provide conditions of similar stringency.
- a nucleic acid sequence encoding refers to a nucleic acid which contains sequence information for a structural RNA such as rRNA, a tRNA, or the primary amino acid sequence of a specific protein or peptide, or a binding site for a trans-acting regulatory agent. This phrase specifically encompasses degenerate codons (i.e., different codons which encode a single amino acid) of the native sequence or sequences that may be introduced to conform with codon preference in a specific host cell.
- recombinant when used with reference, e.g., to a cell, or nucleic acid, protein, or vector, indicates that the cell, nucleic acid, protein or vector, has been modified by the introduction of a heterologous nucleic acid or protein or the alteration of a native nucleic acid or protein, or that the cell is derived from a cell so modified.
- recombinant cells express genes that are not found within the native (nonrecombinant) form of the cell or express native genes that are otherwise abnormally expressed, under-expressed or not expressed at all.
- heterologous when used with reference to portions of a nucleic acid indicates that the nucleic acid comprises two or more subsequences that are not found in the same relationship to each other in nature.
- the nucleic acid is typically recombinantly produced, having two or more sequences from unrelated genes arranged to make a new functional nucleic acid, e.g., a promoter from one source and a coding region from another source.
- a heterologous protein indicates that the protein comprises two or more subsequences that are not found in the same relationship to each other in nature (e.g., a fusion protein).
- an “expression vector” is a nucleic acid construct, generated recombinantly or synthetically, with a series of specified nucleic acid elements that permit transcription of a particular nucleic acid in a host cell.
- the expression vector can be part of a plasmid, virus, or nucleic acid fragment.
- the expression vector includes a nucleic acid to be transcribed operably linked to a promoter.
- the specified antibodies bind to a particular protein and do not bind in a significant amount to other proteins present in the sample. Specific binding to an antibody under such conditions may require an antibody that is selected for its specificity for a particular protein.
- antibodies raised against a protein having an amino acid sequence encoded by any of the polynucleotides of the invention can be selected to obtain antibodies specifically immunoreactive with that protein and not with other proteins, except for polymorphic variants.
- a variety of immunoassay formats may be used to select antibodies specifically immunoreactive with a particular protein.
- solid-phase ELISA immunoassays, Western blots, or immunohistochemistry are routinely used to select monoclonal antibodies specifically immunoreactive with a protein. See, Harlow and Lane Antibodies, A Laboratory Manual , Cold Spring Harbor Publications, NY (1988) for a description of immunoassay formats and conditions that can be used to determine specific immunoreactivity.
- a specific or selective reaction will be at least twice the background signal or noise and more typically more than 10 to 100 times background.
- Inhibitors or “modulators” of expression or of activity are used to refer to inhibitory molecules that decrease ASKRK activity or expression. Such modulators are identified using in vitro and in vivo assays for expression or activity. Modulators encompass e.g., antagonists, and their homologs and mimetics. Inhibitors are agents that, e.g., inhibit expression of ASKRK or bind to, partially or totally block stimulation, decrease, prevent, delay activation, inactivate, desensitize, or down regulate the activity of ASKRK. Modulators include naturally occurring and synthetic ligands, antagonists, small chemical molecules and the like.
- Assays for inhibitors e.g., applying putative modulator compounds to cells expressing ASKRK and then determining the functional effects on activity, as described above.
- Samples or assays comprising a ASKRK polypeptide that are treated with a potential modulator are compared to control samples without the modulator to examine the extent of effect.
- Control samples (untreated with modulators) are assigned a relative activity value of 100%.
- Inhibition of a polypeptide of the invention is achieved when the polypeptide activity value relative to the control is about 80%, optionally 50% or 25, 10%, 5% or 1%.
- ASKRK plays a role in apoptosis of pancreatic beta cells.
- ASKRK is expressed predominantly in pancreatic beta cells.
- inhibitors of ASKRK expression or activity can be used to treat disorders relating to glucose metabolism, e.g., diabetes.
- Inhibition of ASKRK in diabetic or pre-diabetic individuals can, e.g., promote pancreatic beta cell viability.
- Modulation of the expression or activity of ASKRK can be beneficial in treating diabetic, pre-diabetic or obese insulin resistant, non-diabetic patients.
- nucleic acids encoding ASKRK polypeptides will be isolated and cloned using recombinant methods. Such embodiments are used, e.g., to isolate polynucleotides comprising a sequence that is identical or substantially identical to SEQ ID NO:1 for protein expression or for the generation of variants, derivatives, or other ASKRK sequences. Recombinant methodology is also used to generate expression cassettes, to monitor gene expression, for the isolation or detection of sequences in different species, for diagnostic purposes in a patient, e.g., to detect mutations in an ASKRK polynucleotide or polypeptide, or to detect expression levels of ASKRK nucleic acids or polypeptides.
- the ASKRK sequences encoding the polypeptides are operably linked to a heterologous promoter.
- the ASKRK nucleic acids are from any mammal, including, in particular, e.g., a human, a mouse, a rat, etc.
- nucleic acids sizes are given in either kilobases (kb) or base pairs (bp). These are estimates derived from agarose or acrylamide gel electrophoresis, from sequenced nucleic acids, or from published DNA sequences.
- kb kilobases
- bp base pairs
- proteins sizes are given in kilodaltons (kDa) or amino acid residue numbers. Proteins sizes are estimated from gel electrophoresis, from sequenced proteins, from derived amino acid sequences, or from published protein sequences.
- Oligonucleotides that are not commercially available can be chemically synthesized according to the solid phase phosphoramidite triester method first described by Beaucage & Caruthers, Tetrahedron Letts. 22:1859-1862 (1981), using an automated synthesizer, as described in Van Devanter et. al., Nucleic Acids Res. 12:6159-6168 (1984). Purification of oligonucleotides is typically by either native acrylamide gel electrophoresis or by anion-exchange HPLC as described in Pearson & Reanier, J. Chrom. 255:137-149 (1983).
- sequences of the cloned genes and synthetic oligonucleotides can be verified after cloning using, e.g., the chain termination method for sequencing double-stranded templates of Wallace et al., Gene 16:21-26 (1981).
- nucleic acids encoding the ASKRK proteins are cloned from cDNA or genomic libraries.
- the particular sequences can be identified, e.g., by hybridizing with a probe, the sequence of which can be derived from the sequences disclosed herein, which provide a reference for PCR primers and defines suitable regions for isolating probes specific for ASKRK polynucleotides.
- the sequence is cloned into an expression library
- the expressed recombinant protein can be detected immunologically with antisera or purified antibodies made against ASKRK polypeptides, e.g., SEQ ID NO:2.
- Methods of constructing cDNA and genomic libraries are well known in the art (see, e.g., Sambrook & Russell, supra; and Ausubel et al., supra).
- An alternative method of isolating ASKRK nucleic acids and their homologs combines the use of synthetic oligonucleotide primers and amplification of an RNA or DNA template (see, e.g., U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,683,195 and 4,683,202; PCR Protocols: A Guide to Methods and Applications (Innis et al., eds, 1990)).
- Methods such as polymerase chain reaction (PCR) and ligase chain reaction (LCR) can be used to amplify ASKRK nucleic acid sequences directly from mRNA, from cDNA, from genomic libraries or cDNA libraries.
- Degenerate oligonucleotides can be designed to amplify ASKRK homologs using the sequences provided herein. Restriction endonuclease sites can be incorporated into the primers. Polymerase chain reaction or other in vitro amplification methods may also be useful, for example, to clone nucleic acid sequences that code for proteins to be expressed, to make nucleic acids to use as probes for detecting the presence of ASKRK-encoding mRNA in physiological samples, for nucleic acid sequencing, or for other purposes. Genes amplified by the PCR reaction can be purified from agarose gels and cloned into an appropriate vector.
- Synthetic oligonucleotides can be used to construct recombinant ASKRK genes for use as probes or for expression of protein. This method is performed using a series of overlapping oligonucleotides usually 40-120 bp in length, representing both the sense and nonsense strands of the gene. These DNA fragments are then annealed, ligated and cloned. Alternatively, amplification techniques can be used with precise primers to amplify a specific subsequence of the ASKRK nucleic acid. The specific subsequence is then ligated into an expression vector.
- the nucleic acid encoding ASKRK is typically cloned into intermediate vectors before transformation into prokaryotic or eukaryotic cells for replication and/or expression.
- These intermediate vectors are typically prokaryote vectors, e.g., plasmids, or shuttle vectors.
- nucleic acids encoding chimeric proteins comprising ASKRKor domains thereof can be made according to standard techniques.
- a domain comprising the active site can be covalently linked to a heterologous protein.
- an ASKRK nucleic acid such as a cDNAs encoding SEQ ID NO:2
- a promoter typically a heterologous promoter, to direct transcription, a transcription/translation terminator, and a ribosome binding site for translational initiation.
- Suitable promoters are well known in the art and described, e.g., in Sambrook & Russell and Ausubel et al.
- Bacterial expression systems for expressing the protein are available in, e.g., E.
- Standard bacterial expression vectors include plasmids such as pBR322 based plasmids, pSKF, pET23D, and fusion expression systems such as GST and LacZ.
- Epitope tags can also be added to recombinant proteins to provide convenient methods of isolation, e.g., c-myc. Kits for such expression systems are commercially available.
- Eukaryotic expression systems for mammalian cells, yeast, and insect cells are also well known in the art and commercially available.
- exemplary vectors include SV40-based vectors, papilloma virus vectors, baculovirus vectors, and other vectors allowing expression of proteins under the direction of eukaryotic promoters, e.g., SV40 early promoter, SV40 later promoter, metallothionein promoter, murine mammary tumor virus promoter, Rous sarcoma virus promoter, or other promoters shown effective for expression in eukaryotic cells.
- the eukaryotic expression vector is a viral vector, e.g., an adenoviral vector, an adeno-associated vector, or a retroviral vector.
- Any of many well known procedures for introducing foreign nucleotide sequences into host cells may be used. These include the use of calcium phosphate transfection, polybrene, protoplast fusion, electroporation, liposomes, microinjection, plasma vectors, viral vectors and any of the other well known methods for introducing cloned genomic DNA, cDNA, synthetic DNA or other foreign genetic material into a host cell (see, e.g., Russell & Sambrook, supra). It is only necessary that the particular genetic engineering procedure used be capable of successfully introducing at least one gene into the host cell capable of expressing ASKRK.
- the transfected cells are cultured under conditions favoring expression of the protein, which is recovered from the culture using standard techniques identified below.
- Transgenic animals including knockout transgenic animals, that include additional copies of ASKRK and/or altered or mutated ASKRK transgenes can also be generated.
- a “transgenic animal” refers to any animal (e.g. mouse, rat, pig, bird, or an amphibian), preferably a non-human mammal, in which one or more cells contain heterologous nucleic acid introduced using transgenic techniques well known in the art. The nucleic acid is introduced into the cell, directly or indirectly, by introduction into a precursor of the cell, by way of deliberate genetic manipulation, such as by microinjection or by infection with a recombinant virus.
- genetic manipulation does not include classical cross-breeding, or in vitro fertilization, but rather is directed to the introduction of a recombinant DNA molecule.
- This molecule may be integrated within a chromosome, or it may be extrachromosomally replicating DNA.
- transgenic animals are produced in which expression of ASKRK is silenced.
- Gene knockout by homologous recombination is a method that is commonly used to generate transgenic animals.
- Transgenic mice can be derived using methodology known to those of skill in the art, see, e.g., Hogan et al., Manipulating the Mouse Embryo: A Laboratory Manual , (1988); Teratocarcinomas and Embryonic Stem Cells: A Practical Approach , Robertson, ed., (1987); and Capecchi et al., Science 244:1288 (1989).
- ASKRK polypeptides can be purified for use in functional assays.
- Naturally occurring ASKRK polypeptides of the invention can be purified from any source (e.g., tissues of an organism expressing an ortholog).
- Recombinant polypeptides can be purified from any suitable expression system.
- ASKRK polypeptides are purified to substantial purity by standard techniques, including selective precipitation with such substances as ammonium sulfate; column chromatography, immunopurification methods, and others (see, e.g., Scopes, Protein Purification: Principles and Practice (1982); U.S. Pat. No. 4,673,641; Ausubel et al., supra; and Sambrook & Russell, supra).
- proteins having established molecular adhesion properties can be reversibly fused to a polypeptide of the invention.
- either protein can be selectively adsorbed to a purification column and then freed from the column in a relatively pure form. The fused protein may be then removed by enzymatic activity.
- polypeptides can be purified using immunoaffinity columns.
- inclusion bodies When recombinant proteins are expressed by the transformed bacteria in large amounts, typically after promoter induction, although expression can be constitutive, the proteins may form insoluble aggregates.
- purification of protein inclusion bodies typically involves the extraction, separation and/or purification of inclusion bodies by disruption of bacterial cells typically, but not limited to, by incubation in a buffer of about 100-150 ⁇ g/ml lysozyme and 0.1% Nonidet P40, a non-ionic detergent.
- the cell suspension can be ground using a Polytron grinder (Brinkman Instruments, Westbury, N.Y.).
- the cells can be sonicated on ice. Alternate methods of lysing bacteria are described in Ausubel et al. and Sambrook et al., both supra, and will be apparent to those of skill in the art.
- the periplasmic fraction of the bacteria can be isolated by cold osmotic shock in addition to other methods known to those of skill in the art (see, Ausubel et al., supra).
- Proteins can also be purified from eukaryotic gene expression systems as described in, e.g., Fernandez and Hoeffler, Gene Expression Systems (1999).
- baculovirus expression systems are used to isolate proteins of the invention.
- Recombinant baculoviruses are generally generated by replacing the polyhedrin coding sequence of a baculovirus with a gene to be expressed (e.g., encoding a polypeptide of the invention).
- Viruses lacking the polyhedrin gene have a unique plaque morphology making them easy to recognize.
- a recombinant baculovirus is generated by first cloning a polynucleotide of interest into a transfer vector (e.g., a pUC based vector) such that the polynucleotide is operably linked to a polyhedrin promoter.
- the transfer vector is transfected with wildtype DNA into an insect cell (e.g., Sf9, Sf21 or BT1-TN-5B1-4 cells), resulting in homologous recombination and replacement of the polyhedrin gene in the wildtype viral DNA with the polynucleotide of interest.
- Virus can then be generated and plaque purified. Protein expression results upon viral infection of insect cells. Expressed proteins can be harvested from cell supernatant if secreted, or from cell lysates if intracellular. See, e.g., Ausubel et al. and Fernandez and Hoeffler, supra.
- Proteins are purified using standard techniques including, for example, an initial salt fractionation. Other methods that rely on solubility of proteins, such as cold ethanol precipitation, are well known to those of skill in the art and can be used to fractionate complex protein mixtures.
- Proteins may also be separated based on a calculated molecular weight using techniques such as ultrafiltration and size separation on a column.
- the proteins of interest can also be separated from other proteins on the basis of their size, net surface charge, hydrophobicity and affinity for ligands.
- antibodies raised against proteins can be conjugated to column matrices and the proteins immunopurified. All of these methods are well known in the art.
- Immunoaffinity chromatography using antibodies raised to a variety of affinity tags such as hemagglutinin (HA), FLAG, Xpress, Myc, hexahistidine (His) (SEQ ID NO:7), glutathione S transferase (GST) and the like can be used to purify polypeptides.
- His tag will also act as a chelating agent for certain metals (e.g., Ni) and thus the metals can also be used to purify His-containing polypeptides. After purification, the tag is optionally removed by specific proteolytic cleavage.
- detection of expression of ASKRK polynucleotides and polypeptides has many uses. For example, as discussed herein, detection of levels of polynucleotides and polypeptides of the invention in a patient can be useful for diagnosing diabetes or a predisposition for at least some of the pathological effects of diabetes. Moreover, detection of gene expression is useful to identify modulators, e.g., inhibitors, of expression of ASKRK polynucleotides and polypeptides.
- Gene expression can be analyzed by techniques known in the art, e.g., reverse transcription and amplification of mRNA, isolation of total RNA or poly A+ RNA, northern blotting, dot blotting, in situ hybridization, RNase protection, probing DNA microchip arrays, and the like, as further described below.
- DNA and RNA measurement A variety of methods of specific DNA and RNA measurement that use nucleic acid hybridization techniques are known to those of skill in the art (see, Sambrook, supra). Some methods involve an electrophoretic separation (e.g., Southern blot for detecting DNA, and Northern blot for detecting RNA), but measurement of DNA and RNA can also be carried out in the absence of electrophoretic separation (e.g., by dot blot). Southern blot of genomic DNA (e.g., from a human) can be used for screening for restriction fragment length polymorphism (RFLP) to detect the presence of a genetic disorder affecting a polypeptide of the invention.
- RFLP restriction fragment length polymorphism
- nucleic acid hybridization format is not critical.
- a variety of nucleic acid hybridization formats are known to those skilled in the art.
- common formats include sandwich assays and competition or displacement assays.
- Hybridization techniques are generally described in Hames and Higgins Nucleic Acid Hybridization, A Practical Approach, IRL Press (1985); Gall and Pardue, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A., 63:378-383 (1969); and John et al. Nature, 223:582-587 (1969).
- Detection of a hybridization complex may require the binding of a signal-generating complex to a duplex of target and probe polynucleotides or nucleic acids. Typically, such binding occurs through ligand and anti-ligand interactions as between a ligand-conjugated probe and an anti-ligand conjugated with a signal.
- the binding of the signal generation complex is also readily amenable to accelerations by exposure to ultrasonic energy.
- the label may also allow indirect detection of the hybridization complex.
- the label is a hapten or antigen
- the sample can be detected by using antibodies.
- a signal is generated by attaching fluorescent or enzyme molecules to the antibodies or in some cases, by attachment to a radioactive label (see, e.g., Tijssen, “ Practice and Theory of Enzyme Immunoassays,” Laboratory Techniques in Biochemistry and Molecular Biology , Burdon and van Knippenberg Eds., Elsevier (1985), pp. 9-20).
- the probes are typically labeled either directly, as with isotopes, chromophores, lumiphores, chromogens, or indirectly, such as with biotin, to which a streptavidin complex may later bind.
- the detectable labels used in the assays of the present invention can be primary labels (where the label comprises an element that is detected directly or that produces a directly detectable element) or secondary labels (where the detected label binds to a primary label, e.g., as is common in immunological labeling).
- labeled signal nucleic acids are used to detect hybridization.
- Complementary nucleic acids or signal nucleic acids may be labeled by any one of several methods typically used to detect the presence of hybridized polynucleotides. The most common method of detection is the use of autoradiography with 3 H, 125 I, 35 S, 14 C, or 32 P-labeled probes or the like.
- labels include, e.g., ligands that bind to labeled antibodies, fluorophores, chemiluminescent agents, enzymes, and antibodies that can serve as specific binding pair members for a labeled ligand.
- ligands that bind to labeled antibodies, fluorophores, chemiluminescent agents, enzymes, and antibodies that can serve as specific binding pair members for a labeled ligand.
- An introduction to labels, labeling procedures and detection of labels is found in Polak and Van Noorden Introduction to Immunocytochemistry, 2nd ed., Springer Verlag, NY (1997); and in Haugland Handbook of Fluorescent Probes and Research Chemicals , a combined handbook and catalogue Published by Molecular Probes, Inc. (1996).
- a detector that monitors a particular probe or probe combination is used to detect the detection reagent label.
- Typical detectors include spectrophotometers, phototubes and photodiodes, microscopes, scintillation counters, cameras, film and the like, as well as combinations thereof. Examples of suitable detectors are widely available from a variety of commercial sources known to persons of skill in the art. Commonly, an optical image of a substrate comprising bound labeling moieties is digitized for subsequent computer analysis.
- the amount of, for example, an ASKRK RNA is measured by quantifying the amount of label fixed to the solid support by binding of the detection reagent.
- the presence of a modulator during incubation will increase or decrease the amount of label fixed to the solid support relative to a control incubation that does not comprise the modulator, or as compared to a baseline established for a particular reaction type.
- Means of detecting and quantifying labels are well known to those of skill in the art.
- the target nucleic acid or the probe is immobilized on a solid support.
- Solid supports suitable for use in the assays of the invention are known to those of skill in the art. As used herein, a solid support is a matrix of material in a substantially fixed arrangement.
- VLSIPSTM very large scale immobilized polymer arrays
- Affymetrix, Inc. in Santa Clara, Calif.
- VLSIPSTM very large scale immobilized polymer arrays
- Affymetrix, Inc. in Santa Clara, Calif.
- spotted cDNA arrays arrays of cDNA sequences bound to nylon, glass or another solid support
- the array elements are organized in an ordered fashion so that each element is present at a specified location on the substrate. Because the array elements are at specified locations on the substrate, the hybridization patterns and intensities (which together create a unique expression profile) can be interpreted in terms of expression levels of particular genes and can be correlated with a particular disease or condition or treatment. See, e.g., Schena et al., Science 270: 467-470 (1995)) and (Lockhart et al., Nature Biotech. 14: 1675-1680 (1996)).
- Hybridization specificity can be evaluated by comparing the hybridization of specificity-control polynucleotide sequences to specificity-control polynucleotide probes that are added to a sample in a known amount.
- the specificity-control target polynucleotides may have one or more sequence mismatches compared with the corresponding polynucleotide sequences. In this manner, whether only complementary target polynucleotides are hybridizing to the polynucleotide sequences or whether mismatched hybrid duplexes are forming is determined.
- Hybridization reactions can be performed in absolute or differential hybridization formats.
- absolute hybridization format polynucleotide probes from one sample are hybridized to the sequences in a microarray format and signals detected after hybridization complex formation correlate to polynucleotide probe levels in a sample.
- differential hybridization format the differential expression of a set of genes in two biological samples is analyzed.
- polynucleotide probes from both biological samples are prepared and labeled with different labeling moieties.
- a mixture of the two labeled polynucleotide probes is added to a microarray. The microarray is then examined under conditions in which the emissions from the two different labels are individually detectable.
- the labels are fluorescent labels with distinguishable emission spectra, such as Cy3 and Cy5 fluorophores.
- the microarray is washed to remove nonhybridized nucleic acids and complex formation between the hybridizable array elements and the polynucleotide probes is detected.
- Methods for detecting complex formation are well known to those skilled in the art.
- the polynucleotide probes are labeled with a fluorescent label and measurement of levels and patterns of fluorescence indicative of complex formation is accomplished by fluorescence microscopy, such as confocal fluorescence microscopy.
- polynucleotide probes from two or more different biological samples are labeled with two or more different fluorescent labels with different emission wavelengths. Fluorescent signals are detected separately with different photomultipliers set to detect specific wavelengths. The relative abundances/expression levels of the polynucleotide probes in two or more samples are obtained.
- microarray fluorescence intensities can be normalized to take into account variations in hybridization intensities when more than one microarray is used under similar test conditions.
- individual polynucleotide probe/target complex hybridization intensities are normalized using the intensities derived from internal normalization controls contained on each microarray.
- Detection of nucleic acids can also be accomplished, for example, by using a labeled detection moiety that binds specifically to duplex nucleic acids (e.g., an antibody that is specific for RNA-DNA duplexes).
- a labeled detection moiety that binds specifically to duplex nucleic acids
- an antibody that is specific for RNA-DNA duplexes e.g., an antibody that is specific for RNA-DNA duplexes.
- the ASKRK nucleic acids used in this invention can be either positive or negative probes. Positive probes bind to their targets and the presence of duplex formation is evidence of the presence of the target. Negative probes fail to bind to the suspect target and the absence of duplex formation is evidence of the presence of the target.
- the use of a wild type specific nucleic acid probe or PCR primers may serve as a negative probe in an assay sample where only the nucleotide sequence of interest is present.
- the sensitivity of the hybridization assays may be enhanced through use of a nucleic acid amplification system that multiplies the target nucleic acid being detected.
- a nucleic acid amplification system that multiplies the target nucleic acid being detected.
- PCR polymerase chain reaction
- LCR ligase chain reaction
- Other methods recently described in the art are the nucleic acid sequence based amplification (NASBA, Cangene, Mississauga, Ontario) and Q Beta Replicase systems. These systems can be used to directly identify mutants where the PCR or LCR primers are designed to be extended or ligated only when a selected sequence is present.
- the selected sequences can be generally amplified using, for example, nonspecific PCR primers and the amplified target region later probed for a specific sequence indicative of a mutation.
- detection probes including Taqman and molecular beacon probes can be used to monitor amplification reaction products, e.g., in real time.
- An alternative means for determining the level of expression of the nucleic acids of the present invention is in situ hybridization.
- In situ hybridization assays are well known and are generally described in Angerer et al., Methods Enzymol. 152:649-660 (1987).
- cells preferentially human cells from the cerebellum or the hippocampus, are fixed to a solid support, typically a glass slide. If DNA is to be probed, the cells are denatured with heat or alkali. The cells are then contacted with a hybridization solution at a moderate temperature to permit annealing of specific probes that are labeled.
- the probes are preferably labeled with radioisotopes or fluorescent reporters.
- Single nucleotide polymorphism (SNP) analysis is also useful for detecting differences between ASKRK alleles.
- SNPs linked to genes encoding polypeptides of the invention are useful, for instance, for diagnosis of diabetes or a predisposition to diabetes whose occurrence is linked to the gene sequences of the invention. For example, if an individual carries at least one SNP linked to a disease-associated allele of the gene sequences of the invention, the individual is likely predisposed for one or more of those diseases. If the individual is homozygous for a disease-linked SNP, the individual is particularly predisposed for occurrence of that disease (e.g., diabetes).
- the SNP associated with the gene sequences of the invention is located within 300,000; 200,000; 100,000; 75,000; 50,000; or 10,000 base pairs from the gene sequence.
- Various real-time PCR methods including, e.g., Taqman or molecular beacon-based assays (e.g., U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,210,015; 5,487,972; Tyagi et al., Nature Biotechnology 14:303 (1996); and PCT WO 95/13399 are useful to monitor for the presence of absence of a SNP.
- Additional SNP detection methods include, e.g., DNA sequencing, sequencing by hybridization, dot blotting, oligonucleotide array (DNA Chip) hybridization analysis, or are described in, e.g., U.S. Pat. No.
- Immunoassays can be used to qualitatively or quantitatively analyze polypeptides of the invention. A general overview of the applicable technology can be found, e.g., in Harlow & Lane, Antibodies: A Laboratory Manual (1988) and Harlow & Lane, Using Antibodies (1999).
- a recombinant ASKRK protein is produced in a transformed cell line.
- An inbred strain of mice or rabbits is immunized with the protein using a standard adjuvant, such as Freund's adjuvant, and a standard immunization protocol.
- a synthetic peptide derived from the ASKRK sequences disclosed herein is conjugated to a carrier protein and used as an immunogen.
- Polyclonal sera are collected and titered against the immunogen in an immunoassay, for example, a solid phase immunoassay with the immunogen immobilized on a solid support.
- Polyclonal antisera with a titer of 10 4 or greater are selected and tested for their crossreactivity against proteins other than the polypeptides of the invention or even other homologous proteins from other organisms, using a competitive binding immunoassay.
- Specific monoclonal and polyclonal antibodies and antisera will usually bind with a K D of at least about 0.1 mM, more usually at least about 1 ⁇ M, preferably at least about 0.1 ⁇ M or better, and most preferably, 0.01 ⁇ M or better.
- Recombinant protein is the preferred immunogen for the production of monoclonal or polyclonal antibodies.
- Naturally occurring protein may also be used either in pure or impure form.
- Synthetic peptides made using the protein sequences described herein may also be used as an immunogen for the production of antibodies to the protein.
- Recombinant protein can be expressed in eukaryotic or prokaryotic cells and purified as generally described supra. The product is then injected into an animal capable of producing antibodies. Either monoclonal or polyclonal antibodies may be generated for subsequent use in immunoassays to measure the protein.
- an immunogen preferably a purified protein
- an adjuvant preferably a purified protein
- animals are immunized.
- the animal's immune response to the immunogen preparation is monitored by taking test bleeds and determining the titer of reactivity to polypeptides of the invention.
- blood is collected from the animal and antisera are prepared. Further fractionation of the antisera to enrich for antibodies reactive to the protein can be done if desired (see, Harlow and Lane, supra).
- Monoclonal antibodies may be obtained using various techniques familiar to those of skill in the art.
- spleen cells from an animal immunized with a desired antigen are immortalized, commonly by fusion with a myeloma cell (see, Kohler and Milstein, Eur. J. Immunol. 6:511-519 (1976)).
- Alternative methods of immortalization include, e.g., transformation with Epstein Barr Virus, oncogenes, or retroviruses, or other methods well known in the art.
- Colonies arising from single immortalized cells are screened for production of antibodies of the desired specificity and affinity for the antigen, and yield of the monoclonal antibodies produced by such cells may be enhanced by various techniques, including injection into the peritoneal cavity of a vertebrate host.
- the immunogen can be measured by a variety of immunoassay methods with qualitative and quantitative results available to the clinician.
- immunoassays can be performed in any of several configurations, which are reviewed extensively in Maggio Enzyme Immunoassay , CRC Press, Boca Raton, Fla. (1980); Tijssen, supra; and Harlow and Lane, supra.
- Immunoassays to measure target proteins in a human sample may use a polyclonal antiserum that was raised to full-length polypeptides of the invention or a fragment thereof. This antiserum is selected to have low cross-reactivity against other proteins and any such cross-reactivity is removed by immunoabsorption prior to use in the immunoassay.
- a protein of interest is detected and/or quantified using any of a number of well-known immunological binding assays (see, e.g., U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,366,241; 4,376,110; 4,517,288; and 4,837,168).
- immunological binding assays see, e.g., U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,366,241; 4,376,110; 4,517,288; and 4,837,168.
- Immunological binding assays typically utilize a “capture agent” to specifically bind to and often immobilize the analyte (e.g., full-length polypeptides of the present invention, or antigenic subsequences thereof).
- the capture agent is a moiety that specifically binds to the analyte.
- the antibody may be produced by any of a number of means well known to those of skill in the art and as described above.
- Immunoassays also often utilize a labeling agent to bind specifically to and label the binding complex formed by the capture agent and the analyte.
- the labeling agent may itself be one of the moieties comprising the antibody/analyte complex.
- the labeling agent may be a third moiety, such as another antibody, that specifically binds to the antibody/protein complex.
- the labeling agent is a second antibody bearing a label.
- the second antibody may lack a label, but it may, in turn, be bound by a labeled third antibody specific to antibodies of the species from which the second antibody is derived.
- the second antibody can be modified with a detectable moiety, such as biotin, to which a third labeled molecule can specifically bind, such as enzyme-labeled streptavidin.
- proteins capable of specifically binding immunoglobulin constant regions can also be used as the label agents. These proteins are normal constituents of the cell walls of streptococcal bacteria. They exhibit a strong non-immunogenic reactivity with immunoglobulin constant regions from a variety of species (see, generally, Kronval, et al. J. Immunol., 111:1401-1406 (1973); and Akerstrom, et al. J. Immunol., 135:2589-2542 (1985)).
- incubation and/or washing steps may be required after each combination of reagents. Incubation steps can vary from about 5 seconds to several hours, preferably from about 5 minutes to about 24 hours. The incubation time will depend upon the assay format, analyte, volume of solution, concentrations, and the like. Usually, the assays will be carried out at ambient temperature, although they can be conducted over a range of temperatures, such as 10° C. to 40° C.
- Immunoassays for detecting ASKRK proteins or other analytes of interest from tissue samples may be either competitive or noncompetitive.
- Noncompetitive immunoassays are assays in which the amount of captured protein or analyte is directly measured.
- the capture agent e.g., antibodies specific for the polypeptides of the invention
- the capture agent can be bound directly to a solid substrate where it is immobilized. These immobilized antibodies then capture the polypeptide present in the test sample.
- the polypeptide of the invention thus immobilized is then bound by a labeling agent, such as a second labelled antibody specific for the polypeptide.
- the second antibody may lack a label, but it may, in turn, be bound by a labeled third antibody specific to antibodies of the species from which the second antibody is derived.
- the second can be modified with a detectable moiety, such as biotin, to which a third labeled molecule can specifically bind, such as enzyme-labeled streptavidin.
- western blot (immunoblot) analysis is used to detect and quantify the presence of a polypeptide of the invention in the sample.
- the technique generally comprises separating sample proteins by gel electrophoresis, transferring the separated proteins to a suitable solid support and incubating the sample with the antibodies that specifically bind the protein of interest. These antibodies may be directly labeled or alternatively may be subsequently detected using labeled antibodies (e.g., labeled sheep anti-mouse antibodies) that specifically bind to the antibodies against the protein of interest.
- LISA liposome immunoassays
- the amount of protein or analyte present in the sample is measured indirectly by measuring the amount of an added (exogenous) protein or analyte displaced (or competed away) from a specific capture agent (e.g., antibodies specific for a polypeptide of the invention) by the protein or analyte present in the sample.
- a specific capture agent e.g., antibodies specific for a polypeptide of the invention
- the amount of immunogen bound to the antibody is inversely proportional to the concentration of immunogen present in the sample.
- the antibody is immobilized on a solid substrate.
- the amount of analyte may be detected by providing a labeled analyte molecule.
- labels can include, e.g., radioactive labels as well as peptide or other tags that can be recognized by detection reagents such as antibodies.
- Immunoassays in the competitive binding format can be used for cross-reactivity determinations.
- the protein encoded by the sequences described herein can be immobilized on a solid support. Proteins are added to the assay and compete with the binding of the antisera to the immobilized antigen. The ability of the above proteins to compete with the binding of the antisera to the immobilized protein is compared to that of the protein encoded by any of the sequences described herein. The percent cross-reactivity for the above proteins is calculated, using standard calculations. Those antisera with less than 10% cross-reactivity with each of the proteins listed above are selected and pooled. The cross-reacting antibodies are optionally removed from the pooled antisera by immunoabsorption with the considered proteins, e.g., distantly related homologs.
- the immunoabsorbed and pooled antisera are then used in a competitive binding immunoassay as described above to compare a second protein, thought to be perhaps a protein of the present invention, to the immunogen protein.
- the two proteins are each assayed at a wide range of concentrations and the amount of each protein required to inhibit 50% of the binding of the antisera to the immobilized protein is determined. If the amount of the second protein required is less than 10 times the amount of the protein partially encoded by a sequence herein that is required, then the second protein is said to specifically bind to an antibody generated to an immunogen consisting of the target protein.
- the particular label or detectable group used in various assays is not a critical aspect of the invention, as long as it does not significantly interfere with the specific binding of the antibody used in the assay.
- the detectable group can be any material having a detectable physical or chemical property.
- Such detectable labels have been well-developed in the field of immunoassays and, in general, most labels useful in such methods can be applied to the present invention.
- a label is any composition detectable by spectroscopic, photochemical, biochemical, immunochemical, electrical, optical or chemical means.
- Useful labels in the present invention include magnetic beads (e.g., DynabeadsTM), fluorescent dyes (e.g., fluorescein isothiocyanate, Texas red, rhodamine, and the like), radiolabels (e.g., 3 H, 125 I, 35 s, 14 C, or 32 P), enzymes (e.g., horse radish peroxidase, alkaline phosphatase and others commonly used in an ELISA), and calorimetric labels such as colloidal gold or colored glass or plastic (e.g., polystyrene, polypropylene, latex, etc.) beads.
- fluorescent dyes e.g., fluorescein isothiocyanate, Texas red, rhodamine, and the like
- radiolabels e.g., 3 H, 125 I, 35 s, 14 C, or 32 P
- enzymes e.g., horse radish peroxidase, alkaline phosphatas
- the label may be coupled directly or indirectly to the desired component of the assay according to methods well known in the art. As indicated above, a wide variety of labels may be used, with the choice of label depending on the sensitivity required, the ease of conjugation with the compound, stability requirements, available instrumentation, and disposal provisions.
- Non-radioactive labels are often attached by indirect means.
- the molecules can also be conjugated directly to signal generating compounds, e.g., by conjugation with an enzyme or fluorescent compound.
- an enzyme or fluorescent compound e.g., A variety of enzymes and fluorescent compounds can be used with the methods of the present invention and are well-known to those of skill in the art (for a review of various labeling or signal producing systems which may be used, see, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 4,391,904).
- Means of detecting labels are well known to those of skill in the art.
- means for detection include a scintillation counter or photographic film as in autoradiography.
- the label is a fluorescent label, it may be detected by exciting the fluorochrome with the appropriate wavelength of light and detecting the resulting fluorescence. The fluorescence may be detected visually, by means of photographic film, by the use of electronic detectors such as charge coupled devices (CCDs) or photomultipliers and the like.
- CCDs charge coupled devices
- enzymatic labels may be detected by providing the appropriate substrates for the enzyme and detecting the resulting reaction product.
- simple colorimetric labels may be detected directly by observing the color associated with the label. Thus, in various dipstick assays, conjugated gold often appears pink, while various conjugated beads appear the color of the bead.
- agglutination assays can be used to detect the presence of the target antibodies.
- antigen-coated particles are agglutinated by samples comprising the target antibodies.
- none of the components need to be labeled and the presence of the target antibody is detected by simple visual inspection.
- Inhibitors of ASKRK i.e., inhibitors of ASKRK activity or expression
- administration of inhibitors can be used to treat diabetic patients or prediabetic individuals to prevent progression, and therefore symptoms, associated with diabetes.
- the agents tested as modulators of polypeptides of the invention can be any small chemical compound, or a biological entity, such as a protein, sugar, nucleic acid or lipid.
- test compounds will be small chemical molecules and peptides.
- any chemical compound can be used as a potential modulator or ligand in the assays of the invention, although most often compounds that can be dissolved in aqueous or organic (especially DMSO-based) solutions are used.
- the assays are designed to screen large chemical libraries by automating the assay steps and providing compounds from any convenient source to assays, which are typically run in parallel (e.g., in microtiter formats on microtiter plates in robotic assays).
- Modulators also include agents designed to reduce the level of mRNA encoding an ASKRK polypeptide (e.g., antisense molecules, ribozymes, DNAzymes, small inhibitory RNAs and the like) or the level of translation from an mRNA (e.g., translation blockers such as an antisense molecules that are complementary to translation start or other sequences on an mRNA molecule). Modulators can also be variants or mutant proteins of an ASKRK polypeptide. It will be appreciated that there are many suppliers of chemical compounds, including Sigma (St. Louis, Mo.), Aldrich (St. Louis, Mo.), Sigma-Aldrich (St. Louis, Mo.), Fluka Chemika-Biochemica Analytika (Buchs, Switzerland) and the like.
- ASKRK polypeptide e.g., antisense molecules, ribozymes, DNAzymes, small inhibitory RNAs and the like
- translation blockers such as an antisense molecules that are complementary to translation start
- high throughput screening methods involve providing a combinatorial chemical or peptide library containing a large number of potential therapeutic compounds (potential modulator compounds). Such “combinatorial chemical libraries” or “ligand libraries” are then screened in one or more assays, as described herein, to identify those library members (particular chemical species or subclasses) that display a desired characteristic activity. The compounds thus identified can serve as conventional “lead compounds” or can themselves be used as potential or actual therapeutics.
- a combinatorial chemical library is a collection of diverse chemical compounds generated by either chemical synthesis or biological synthesis, by combining a number of chemical “building blocks” such as reagents.
- a linear combinatorial chemical library such as a polypeptide library is formed by combining a set of chemical building blocks (amino acids) in every possible way for a given compound length (i.e., the number of amino acids in a polypeptide compound). Millions of chemical compounds can be synthesized through such combinatorial mixing of chemical building blocks.
- combinatorial chemical libraries include, but are not limited to, peptide libraries (see, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 5,010,175, Furka, Int. J. Pept. Prot. Res. 37:487-493 (1991) and Houghton et al., Nature 354:84-88 (1991)).
- chemistries for generating chemical diversity libraries can also be used. Such chemistries include, but are not limited to: peptoids (e.g., PCT Publication No.
- nucleic acid libraries see Ausubel, Berger and Sambrook, all supra
- peptide nucleic acid libraries see, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 5,539,083
- antibody libraries see, e.g., Vaughn et al., Nature Biotechnology, 14(3):309-314 (1996) and PCT/US96/10287)
- carbohydrate libraries see, e.g., Liang et al., Science, 274:1520-1522 (1996) and U.S. Pat. No.
- screening protocols can be utilized to identify agents that modulate the level of expression or activity of a polynucleotide of a polypeptide of the invention in cells, particularly mammalian cells, and especially human cells.
- the screening methods involve screening a plurality of agents to identify an agent that modulates the activity of a polypeptide of the invention by, e.g., binding to the polypeptide, preventing an inhibitor or activator from binding to the polypeptide, increasing association of an inhibitor or activator with the polypeptide, or activating or inhibiting expression of the polypeptide.
- any cell expressing a full-length polypeptide of the invention or a fragment thereof can be used to identify modulators.
- the cells are eukaryotic cells lines (e.g., HEK293) transformed to express a heterologous ASKRK polypeptide.
- a cell expressing an endogenous ASKRK polypeptide e.g., a pancreatic cell or adrenal cell, is used in screens.
- Preliminary screens can be conducted by screening for agents capable of binding to ASKRK polypeptides, as at least some of the agents so identified are likely modulators of a polypeptide of the invention.
- Binding assays are also useful, e.g., for identifying endogenous proteins that interact with ASKRK.
- antibodies or other molecules that bind polypeptides of the invention can be identified in binding assays.
- Binding assays usually involve contacting an ASKRK polypeptide with one or more test agents and allowing sufficient time for the protein and test agents to form a binding complex. Any binding complexes formed can be detected using any of a number of established analytical techniques. Protein binding assays include, but are not limited to, methods that measure co-precipitation or co-migration on non-denaturing SDS-polyacrylamide gels, and co-migration on Western blots (see, e.g., Bennet, J. P. and Yamamura, H. I. (1985) “Neurotransmitter, Hormone or Drug Receptor Binding Methods,” in Neurotransmitter Receptor Binding (Yamamura, H.
- binding assays involve the use of mass spectrometry or NMR techniques to identify molecules bound the ASKRK polypeptide or displacement of labeled substrates.
- the ASKRK polypeptides used in these assays can be naturally expressed, cloned or synthesized.
- mammalian or yeast two-hybrid approaches can be used to identify polypeptides or other molecules that interact or bind to ASKRK when expressed together in a host cell.
- ASKRK activity can be assessed using a variety of in vitro and in vivo assays to determine functional, chemical, and physical effects. These assays include monitoring, for example, catalytic phosphorylation of substrate.
- An exemplary kinase assay is provided in the examples. Briefly, the ability of ASKRK to phosphorylate a MAP kinase kinase (MKK6) is tested by incubating the substrate with an ASKRK polypeptide in a buffer with 32 P- ⁇ ATP and measuring the amount of phosphorylated substrate.
- MKK6 MAP kinase kinase
- Assays formatted for highthroughput use can also be used.
- kinases catalyze the transfer of a gamma-phosphoryl group from ATP to an appropriate hydroxyl acceptor with the release of a proton.
- An assay based on the detection of this proton using an appropriately matched buffer/indicator system may therefore be used to detect activity (see, e.g., Chapman & Wong Bioorg Med Chem 10:551-5, 2002).
- ASKRK-mediated apoptosis can be used to assay for ASKRK activity.
- hallmarks of apoptosis e.g., DNA fragmentation
- cell viability are measured.
- Cell viability can be measured using an assay suitable for a high throughput screening format, such as a colorimetric or fluorescent viability assay.
- an Alamar blue (AB) assay incorporates a redox indicator that changes the colour or fluorescence in response to metabolic activity. The Alamar blue fluoresces in the presence of living, but not dead, cells.
- Such an assay can be conveniently read in a microtiter plate or by flow cytometry.
- Colorimetric assays such as the MTT assay, which measures the reduction of MTT (3-(4.5-dimethyl) thiazol-2-yl-2,5-diphenyl tetrazolium bromide) to formazan, may also be used conveniently in a high throughput format to measure cell viability and proliferation.
- cell number may also be used. These include assays that measure intercalation of dyes into the DNA of a cell. The amount of intercalated dye is directly proportional to cell number. For example, cells can be stained with a dye such as Hoechst 33342, which intercalates in the DNA of vital cell, an cell number determined by measuring the amount of fluorescence. Cells may also be directly counted.
- a dye such as Hoechst 33342, which intercalates in the DNA of vital cell, an cell number determined by measuring the amount of fluorescence. Cells may also be directly counted.
- the ASKRK polypeptide of the assay will be selected from a polypeptide with substantial identity to a sequence of SEQ ID NO:2 or other conservatively modified variants thereof. Generally, the amino acid sequence identity will be at least 70%, optionally at least 85%, optionally at least 90-95% to the ASKRK polypeptides exemplified herein, or the polypeptide will have at least 10 contiguous amino acids, more often 20, 25, 30, 25, 50, or 100 contiguous amino acids of SEQ ID NO:2.
- the ASKRK polypeptide used in activity assays will comprise a fragment of a polypeptide of the invention, such as a kinase domain and the like.
- a polypeptide of the invention can be covalently linked to a heterologous protein to create a chimeric protein used in the assays described herein.
- a polypeptide of the invention is active when it has an activity value, relative to the control, that is 110%, optionally 150%, 200%, 300%, 400%, 500%, or 1000-2000%.
- Candidate inhibitors of ASKRK activity are tested using either recombinant or naturally occurring polypeptides.
- the protein can be isolated, expressed in a cell, expressed in a membrane derived from a cell, expressed in tissue or in an animal, either recombinant or naturally occurring.
- tissue slices, dissociated cells, e.g., from tissues expressing polypeptides of the invention, transformed cells, or membranes can be used. Inhibition is tested using one of the in vitro or in vivo assays described herein.
- Test compound binding to polypeptides of the invention, a domain, or chimeric protein can be tested in solution, in a bilayer membrane, attached to a solid phase, in a lipid monolayer, or in vesicles. Binding of a test compound can be tested using, e.g., changes in spectroscopic characteristics (e.g., fluorescence, absorbance, refractive index), hydrodynamic (e.g., shape), chromatographic, or solubility properties.
- spectroscopic characteristics e.g., fluorescence, absorbance, refractive index
- hydrodynamic e.g., shape
- chromatographic chromatographic, or solubility properties.
- Samples or assays that are treated with a potential inhibitor are compared to control samples without the test compound, to examine the extent of modulation.
- Control samples untreated with candidate compounds are assigned a relative activity value of 100.
- Inhibition of the polypeptides of the invention is achieved when the activity value relative to the control is about 90%, optionally 50%, optionally 25-0%.
- Screening assays for a compound that modulates the expression of ASKRK polynucleotides and polypeptides are also provided. Screening methods generally involve conducting cell-based assays in which test compounds are contacted with one or more cells expressing ASKRK, and then detecting an increase or decrease in expression (either transcript or translation product). Assays can be performed with any cells that express a ASKRK polypeptide. Some assays may employ cells that express ASKRK at high levels e.g., a pancreatic beta cell or islet cell.
- Expression can be detected in a number of different ways. As described infra, the expression level of an ASKRK polynucleotide can be determined by probing the mRNA expressed in a cell with a probe that specifically hybridizes with an ASKRK transcript (or complementary nucleic acid derived therefrom). Alternatively, an ASKRK polypeptide can be detected using immunological methods, e.g., an assay in which a cell lysate is probed with antibodies that specifically bind to the polypeptide.
- Reporter systems can also be used to identify modulators of ASKRK expression.
- a variety of different types of cells can be utilized in reporter assays.
- Cells that do not endogenously express an ASKRK polypeptide can be prokaryotic, but are preferably eukaryotic.
- the eukaryotic cells can be any of the cells typically utilized in generating cells that harbor recombinant nucleic acid constructs.
- Exemplary eukaryotic cells include, but are not limited to, yeast, and various higher eukaryotic cells such as the HEK293, HepG2, COS, CHO and HeLa cell lines.
- Agents that are initially identified by any of the foregoing screening methods can be further tested to validate the activity.
- Modulators that are selected for further study can be tested on a variety of cells, e.g., pancreatic cells such as the beta cell lines HIT-T15, RiNm5, betaTC3, betaHC9, and INS1.
- Cells that have been engineered to express ASKRK may also be used.
- fibroblasts that overexpress ASKRK may be used to further validate the activity of the candidate modulator.
- cells that express ASKRK are pre-incubated with the modulators and tested for apoptotic activity.
- the effect of the compound will be assessed in either diabetic animals or in diet-induced insulin resistant animals.
- the blood glucose and insulin levels will be determined.
- the animal models utilized in validation studies generally are mammals of any kind. Specific examples of suitable animals include, but are not limited to, primates, mice and rats.
- monogenic models of diabetes e.g., ob/ob and db/db mice, Zucker rats and Zucker Diabetic Fatty rats etc
- polygenic models of diabetes e.g., OLETF rats, GK rats, NSY mice, and KK mice
- transgenic animals expressing human ASKRK polypeptides can be used to further validate drug candidates.
- Compounds are typically selected that increase beta cell viability or improve islet function.
- Assays to assess insulin sensitivity and islet function include fasting blood glucose assays, fasting insulin level assays, assessment of glucose levels during an oral or intraperitoneal glucose tolerance test, assessment of insulin or C-peptide levels during an oral or intraperitoneal glucose tolerance test.
- Other secretagogues e.g., arginine or glyburide can also be used to test for the glucose specificity of the improvement in islet function.
- each well of a microtiter plate can be used to run a separate assay against a selected potential modulator, or, if concentration or incubation time effects are to be observed, every 5-10 wells can test a single modulator.
- a single standard microtiter plate can assay about 100 (e.g., 96) modulators. If 1536 well plates are used, then a single plate can easily assay from about 100 to about 1500 different compounds. It is possible to assay several different plates per day; assay screens for up to about 6,000-20,000 or more different compounds are possible using the integrated systems of the invention.
- microfluidic approaches to reagent manipulation can be used.
- a molecule of interest (e.g., a ASKRK polypeptide or polynucleotide, or a modulator thereof) can be bound to the solid-state component, directly or indirectly, via covalent or non-covalent linkage, e.g., via a tag.
- the tag can be any of a variety of components. In general, a molecule that binds the tag (a tag binder) is fixed to a solid support, and the tagged molecule of interest is attached to the solid support by interaction of the tag and the tag binder.
- tags and tag binders can be used, based upon known molecular interactions well described in the literature.
- a tag has a natural binder, for example, biotin, protein A, or protein G
- tag binders avidin, streptavidin, neutravidin, the Fc region of an immunoglobulin, poly-His, etc.
- Antibodies to molecules with natural binders such as biotin are also widely available and appropriate tag binders (see, SIGMA Immunochemicals 1998 catalogue SIGMA, St. Louis Mo.).
- any haptenic or antigenic compound can be used in combination with an appropriate antibody to form a tag/tag binder pair.
- Thousands of specific antibodies are commercially available and many additional antibodies are described in the literature.
- the tag is a first antibody and the tag binder is a second antibody that recognizes the first antibody.
- receptor-ligand interactions are also appropriate as tag and tag-binder pairs, such as agonists and antagonists of cell membrane receptors (e.g., cell receptor-ligand interactions such as transferrin, c-kit, viral receptor ligands, cytokine receptors, chemokine receptors, interleukin receptors, immunoglobulin receptors and antibodies, the cadherin family, the integrin family, the selectin family, and the like; see, e.g., Pigott & Power, The Adhesion Molecule Facts Book I (1993)).
- cell membrane receptors e.g., cell receptor-ligand interactions such as transferrin, c-kit, viral receptor ligands, cytokine receptors, chemokine receptors, interleukin receptors, immunoglobulin receptors and antibodies, the cadherin family, the integrin family, the selectin family, and the like; see, e.g., Pigott & Power, The Adhesion Molecule
- toxins and venoms can all interact with various cell receptors.
- hormones e.g., opiates, steroids, etc.
- intracellular receptors e.g., which mediate the effects of various small ligands, including steroids, thyroid hormone, retinoids and vitamin D; peptides
- lectins e.g., which mediate the effects of various small ligands, including steroids, thyroid hormone, retinoids and vitamin D; peptides
- drugs lectins
- sugars e.g., nucleic acids (both linear and cyclic polymer configurations), oligosaccharides, proteins, phospholipids and antibodies
- nucleic acids both linear and cyclic polymer configurations
- oligosaccharides oligosaccharides
- proteins e.g.
- Synthetic polymers such as polyurethanes, polyesters, polycarbonates, polyureas, polyamides, polyethyleneimines, polyarylene sulfides, polysiloxanes, polyimides, and polyacetates can also form an appropriate tag or tag binder. Many other tag/tag binder pairs are also useful in assay systems described herein, as would be apparent to one of skill upon review of this disclosure.
- linkers such as peptides, polyethers, and the like can also serve as tags, and include polypeptide sequences, such as poly-Gly sequences of between about 5 and 200 amino acids (SEQ ID NO:8).
- polypeptide sequences such as poly-Gly sequences of between about 5 and 200 amino acids (SEQ ID NO:8).
- Such flexible linkers are known to those of skill in the art.
- poly(ethylene glycol) linkers are available from Shearwater Polymers, Inc., Huntsville, Ala. These linkers optionally have amide linkages, sulfhydryl linkages, or heterofunctional linkages.
- Tag binders are fixed to solid substrates using any of a variety of methods currently available.
- Solid substrates are commonly derivatized or functionalized by exposing all or a portion of the substrate to a chemical reagent that fixes a chemical group to the surface that is reactive with a portion of the tag binder.
- groups that are suitable for attachment to a longer chain portion would include amines, hydroxyl, thiol, and carboxyl groups.
- Aminoalkylsilanes and hydroxyalkylsilanes can be used to functionalize a variety of surfaces, such as glass surfaces. The construction of such solid phase biopolymer arrays is well described in the literature (see, e.g., Merrifield, J. Am. Chem. Soc.
- Non-chemical approaches for fixing tag binders to substrates include other common methods, such as heat, cross-linking by UV radiation, and the like.
- the invention provides in vitro assays for identifying, in a high throughput format, compounds that can modulate the expression or activity of ASKRK.
- Control reactions that measure ASKRK activity in a cell in a reaction that does not include a potential modulator are optional, as the assays are highly uniform. Such optional control reactions are appropriate and increase the reliability of the assay. Accordingly, in some embodiments, the methods of the invention include such a control reaction.
- “no modulator” control reactions that do not include a modulator provide a background level of binding activity.
- a known activator of ASKRK can be incubated with one sample of the assay, and the resulting increase in signal resulting from an increased expression level or activity of a ASKRK polypeptide or polynucleotide are determined according to the methods herein.
- a known inhibitor of a polypeptide or a polynucleotide of the invention can be added, and the resulting decrease in signal for the expression or activity of the ASKRK polypeptide or polynucleotide can be similarly detected.
- modulators can also be combined with activators or inhibitors to find modulators that inhibit the increase or decrease that is otherwise caused by the presence of the known modulator of an ASKRK polypeptide or polynucleotide.
- the invention provides compositions, kits and integrated systems for practicing the assays described herein using ASKRK nucleic acids or polypeptides, antibodies, etc.
- the invention provides assay compositions for use in solid phase assays; such compositions can include, for example, one or more nucleic acids encoding ASKRK immobilized on a solid support, and a labeling reagent.
- the assay compositions can also include additional reagents that are desirable for hybridization. Modulators of ASKRK expression or activity can also be included in the assay compositions.
- kits for carrying out the assays described herein.
- the kits typically include a probe that comprises an antibody that specifically binds an ASKRK polypeptide or a polynucleotide sequence encoding an ASKRK polypeptide, and a label for detecting the presence of the probe.
- Kits can include any of the compositions noted above, and optionally further include additional components such as instructions to practice a high-throughput method of assaying for an effect on ASKRK expression or activity, one or more containers or compartments (e.g., to hold the probe, labels, or the like), a control modulator of ASKRK expression or activity, a robotic armature for mixing kit components or the like.
- the invention also provides integrated systems for high-throughput screening of potential modulators for an effect on ASKRK expression or activity.
- the systems can include a robotic armature which transfers fluid from a source to a destination, a controller which controls the robotic armature, a label detector, a data storage unit which records label detection, and an assay component such as a microtiter dish comprising a well having a reaction mixture or a substrate comprising a fixed nucleic acid or immobilization moiety.
- a number of robotic fluid transfer systems are available, or can easily be made from existing components.
- a Zymate XP (Zymark Corporation; Hopkinton, Mass.) automated robot using a Microlab 2200 (Hamilton; Reno, Nev.) pipetting station can be used to transfer parallel samples to 96 well microtiter plates to set up several parallel simultaneous binding assays.
- Optical images viewed (and, optionally, recorded) by a camera or other recording device are optionally further processed in any of the embodiments herein, e.g., by digitizing the image and storing and analyzing the image on a computer.
- a camera or other recording device e.g., a photodiode and data storage device
- a variety of commercially available peripheral equipment and software is available for digitizing, storing and analyzing a digitized video or digitized optical image.
- One conventional system carries light from the specimen field to a cooled charge-coupled device (CCD) camera, in common use in the art.
- a CCD camera includes an array of picture elements (pixels). The light from the specimen is imaged on the CCD. Particular pixels corresponding to regions of the specimen (e.g., individual hybridization sites on an array of biological polymers) are sampled to obtain light intensity readings for each position. Multiple pixels are processed in parallel to increase speed.
- the apparatus and methods of the invention are easily used for viewing any sample, e.g., by fluorescent or dark field microscopic techniques.
- ASKRK modulators e.g., inhibitors can be administered directly to the mammalian subject for modulation of activity of a polypeptide of the invention in vivo.
- Administration is by any of the routes normally used for introducing a modulator compound into ultimate contact with the tissue to be treated and is well known to those of skill in the art. Although more than one route can be used to administer a particular composition, a particular route can often provide a more immediate and more effective reaction than another route.
- compositions of the invention may comprise a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
- Pharmaceutically acceptable carriers are determined in part by the particular composition being administered, as well as by the particular method used to administer the composition. Accordingly, there are a wide variety of suitable formulations of pharmaceutical compositions of the present invention (see, e.g., Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences, 17 th ed. 1985)).
- Inhibitors of the expression or activity of ASKRK alone or in combination with other suitable components can be prepared for injection or for use in a pump device.
- Pump devices also known as “insulin pumps” are commonly used to administer insulin to patients and therefore can be easily adapted to include compositions of the present invention.
- Manufacturers of insulin pumps include Animas, Disetronic and MiniMed.
- ASKRK inhibitors alone or in combination with other suitable components, can also be made into aerosol formulations (i.e., they can be “nebulized”) to be administered via inhalation. Aerosol formulations can be placed into pressurized acceptable propellants, such as dichlorodifluoromethane, propane, nitrogen, and the like.
- Formulations suitable for administration include aqueous and non-aqueous solutions, isotonic sterile solutions, which can contain antioxidants, buffers, bacteriostats, and solutes that render the formulation isotonic, and aqueous and non-aqueous sterile suspensions that can include suspending agents, solubilizers, thickening agents, stabilizers, and preservatives.
- compositions can be administered, for example, orally, nasally, topically, intravenously, intraperitoneally, or intrathecally.
- the formulations of compounds can be presented in unit-dose or multi-dose sealed containers, such as ampoules and vials. Solutions and suspensions can be prepared from sterile powders, granules, and tablets of the kind previously described.
- the modulators can also be administered as part of a prepared food or drug.
- the dose administered to a patient should be sufficient to induce a beneficial response in the subject over time.
- the optimal dose level for any patient will depend on a variety of factors including the efficacy of the specific modulator employed, the age, body weight, physical activity, and diet of the patient, on a possible combination with other drugs, and on the severity of the case of diabetes. It is recommended that the daily dosage of the modulator be determined for each individual patient by those skilled in the art in a similar way as for known insulin compositions.
- the size of the dose also will be determined by the existence, nature, and extent of any adverse side-effects that accompany the administration of a particular compound or vector in a particular subject.
- a physician may evaluate circulating plasma levels of the modulator, modulator toxicity, and the production of anti-modulator antibodies.
- the dose equivalent of a modulator is from about 1 ng/kg to 10 mg/kg for a typical subject.
- modulators of the present invention can be administered at a rate determined by the LD-50 of the modulator, and the side-effects of the modulator at various concentrations, as applied to the mass and overall health of the subject. Administration can be accomplished via single or divided doses.
- the compounds of the present invention can also be used effectively in combination with one or more additional active agents depending on the desired target therapy (see, e.g., Turner, N. et al. Prog. Drug Res. (1998) 51: 33-94; Haffner, S. Diabetes Care (1998) 21: 160-178; and DeFronzo, R. et al. (eds.), Diabetes Reviews (1997) Vol. 5 No. 4).
- a number of studies have investigated the benefits of combination therapies with oral agents (see, e.g., Mahler, R., J. Clin. Endocrinol. Metab. (1999) 84: 1165-71; United Kingdom Prospective Diabetes Study Group: UKPDS 28 , Diabetes Care (1998) 21: 87-92; Bardin, C.
- Combination therapy includes administration of a single pharmaceutical dosage formulation that contains a modulator of the invention and one or more additional active agents, as well as administration of a modulator and each active agent in its own separate pharmaceutical dosage formulation.
- a modulator and a thiazolidinedione can be administered to the human subject together in a single oral dosage composition, such as a tablet or capsule, or each agent can be administered in separate oral dosage formulations.
- a modulator and one or more additional active agents can be administered at essentially the same time (i.e., concurrently), or at separately staggered times (i.e., sequentially). Combination therapy is understood to include all these regimens.
- combination therapy can be seen in treating pre-diabetic individuals (e.g., to prevent progression into type 2 diabetes) or diabetic individuals (or treating diabetes and its related symptoms, complications, and disorders), wherein the modulators can be effectively used in combination with, for example, sulfonylureas (such as chlorpropamide, tolbutamide, acetohexamide, tolazamide, glyburide, gliclazide, glynase, glimepiride, and glipizide); biguanides (such as metformin); a PPAR beta delta agonist; a ligand or agonist of PPAR gamma such as thiazolidinediones (such as ciglitazone, pioglitazone (see, e.g., U.S.
- sulfonylureas such as chlorpropamide, tolbutamide, acetohexamide, tolazamide, glyburide, gliclazide
- PPAR alpha agonists such as clofibrate, gemfibrozil, fenofibrate, ciprofibrate, and bezafibrate; dehydroepiandrosterone (also referred to as DHEA or its conjugated sulphate ester, DHEA-SO4); antiglucocorticoids; TNF ⁇ inhibitors; ⁇ -glucosidase inhibitors (such as acarbose, miglitol, and voglibose); amylin and amylin derivatives (such as pramlintide, (see, also, U.S.
- nucleic acids encoding engineered ASKRK polypeptides e.g., dominant negative polypeptide
- nucleic acids that are inhibitors of ASKRK activity e.g., siRNAs, anti-sense RNAs, ribozymes and the like.
- Such methods can be used to administer nucleic acids in vitro.
- the nucleic acids encoding polypeptides of the invention are administered for in vivo or ex vivo gene therapy uses.
- Non-viral vector delivery systems include DNA plasmids, naked nucleic acid, and nucleic acid complexed with a delivery vehicle such as a liposome.
- Viral vector delivery systems include DNA and RNA viruses, which have either episomal or integrated genomes after delivery to the cell.
- small interfering RNAs are administered.
- introduction of long dsRNA often initiates a potent antiviral response, exemplified by nonspecific inhibition of protein synthesis and RNA degradation.
- the phenomenon of RNA interference is described and discussed, e.g., in Bass, Nature 411:428-29 (2001); Elbahir et al., Nature 411:494-98 (2001); and Fire et al., Nature 391:806-11 (1998), where methods of making interfering RNA also are discussed.
- the siRNAs based upon the ASKRK sequence disclosed herein are less than 100 base pairs, typically 30 bps or shorter, and are made by approaches known in the art.
- Exemplary siRNAs according to the invention could have up to 29 bps, 25 bps, 22 bps, 21 bps, 20 bps, 15 bps, 10 bps, 5 bps or any integer thereabout or therebetween.
- Methods of non-viral delivery of nucleic acids encoding engineered polypeptides of the invention include lipofection, microinjection, biolistics, virosomes, liposomes, immunoliposomes, polycation or lipid:nucleic acid conjugates, naked DNA, artificial virions, and agent-enhanced uptake of DNA.
- Lipofection is described in e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 5,049,386, U.S. Pat. No. 4,946,787; and U.S. Pat. No. 4,897,355) and lipofection reagents are sold commercially (e.g., TransfectamTM and LipofectinTM).
- Cationic and neutral lipids that are suitable for efficient receptor-recognition lipofection of polynucleotides include those of Felgner, WO 91/17424, WO 91/16024. Delivery can be to cells (ex vivo administration) or target tissues (in vivo administration).
- lipid:nucleic acid complexes including targeted liposomes such as immunolipid complexes
- the preparation of lipid:nucleic acid complexes, including targeted liposomes such as immunolipid complexes is well known to one of skill in the art (see, e.g., Crystal, Science 270:404-410 (1995); Blaese et al., Cancer Gene Ther. 2:291-297 (1995); Behr et al., Bioconjugate Chem. 5:382-389 (1994); Remy et al., Bioconjugate Chem. 5:647-654 (1994); Gao et al., Gene Therapy 2:710-722 (1995); Ahmad et al., Cancer Res. 52:4817-4820 (1992); U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,186,183, 4,217,344, 4,235,871, 4,261,975, 4,485,054, 4,501,728, 4,774,085, 4,837,028, and 4,946,787).
- RNA or DNA viral based systems for the delivery of nucleic acids encoding engineered ASKRK polypeptides or nucleic acids take advantage of highly evolved processes for targeting a virus to specific cells in the body and trafficking the viral payload to the nucleus.
- Viral vectors can be administered directly to patients (in vivo) or they can be used to treat cells in vitro and the modified cells are administered to patients (ex vivo).
- Conventional viral based systems for the delivery of polypeptides of the invention could include retroviral, lentivirus, adenoviral, adeno-associated and herpes simplex virus vectors for gene transfer.
- Viral vectors are currently the most efficient and versatile method of gene transfer in target cells and tissues. Integration in the host genome is possible with the retrovirus, lentivirus, and adeno-associated virus gene transfer methods, often resulting in long term expression of the inserted transgene. Additionally, high transduction efficiencies have been observed in many different cell types and target tissues.
- Lentiviral vectors are retroviral vectors that are able to transduce or infect non-dividing cells and typically produce high viral titers. Selection of a retroviral gene transfer system would therefore depend on the target tissue. Retroviral vectors are comprised of cis-acting long terminal repeats with packaging capacity for up to 6-10 kb of foreign sequence. The minimum cis-acting LTRs are sufficient for replication and packaging of the vectors, which are then used to integrate the therapeutic gene into the target cell to provide permanent transgene expression.
- Widely used retroviral vectors include those based upon murine leukemia virus (MuLV), gibbon ape leukemia virus (GaLV), Simian Immuno deficiency virus (SIV), human immuno deficiency virus (HIV), and combinations thereof (see, e.g., Buchscher et al., J. Virol. 66:2731-2739 (1992); Johann et al., J. Virol. 66:1635-1640 (1992); Sommerfelt et al., Virol. 176:58-59 (1990); Wilson et al., J. Virol. 63:2374-2378 (1989); Miller et al., J. Virol. 65:2220-2224 (1991); PCT/US94/05700).
- MiLV murine leukemia virus
- GaLV gibbon ape leukemia virus
- SIV Simian Immuno deficiency virus
- HAV human immuno deficiency virus
- Adenoviral based systems are typically used.
- Adenoviral based vectors are capable of very high transduction efficiency in many cell types and do not require cell division. With such vectors, high titer and levels of expression have been obtained. This vector can be produced in large quantities in a relatively simple system.
- Adeno-associated virus (“AAV”) vectors are also used to transduce cells with target nucleic acids, e.g., in the in vitro production of nucleic acids and peptides, and for in vivo and ex vivo gene therapy procedures (see, e.g., West et al., Virology 160:38-47 (1987); U.S. Pat. No.
- pLASN and MFG-S are examples are retroviral vectors that have been used in clinical trials (Dunbar et al., Blood 85:3048-305 (1995); Kohn et al., Nat. Med. 1:1017-102 (1995); Malech et al., PNAS 94:22 12133-12138 (1997)).
- PA317/pLASN was the first therapeutic vector used in a gene therapy trial. (Blaese et al., Science 270:475-480 (1995)). Transduction efficiencies of 50% or greater have been observed for MFG-S packaged vectors. (Ellem et al., Immunol Immunother. 44(1):10-20 (1997); Dranoff et al., Hum. Gene Ther. 1:111-2 (1997).
- Recombinant adeno-associated virus vectors are a promising alternative gene delivery systems based on the defective and nonpathogenic parvovirus adeno-associated type 2 virus. All vectors are derived from a plasmid that retains only the AAV 145 bp inverted terminal repeats flanking the transgene expression cassette. Efficient gene transfer and stable transgene delivery due to integration into the genomes of the transduced cell are key features for this vector system. (Wagner et al., Lancet 351:9117 1702-3 (1998), Kearns et al., Gene Ther. 9:748-55 (1996)).
- Replication-deficient recombinant adenoviral vectors can be engineered such that a desired nucleic acid replaces the Ad E1a, E1b, and E3 genes; subsequently the replication defector vector is propagated in human 293 cells that supply deleted gene function in trans.
- Ad vectors can transduce multiply types of tissues in vivo, including nondividing, differentiated cells such as those found in the liver, kidney, muscle, and pancreatic system tissues. Conventional Ad vectors have a large carrying capacity.
- An example of the use of an Ad vector in a clinical trial involved polynucleotide therapy for antitumor immunization with intramuscular injection (Sterman et al., Hum. Gene Ther. 7:1083-9 (1998)).
- adenovirus vectors for gene transfer in clinical trials include Rosenecker et al., Infection 24:15-10 (1996); Sterman et al., Hum. Gene Ther. 9:7 1083-1089 (1998); Welsh et al., Hum. Gene Ther. 2:205-18 (1995); Alvarez et al., Hum. Gene Ther. 5:597-613 (1997); Topf et al., Gene Ther. 5:507-513 (1998); Sterman et al., Hum. Gene Ther. 7:1083-1089 (1998).
- Packaging cells are used to form virus particles that are capable of infecting a host cell. Such cells include 293 cells, which package adenovirus, and ⁇ 2 cells or PA317 cells, which package retrovirus.
- Viral vectors used in gene therapy are usually generated by producer cell line that packages a nucleic acid vector into a viral particle. The vectors typically contain the minimal viral sequences required for packaging and subsequent integration into a host, other viral sequences being replaced by an expression cassette for the protein to be expressed. The missing viral functions are supplied in trans by the packaging cell line. For example, AAV vectors used in gene therapy typically only possess ITR sequences from the AAV genome which are required for packaging and integration into the host genome.
- Viral DNA is packaged in a cell line, which contains a helper plasmid encoding the other AAV genes, namely rep and cap, but lacking ITR sequences.
- the cell line is also infected with adenovirus as a helper.
- the helper virus promotes replication of the AAV vector and expression of AAV genes from the helper plasmid.
- the helper plasmid is not packaged in significant amounts due to a lack of ITR sequences. Contamination with adenovirus can be reduced by, e.g., heat treatment to which adenovirus is more sensitive than AAV.
- the gene therapy vector be delivered with a high degree of specificity to a particular tissue type, e.g., pancreatic tissue.
- a viral vector is typically modified to have specificity for a given cell type by expressing a ligand as a fusion protein with a viral coat protein on the viruses outer surface.
- the ligand is chosen to have affinity for a receptor known to be present on the cell type of interest.
- Han et al., PNAS 92:9747-9751 (1995) reported that Moloney murine leukemia virus can be modified to express human heregulin fused to gp70, and the recombinant virus infects certain human breast cancer cells expressing human epidermal growth factor receptor.
- filamentous phage can be engineered to display antibody fragments (e.g., FAB or Fv) having specific binding affinity for virtually any chosen cellular receptor.
- FAB fragment-binding protein
- Fv antibody fragment-binding protein
- Gene therapy vectors can be delivered in vivo by administration to an individual patient, typically by systemic administration (e.g., intravenous, intraperitoneal, intramuscular, subdermal, or intracranial infusion) or topical application, as described below.
- systemic administration e.g., intravenous, intraperitoneal, intramuscular, subdermal, or intracranial infusion
- vectors can be delivered to cells ex vivo, such as cells explanted from an individual patient.
- cells are isolated from the subject organism, transfected with a nucleic acid, e.g., an antisense ASKRK nucleic acid, an expression construct expressing an dominant negative construct, a ribozyme and the like, and re-infused back into the subject organism (e.g., patient).
- a nucleic acid e.g., an antisense ASKRK nucleic acid, an expression construct expressing an dominant negative construct, a ribozyme and the like
- Various cell types suitable for ex vivo transfection are well known to those of skill in the art (see, e.g., Freshney et al., Culture of Animal Cells, A Manual of Basic Technique (3rd ed. 1994)) and the references cited therein for a discussion of how to isolate and culture cells from patients).
- Vectors e.g., retroviruses, adenoviruses, liposomes, etc.
- therapeutic nucleic acids can be also administered directly to the organism for transduction of cells in vivo.
- naked DNA can be administered.
- Administration is by any of the routes normally used for introducing a molecule into ultimate contact with blood or tissue cells. Suitable methods of administering such nucleic acids are available and well known to those of skill in the art, and, although more than one route can be used to administer a particular composition, a particular route can often provide a more immediate and more effective reaction than another route.
- compositions of the present invention are determined in part by the particular composition being administered, as well as by the particular method used to administer the composition. Accordingly, there is a wide variety of suitable formulations of pharmaceutical compositions of the present invention, as described below (see, e.g., Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences, 17th ed., 1989).
- the present invention also provides methods of diagnosing diabetes or a predisposition of at least some of the pathologies of diabetes. Diagnosis can involve determination of a genotype of an individual (e.g., with SNPs) and comparison of the genotype with alleles known to have an association with the occurrence of diabetes. Alternatively, diagnosis also involves determining the level of an ASKRK polypeptide or polynucleotide in a patient and then comparing the level to a baseline or range. Typically, the baseline value is representative of a polypeptide or polynucleotide of the invention in a healthy (e.g., non-diabetic) person.
- a healthy e.g., non-diabetic
- a patient with increased levels of ASKRK polypeptide, nucleic acid, e.g., mRNA, or and/or ASKRK activity in pancreas relative to normal may have an increased risk for diabetes.
- the level of a polypeptide in a non-diabetic individual can be a reading from a single individual, but is typically a statistically relevant average from a group of non-diabetic individuals.
- the level of a polypeptide in a lean individual can be represented by a value, for example in a computer program.
- the level of ASKRK polypeptide or polynucleotide is measured by taking a blood, urine or tissue sample from a patient and measuring the amount of a polypeptide or polynucleotide of the invention in the sample using any number of detection methods, such as those discussed herein. For instance, fasting and fed blood or urine levels can be tested.
- the baseline level and the level in a non-diabetic sample from an individual, or at least two samples from the same individual differ by at least about 5%, 10%, 20%, 50%, 75%, 100%, 150%, 200%, 300%, 400%, 500%, 1000% or more.
- the sample from the individual is greater by at least one of the above-listed percentages relative to the baseline level. In some embodiments, the sample from the individual is lower by at least one of the above-listed percentages relative to the baseline level.
- the level of an ASKRK polypeptide or polynucleotide is used to monitor the effectiveness of treatments for diabetes such as thiazolidinediones, metformin, sulfonylureas and other standard therapies.
- the activity or expression of an ASKRK polypeptide or polynucleotide is measured prior to and after treatment of diabetic or pre-diabetic patients with antidiabetic therapies as a surrogate marker of clinical effectiveness. For example, the greater the reduction in expression or activity ASKRK indicates greater effectiveness.
- Glucose/insulin tolerance tests can also be used to detect the effect of glucose levels on levels of ASKRK polypeptides or polynucleotides.
- glucose tolerance tests the patient's ability to tolerate a standard oral glucose load is evaluated by assessing serum and urine specimens for glucose levels. Blood samples are taken before the glucose is ingested, glucose is given by mouth, and blood or urine glucose levels are tested at set intervals after glucose ingestion.
- meal tolerance tests can also be used to detect the effect of insulin or food, respectively, on levels of ASKRK.
- a custom Affymetrix oligonucleotide array probe set MBXMUSISL25681_at was identified as being highly enriched in mouse islets and a beta cell line ( ⁇ HC9) ( FIG. 1 ). This sequence was then used to design primers to obtain a larger clone containing a coding sequence that is 59% identical to the mouse ASK1 coding sequence. The kinase domains are 86% identical between the ASK1 and ASKRK.
- Anti-mASKRK antibodies were generated using the C-terminal peptide sequence SQHRRQMQESSQ (SEQ ID NO:9) for both immunization and affinity purification. The affinity purified antibody was used to demonstrate that ASKRK protein is abundant in islet beta cells, but is much less abundant in alpha cells and the surrounding acinar tissue (data not shown).
- the mouse ASKRK sequence was used to find homologous human genomic sequences, and these were, in turn, used to design primers for RT-PCR to obtain a partial coding sequence for human ASKRK. Also, by comparison of the synteny between rat and human genomic sequences 5′ of this partial sequence, the full coding sequence of human ASKRK (SEQ ID NO:1, nucleic acid sequence, SEQ ID NO:2, protein sequence) was obtained. A sequence comparison of the full-length human and partial mouse ASKRK amino acid sequences is shown in FIG. 2 .
- the DNA encoding human ASKRK was assembled for the full coding and deletion constructs described below. Human ASKRK-specific primers were also used for TaqMan (ABI) analysis to confirm that the human ASKRK mRNA was also enriched in islets relative to most other tissues. ASKRK mRNA is also expressed in human adrenal gland ( FIG. 3 ). Anti hASKRK antibodies were raised by immunizing rabbits with the C-terminal peptide sequence YRRAQEASETKDKA (SEQ ID NO:10). This antibody was used to confirm ASKRK expression in functional studies.
- ASKRK ASKRK-His- and ASKRK-His(K681M)-transfected cells that is not produced in cells transfected with pcDNA3.1 alone.
- the predicted molecular weight of the 1313 amino acid ASKRK protein is 147 kilodaltons.
- a protein with a larger N-terminal deletion did not have significant MKK6 phosphorylating activity ( FIG. 5 ).
- a variety of proapoptotic stimuli can reduce the viability of beta cells in culture.
- the NO donor sodium nitroprusside (SNP), and the cytokines IL-1, TNF- ⁇ and interferon ⁇ promote loss of viability in the beta cell line PHC9, and this activity is enhanced by prior infection with the hASKRK- ⁇ N adenovirus, but not with the same virus without hASKRK coding sequence and not with a kinase activity-deficient hASKRK- ⁇ N(K681 M) adenovirus ( FIG. 7 ).
- ASKRK is a loss-of-viability inducing kinase that is abundantly and selectively expressed in beta cells. Reducing the kinase activity of this protein also causes a reduction in its capacity to cause cell death.
Landscapes
- Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
- Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
- Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
- Organic Chemistry (AREA)
- Genetics & Genomics (AREA)
- Zoology (AREA)
- Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
- Bioinformatics & Cheminformatics (AREA)
- Wood Science & Technology (AREA)
- General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
- Molecular Biology (AREA)
- Proteomics, Peptides & Aminoacids (AREA)
- Medicinal Chemistry (AREA)
- Biochemistry (AREA)
- Microbiology (AREA)
- General Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
- Biotechnology (AREA)
- Diabetes (AREA)
- Analytical Chemistry (AREA)
- Biophysics (AREA)
- Biomedical Technology (AREA)
- Animal Behavior & Ethology (AREA)
- Toxicology (AREA)
- Pathology (AREA)
- Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
- Chemical Kinetics & Catalysis (AREA)
- Gastroenterology & Hepatology (AREA)
- Immunology (AREA)
- Endocrinology (AREA)
- Veterinary Medicine (AREA)
- Public Health (AREA)
- Pharmacology & Pharmacy (AREA)
- Nuclear Medicine, Radiotherapy & Molecular Imaging (AREA)
- General Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
- Emergency Medicine (AREA)
- Hematology (AREA)
- Obesity (AREA)
- Medicines That Contain Protein Lipid Enzymes And Other Medicines (AREA)
- Measuring Or Testing Involving Enzymes Or Micro-Organisms (AREA)
- Peptides Or Proteins (AREA)
Abstract
The invention provides apoptosis signaling kinase related kinase (ASKRK) nucleic acid and polypeptide sequences and methods of using such sequences to identify modulators of ASKRK. Such modulators can be used for the treatment of diabetes or for delaying the onset of diabetes. The invention also provides methods of diagnosing diabetes or pre-diabetes and methods of making a prognosis based on the detection of ASKRK nucleic acids and proteins.
Description
- This application is a divisional of U.S. application Ser. No. 11/488,338, filed Jul. 17, 2006, which is a divisional of U.S. application Ser. No. 10/980,974, filed Nov. 3, 2004, which claims benefit of U.S. Provisional Application No. 60/517,477, filed Nov. 4, 2003, each of which applications is herein incorporated by reference.
- In Type II diabetes, there is a progressive decline in insulin secretory function in beta cells in the face of ongoing insulin resistance. Currently available therapies are unable to prevent this decline (Diabetes 44:1249-1258, 1995; DeFronzo, Diabetes 37:667-687, 1988). Insulin resistance alone is not sufficient to cause Type II diabetes, and in fact, many individuals maintain insulin resistance for extended periods without becoming diabetic due to effective compensation by increased insulin secretion (Polonsky, Int J Obes Relat Metab Disord 24 Suppl 2:S29-31, 200). Insulin-resistant rats and mice display a compensatory increase in beta cell mass (Hribal, et al., Am J Physiol Endocrinol Metab 282:E977-981, 2002); the same phenomenon appears to occur in insulin resistant, but non-diabetic, (usually obese) humans (Kloppel, et al., Surv Synth Pathol Res 4:110-125, 1985; Butler, et al., Diabetes 52:102-110, 2003). In rodents, beta cell mass appears to be regulated by a changing balance between the positive effects of beta cell replication and neogenesis and the negative effects of beta cell apoptosis (Bonner-Weir, J Mol Endocrinol 24:297-302, 2000; Bonner-Weir, Trends Endocrinol Metab 11:375-378, 2000; Pick, et al., Diabetes 47:358-364, 1998; Finegood, et al., Diabetes 50:1021-1029, 2001). In humans, the onset of Type II diabetes due to insufficient increases (or actual declines) in beta cell mass is apparently due to increased beta cell apoptosis relative to non-diabetic insulin resistant individuals (Butler, et al., Diabetes 52:102-110, 2003). Agents which could specifically prevent this increase in beta cell apoptosis may therefore prevent insulin resistant individuals from developing Type II diabetes.
- Beta cell death and apoptosis are also central to the onset of Type I diabetes, although the mechanisms that lead to loss of beta cell mass are primarily T-cell mediated in Type I and this is not the case in the majority of Type II cases (Mathis, et al., Nature 414:792-798, 2001). In Type I diabetes, recruitment and activation of T-cells and macrophages leads to an intra-islet environment rich in cytokines (interleukin (IL)1-β, interferon (IFN)-γ and tumor necrosis factor (TNF)-α), reactive oxygen species and nitric oxide (NO), each of which can promote beta cell apoptosis in vitro (Eizirik and Darville,
Diabetes 50 Suppl 1:S64-69, 2001). Physiological beta cell apoptosis may actually trigger the immune response that results in wholesale islet destruction (Mathis, et al., Nature 414:792-798, 2001). - The mechanisms that lead to increased beta cell apoptosis are multiple and interlacing and they are as yet incompletely understood. Tumor necrosis factor (TNF)-α, which interacts with receptors TNF-RI and TNF-RII in both its membrane bound and soluble forms, can contribute to beta cell death in vitro (Kaneto, et al., Diabetes 44:733-738, 1995; Mandrup-Poulsen, et al., J Immunol 139:4077-4082, 1987). In the NOD mouse model of Type I diabetes, TNF-RI deficiency can prevent the onset of diabetes, presumably through reduction in beta cell death or apoptosis (Kagi, et al., J Immunol 162:4598-4605, 1999). Various modes of stress can also contribute to beta cell apoptosis (Zhou, et al., J Clin Invest 101:1623-1632, 1998).
- Although there are likely to be apoptotic modalities that are relatively unique to the beta cell, there are some general mechanisms of programmed cell death that occur in many cell and tissues that form fundamental pathways for cytotoxic responses to UV irradiation, X-rays, thermal and osmotic shock, endoplasmic reticulum (ER) stress as well as the response to proimflammatory cytokines such as IL-1 beta and TNF-alpha. Some of these pathways are composed of cascades of mitogen-activated protein kinases (MAP kinases) (Kyriakis and Avruch, Physiol Rev 81:807-869, 2001). Cytotoxic stresses activate MAP kinase kinase kinases (MAPKKKs), which phosphorylate and activate MAP kinase kinases (MAPKKs), which in turn phoshorylate and activate MAP kinases such as ERK, JNK1-3 and p38 (Johnson and Lapadat, Science 298:1911-1912, 2002; Tibbles and Woodgett, Cell Mol Life Sci 55:1230-1254, 1999). JNKs, which phosphorylate and activate the transcription factor c-Jun among other substrates, are critical mediators of apoptosis (Tournier, et al., Science 288:870-874, 2000).
- Apoptosis signaling kinase (ASK)-1/MAPKKK5 is a ubiquitously expressed component of the kinase cascade that activates JNK and p38 (Takeda, et al., Cell Struct Funct 28:23-29, 2003). ASK1 directly phosphorylates MKK4(SEK1)/MKK7 and MKK3/MKK6, which in turn phosphorylate the JNKs and p38 (Ichijo, et al., Science 275:90-94, 1997). A constitutively active form of ASK1 is obtained by truncating an N-terminal regulatory domain; expression of this active kinase leads to apoptosis via mitochondria-dependent caspase activation (Hatai, et al., J Biol Chem 275:26576-26581, 2000). Cells from mice that lack ASK1 are resistant to the apoptotic effects of oxidative stress and TNF-αc (Tobiume, et al., EMBO Rep 2:222-228, 2001).
- The role of ASK1 in oxidative stress-initiated apoptosis may be mediated in part by a direct physical interaction with the redox-regulatory protein thioredoxin (TRX) (Saitoh, et al., Embo J 17:2596-2606, 1998). Trx inhibits ASK1 kinase activity upon binding to the N-terminal domain that is lacking in the constitutively active form of ASK1. The interaction between ASK1 and Trx is dependent on Trx being in the reduced form; this provides a mechanism by which the redox state of the cell can regulate ASK1 kinase activity (Liu and Min, Circ Res 90:1259-1266, 2002). Accordingly, reactive oxygen species such as H2O2 cause dissociation of Trx-ASK1 complexes and lead to ASK1 activation (Gotoh and Cooper, J Biol Chem 273:17477-17482, 1998; Tobiume, et al., J Cell Physiol 191:95-104, 2002).
- There is also evidence that ASK1 promotes apoptosis in cells undergoing endoplasmic reticulum (ER) stress. The ER protein IRE1 forms a complex with ASK1 and a TNF receptor interacting protein TRAF2 in cells undergoing ER stress, and this leads to activation of the ASK1-JNK pathway. The apoptosis initiated by this pathway is reduced in cells that lack ASK1 (Nishitoh, et al., Genes Dev 16:1345-1355, 2002).
- This invention is based on the discovery of a new human protein kinase that is abundant in pancreatic islets of Langerhans, but is not expressed in most other tissues. This kinase, Apoptosis Signal Regulating Kinase Related Kinase (ASKRK), promotes cell death in pancreatic beta cells. Accordingly, the invention provides composition and methods of using such compositions to screen for inhibitors of ASKRK activity. Inhibitors of ASKRK can be used to modulate beta cell death and for the treatment of diabetes.
- Thus, in one aspect, the invention provides an isolated nucleic acid encoding a polypeptide having at least 90%, often at least 95%, identity to SEQ ID NO:2. Typically, the nucleic acid encodes a polypeptide comprising SEQ ID NO:2. In one embodiment, the polypeptide is encoded by a nucleic acid comprising the sequence set forth in SEQ ID NO:1
- In another aspect, the invention provides an isolated nucleic acid encoding a polypeptide comprising an amino acid sequence having at least 90% identity to SEQ ID NO:4. Often, the nucleic acid encodes a polypeptide comprising the amino acid sequence set forth in SEQ ID NO:4. In one embodiment, the nucleic acid comprises the sequence set forth in SEQ ID NO:3.
- In another aspect, the invention provides a method for identifying an agent for treating a diabetic or pre-diabetic individual, the method comprising the steps of: (i) contacting a candidate agent with a pancreatic or kidney cell that expresses a nucleic acid encoding a polypeptide having kinase activity that comprises at least 50 contiguous amino acids of SEQ ID NO:2; (ii) determining the activity of the polypeptide; and (iii) selecting an agent that inhibits the activity of the polypeptide, thereby identifying an agent for treating a diabetic or pre-diabetic individual. In some embodiments, the polypeptide comprises SEQ ID NO:2 or SEQ ID NO:4. Additionally, the polypeptide can be overexpressed relative to normal.
- The cell can be, e.g., a pancreatic cell from a diabetic animal.
- The some embodiments, the step of determining the activity of the polypeptide comprises determining the ability of the polypeptide to phosphorylate a substrate, determining the level of apoptosis, or determining the amount of protein present using an immunoassay.
- In other embodiments, the agent is an siRNA or an antisense RNA.
- In another aspect, the invention provides a method for identifying an agent for treating a diabetic or pre-diabetic individual, the method comprising the steps of: (i) contacting a candidate agent with a kidney or pancreatic cell that expresses a nucleic acid encoding a polypeptide having phosphorylating activity that comprises at least 50 contiguous amino acids of SEQ ID NO:2; (ii) determining the level of an RNA that encodes the polypeptide; and (ii) selecting an agent that inhibits the level of the RNA relative to normal, thereby identifying an agent for treating a diabetic or pre-diabetic individual. In some embodiments, the pancreatic cell may be from a diabetic animal. Often, the polypeptide comprises SEQ ID NO:2 or SEQ ID NO:4. The step of determining the level of an RNA can comprise an amplification reaction. In some embodiments, the agent is an siRNA or an antisense RNA.
- In some embodiments, the method further comprises administering the agent to a pancreatic beta cell population; determining the level of apoptosis in the population; and selecting a candidate agent that decreases the level of apoptosis.
- In another aspect, the invention provides a method for identifying an agent for treating a diabetic or pre-diabetic individual, the method comprising the steps of: (i) contacting a candidate agent with a polypeptide having phosphorylating activity that comprises at least 50 contiguous amino acids of SEQ ID NO:2; (ii) determining binding of the agent to the polypeptide; (iii) selecting an agent that binds to the polypeptide; (iv) administering the agent to population of pancreatic beta cells; (v) determining the level of apoptosis in the population relative to a control population of pancreatic beta cells; and (vi) selecting an agent that decreases apoptosis. Often, the polypeptide comprises SEQ ID NO:2 or SEQ ID NO:4. In one embodiment the step of determining binding of the agent to the polypeptide comprises determining the phosphorylating activity of the polypeptide.
- In another aspect, the invention provides a method of improving insulin response in a diabetic animal or a pre-diabetic animal, e.g., a diabetic or pre-diabetic human, the method comprising administering to the animal a therapeutically effective amount of an agent identified by the methods described herein. In some embodiments, the agent may be administered to pancreatic tissue.
- The invention also provides a method of introducing an expression cassette into a pancreatic cell, the method comprising, introducing into the cell an expression vector comprising a nucleic acid that, when expressed, inhibits the expression of a nucleic acid encoding a polypeptide having phosphorylating activity that comprises at least 50 contiguous amino acids of SEQ ID NO:2. Often, the polypeptide comprises SEQ ID NO:2. In some embodiments, the cell is introduced into a diabetic animal, typically a human.
-
FIG. 1 shows the results of a custom microarray analysis. Custom Affymetrix™ oligonucletide arrays were used to survey islet gene expression. Microarray probe set MBXMUS25681_at hybridizing to mouse ASKRK mRNA was called “Present” by the Affymetrix GeneChip™ analysis software in 4 independent mouse islet mRNA samples, 2 betaHC9 beta cell line samples and 1 kidney mRNA sample and absent in 13 other tissues examined. -
FIG. 2 shows an amino acid sequence alignment of mouse (partial coding; SEQ ID NO:5) and human (full coding; SEQ ID NO:6) ASKRK. -
FIG. 3 shows the results of a real-time PCR analysis. Taqman real-time polymerase chain reaction experiment using human tissue cDNA templates, including cDNA prepared from islets which had been treated or not treated with free fatty acids. The probe (300 nM) and primer (900 nM) set used was specific to hASKRK sequence downstream of the kinase domain. 18S RNA was used as an internal control. -
FIG. 4 shows the results of a transfection experiment to show ASKRK function. hASKRK expression increases MKK6 phosphorylating activity in fibroblasts. Mammalian expression constructs of hASK1ΔN, the kinase deficient mutant hASK1ΔN(K709M), hASKRK-H6M, the kinase deficient mutant hASKRK-H6M (K681M), hASKRK-H6, and the kinase deficient mutant hASKRK-H6 (K681M) in pcDNA3.1 or the empty vector were transfected into HEK293 cells. Forty-eight hours later the cells were lysed in RIPA buffer at 4° C. and cleared by centrifugation. 18 ng of each lysate was assayed for kinase activity using MKK6(inactive) (Upstate Biotechnology) as substrate ATP/Mg2+ (containing 1 mCi/ml 32P-γ-ATP) and Upstate Assay Dilution Buffer (ADB) to adjust each volume to 50 ml. Kinase assay was performed at 30 degrees with constant agitation for 30′. 20 μl 4× sample buffer was added to each tube to stop kinase assay. Samples were heated 95° C. for 10′ then fractionated by electrophoresis at 40 mA on 12% polyacrylamide gel. 50 ml of each lysate was also heated with 20 μl 4×SB and electrophoresed on 12% gel for Western blotting. Gels were transferred to membranes at 350 mA using semi-dry transfer technique. Kinase assay membrane was put with film for 2 hours at −80 degrees. Western blot membrane was blocked 3 hrs with 5% milk TBST, treated with rabbit anti-hASK2 antibody (1:2000) or rabbit-anti-hASK1 antibody (1:1000) in 5% milk TBST 1 hour, washed 3×15′ TBST, treated with goat-anti-rabbit-HRP (1:10,000) in 5% milk TBST for 45′, washed 3×15′ TBST, treated with Pierce SuperSignal (50:50) 2′ and put with film for 5-25′ exposures. -
FIG. 5 : Purified hASKRK-AN-flag phosphorylates MKK6 and is inhibited by stuarosporine. hASKRK-KC-flag (a construct containing the kinase domain and C-terminal domain of ASKRK with a C-terminal flag epitope) or hASKRK-DN-flag baculovirus was used to infect 108 sf21 cells two days before lysing the cells in 0.5% Triton X-100, 50 mM Tris-HCl pH 7.5, 0.1 mM EGTA, 15 mM DTT. The lysate was incubated with M2-Flag resin, washed and eluted with 500 ml of 400 mg/ml FLAG peptide in 0.1% Triton X-100, 50 mM Tris-HCl pH 7.5, 0.1 mM EGTA, 15 mM DTT. The kinase reactions were performed by taking a 30 μl aliquot of kinase eluate and adding 5 μl MKK6 (1.5 mg), 10 μl ATP (10 mCi gamma 32P ATP 4.5 mM ATP-MgCl2), and 5 μl Assay Dilution Buffer (500 mM Tris-HCl pH 7.5, 1 mM EGTA, 150 mM DTT). Staurosporine was added to the concentrations indicated. Reactions are incubated for 30 minutes at 30° C. with agitation at 5 min intervals. Reactions were stopped with SDS-gel sample buffer, fractionated by 10% SDS-PAGE and transferred to a PVDF membrane before exposure to a phosphor screen for detection. -
FIG. 6 . Ad-hASKRK-ΔN Infection induces cell death in HeLa cells. HeLa cells were seeded to 96-well plates (˜25,000/well) one day before viral infection and allowed to grow to approximately 70% confluency in regular DMEM medium. Cells were infected with the Ad-eGFP, Ad-ASKRK-AN or Ad-ASKRK-AN(K681M) virus at MOI of 0-200 in the viral infection medium (DMEM+5% heat-inactivated FCS) for 14-16 hours, and cultured for a second day in regular culture medium. The degree of cell death was measured by the XTT assay with the Cell Proliferation Kit-II (Boehringer Mannheim, Indianapolis, Ind.) 48-h after viral infection. -
FIG. 7 . Effects of Ad-ASKRK-ΔN infection SNP and cytokine-induced cell death in βHC9 cells. The insulin-secreting βHC9 cells were seeded and grown in 96-well plates one day before the viral infection with Ad-eGFP, Ad-ASKRK-AN or Ad-ASKRK-ΔN(K681M) virus at MOI of 50. After an overnight exposure to the viruses, cells were treated with sodium nitroprusside (SNP; 0.25˜0.5 mM), human IL-1β (1 ng/ml, Sigma) alone or IL-1 with human TNF-α (10 ng/ml, BD Bioscience) and mouse Interferon-γ (50 ng/ml, Sigma) in DMEM medium for 24 hours. Cell viability was measured by the XTT assay as described in the previous figure. - An ASKRK nucleic acid or polypeptide refers to polymorphic variants, alleles, mutants, and interspecies homologs and ASKRK domains thereof that: (1) have an amino acid sequence that has greater than about 65% amino acid sequence identity, 70%, 75%, 80%, 85%, 90%, preferably 91%, 92%, 93%, 94%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98% or 99% or greater amino acid sequence identity, preferably over a window of at least about 25, 50, 100, 200, 500, 1000, or more amino acids, to a sequence of SEQ ID NO:2 or SEQ ID NO4; (2) bind to antibodies raised against an immunogen comprising an amino acid sequence of SEQ ID NO:2 or SEQ ID NO:4 and conservatively modified variants thereof; (3) have at least 15 contiguous amino acids, more often, at least 20, 30, 40, 50 or 100 contiguous amino acids, of SEQ ID NO:2 or SEQ ID NO:4; (4) specifically hybridize (with a size of at least about 100, preferably at least about 500 or 1000 nucleotides) under stringent hybridization conditions to a sequence of SEQ ID NO:1 or SEQ ID NO:3 and conservatively modified variants thereof; (5) have a nucleic acid sequence that has greater than about 95%, preferably greater than about 96%, 97%, 98%, 99%, or higher nucleotide sequence identity, preferably over a region of at least about 50, 100, 200, 500, 1000, or more nucleotides, to SEQ ID NO:1 or SEQ ID NO:3; or (6) are amplified by primers that specifically hybridize under stringent conditions to SEQ ID NO:1 or SEQ ID NO:3. This term also refers to a domain of a ASKRK or a fusion protein comprising a domain of a ASKRK linked to a heterologous protein. An ASKRK polynucleotide or polypeptide sequence of the invention is typically from a mammal including, but not limited to, human, mouse, rat, hamster, cow, pig, horse, sheep, or any mammal. A “ASKRK polynucleotide” and a “ASKRK polypeptide,” are both either naturally occurring or recombinant.
- A “kinase domain” as used herein refers to the region of an ASKRK polypeptide that has catalytic activity, i.e., transfers phosphate from a high-energy phosphate donor molecule to the substrate.
- “Activity” of an ASKRK polypeptide refers to structural, regulatory, or biochemical functions of the polypeptide in its native cell or tissue. Activity of ASKRK include both direct activities and indirect activities. An exemplary direct activity is catalytic active, i.e., phosphorylation activity. Exemplary indirect activities are observed as a change in phenotype or response in a cell or tissue to a polypeptide's direct activity, e.g., apoptosis. Catalytic activity can be measured, e.g., by determining the amount of a substrate that is phosphorylated. Other activities, e.g., apoptoss, may also be assessed as a measure of ASKRK activity.
- “Predisposition for diabetes” occurs in a person when the person is at high risk for developing diabetes. A number of risk factors are known to those of skill in the art and include: genetic factors (e.g., carrying alleles that result in a higher occurrence of diabetes than in the average population or having parents or siblings with diabetes); overweight (e.g., body mass index (BMI) greater or equal to 25 kg/m2); habitual physical inactivity, race/ethnicity (e.g., African-American, Hispanic-American, Native Americans, Asian-Americans, Pacific Islanders); previously identified impaired fasting glucose or impaired glucose tolerance, hypertension (e.g., greater or equal to 140/90 mmHg in adults); HDL cholesterol less than or equal to 35 mg/dl; triglyceride levels greater or equal to 250 mg/dl; a history of gestational diabetes or delivery of a baby over nine pounds; and/or polycystic ovary syndrome. See, e.g., “Report of the Expert Committee on the Diagnosis and Classification of Diabetes Mellitus” and “Screening for Diabetes” Diabetes Care 25(1): S5-S24 (2002).
- A “non-diabetic individual” (also referred to herein as a “lean” individual), when used to compare with a sample from a patient, refers to an adult with a fasting blood glucose level less than 110 mg/dl or a 2 hour PG reading of 140 mg/dl. “Fasting” refers to no caloric intake for at least 8 hours. A “2 hour PG” refers to the level of blood glucose after challenging a patient to a glucose load containing the equivalent of 75 g anhydrous glucose dissolved in water. The overall test is generally referred to as an oral glucose tolerance test (OGTT). See, e.g., Diabetes Care, Supplement 2002, American Diabetes Association: Clinical Practice Recommendations 2002. The level of a polypeptide in a non-diabetic individual can be a reading from a single individual, but is typically a statistically relevant average from a group of non-diabetic individuals. The level of a polypeptide in a nondiabetic individual can be represented by a value, for example in a computer program.
- A “pre-diabetic individual,” when used to compare with a sample from a patient, refers to an adult with a fasting blood glucose level greater than 110 mg/dl but less than 126 mg/dl or a 2 hour PG reading of greater than 140 mg/dl but less than 200 mg/dl. A “diabetic individual,” when used to compare with a sample from a patient, refers to an adult with a fasting blood glucose level greater than 126 mg/dl or a 2 hour PG reading of greater than 200 mg/dl.
- An “antagonist” or “inhibitor” refers to an agent that binds to, partially or totally blocks stimulation, decreases, prevents, delays activation, inactivates, desensitizes, or down regulates the activity or expression of ASKRK.
- “Antibody” refers to a polypeptide substantially encoded by an immunoglobulin gene or immunoglobulin genes, or fragments thereof which specifically bind and recognize an analyte (antigen). The recognized immunoglobulin genes include the kappa, lambda, alpha, gamma, delta, epsilon and mu constant region genes, as well as the myriad immunoglobulin variable region genes. Light chains are classified as either kappa or lambda. Heavy chains are classified as gamma, mu, alpha, delta, or epsilon, which in turn define the immunoglobulin classes, IgG, IgM, IgA, IgD and IgE, respectively.
- An exemplary immunoglobulin (antibody) structural unit comprises a tetramer. Each tetramer is composed of two identical pairs of polypeptide chains, each pair having one “light” (about 25 kD) and one “heavy” chain (about 50-70 kD). The N-terminus of each chain defines a variable region of about 100 to 110 or more amino acids primarily responsible for antigen recognition. The terms variable light chain (VL) and variable heavy chain (VH) refer to these light and heavy chains respectively.
- Antibodies exist, e.g., as intact immunoglobulins or as a number of well-characterized fragments produced by digestion with various peptidases. Thus, for example, pepsin digests an antibody below the disulfide linkages in the hinge region to produce F(ab)′2, a dimer of Fab which itself is a light chain joined to VH-
C H1 by a disulfide bond. The F(ab)′2 may be reduced under mild conditions to break the disulfide linkage in the hinge region, thereby converting the F(ab)′2 dimer into an Fab′ monomer. The Fab′ monomer is essentially an Fab with part of the hinge region (see, Paul (Ed.) Fundamental Immunology, Third Edition, Raven Press, NY (1993)). While various antibody fragments are defined in terms of the digestion of an intact antibody, one of skill will appreciate that such fragments may be synthesized de novo either chemically or by utilizing recombinant DNA methodology. Thus, the term antibody, as used herein, also includes antibody fragments either produced by the modification of whole antibodies or those synthesized de novo using recombinant DNA methodologies (e.g., single chain Fv). - The terms “peptidomimetic” and “mimetic” refer to a synthetic chemical compound that has substantially the same structural and functional characteristics of the antagonists or agonists of the invention. Peptide analogs are commonly used in the pharmaceutical industry as non-peptide drugs with properties analogous to those of the template peptide. These types of non-peptide compound are termed “peptide mimetics” or “peptidomimetics” (Fauchere, J. Adv. Drug Res. 15:29 (1986); Veber and Freidinger TINS p. 392 (1985); and Evans et al. J. Med. Chem. 30:1229 (1987), which are incorporated herein by reference). Peptide mimetics that are structurally similar to therapeutically useful peptides may be used to produce an equivalent or enhanced therapeutic or prophylactic effect. Generally, peptidomimetics are structurally similar to a paradigm polypeptide (i.e., a polypeptide that has a biological or pharmacological activity), such as a polypeptide exemplified in this application, but have one or more peptide linkages optionally replaced by a linkage selected from the group consisting of, e.g., —CH2NH—, —CH2S—, —CH2—CH2-, —CH═CH— (cis and trans), —COCH2—, —CH(OH)CH2-, and —CH2SO—. The mimetic can be either entirely composed of synthetic, non-natural analogues of amino acids, or, is a chimeric molecule of partly natural peptide amino acids and partly non-natural analogs of amino acids. The mimetic can also incorporate any amount of natural amino acid conservative substitutions as long as such substitutions also do not substantially alter the mimetic's structure and/or activity. For example, a mimetic composition is within the scope of the invention if it is capable of carrying out the binding or other activities of an agonist or antagonist of a polypeptide of the invention.
- The term “gene” means the segment of DNA involved in producing a polypeptide chain; it includes regions preceding and following the coding region (leader and trailer) as well as intervening sequences (introns) between individual coding segments (exons).
- The term “isolated,” when applied to a nucleic acid or protein, denotes that the nucleic acid or protein is essentially free of other cellular components with which it is associated in the natural state. It is preferably in a homogeneous state although it can be in either a dry or aqueous solution. Purity and homogeneity are typically determined using analytical chemistry techniques such as polyacrylamide gel electrophoresis or high performance liquid chromatography. A protein that is the predominant species present in a preparation is substantially purified. In particular, an isolated gene is separated from open reading frames that flank the gene and encode a protein other than the gene of interest. The term “purified” denotes that a nucleic acid or protein gives rise to essentially one band in an electrophoretic gel. Particularly, it means that the nucleic acid or protein is at least 85% pure, more preferably at least 95% pure, and most preferably at least 99% pure.
- The term “nucleic acid” or “polynucleotide” refers to deoxyribonucleotides or ribonucleotides and polymers thereof in either single- or double-stranded form. Unless specifically limited, the term encompasses nucleic acids containing known analogues of natural nucleotides that have similar binding properties as the reference nucleic acid and are metabolized in a manner similar to naturally occurring nucleotides. Unless otherwise indicated, a particular nucleic acid sequence also implicitly encompasses conservatively modified variants thereof (e.g., degenerate codon substitutions) and complementary sequences as well as the sequence explicitly indicated. Specifically, degenerate codon substitutions may be achieved by generating sequences in which the third position of one or more selected (or all) codons is substituted with mixed-base and/or deoxyinosine residues (Batzer et al., Nucleic Acid Res. 19:5081 (1991); Ohtsuka et al., J. Biol. Chem. 260:2605-2608 (1985); and Cassol et al. (1992); Rossolini et al., Mol. Cell. Probes 8:91-98 (1994)). The term nucleic acid is used interchangeably with gene, cDNA, and mRNA encoded by a gene.
- “siRNA” refers to small interfering RNAs, that can cause post-transcriptional silencing of specific genes in cells, for example, mammalian cells (including human cells) and in the body, for example, mammalian bodies (including humans). The phenomenon of RNA interference is described and discussed in Bass, Nature 411: 428-29 (2001); Elbahir et al., Nature 411: 494-98 (2001); and Fire et al., Nature 391: 806-11 (1998); and WO 01/75164, where methods of making interfering RNA also are discussed. The siRNAs based upon the sequences and nucleic acids encoding the gene products disclosed herein typically have fewer than 100 base pairs and can be, e.g., about 30 bps or shorter, and can be made by approaches known in the art, including the use of complementary DNA strands or synthetic approaches. Exemplary siRNAs according to the invention can have up to 29 bps, 25 bps, 22 bps, 21 bps, 20 bps, 15 bps, 10 bps, 5 bps or any integer thereabout or therebetween. Tools for designing optimal inhibitory siRNAs include that available from DNA engine Inc. (Seattle, Wash.) and Ambion, Inc. (Austin, Tex.).
- The terms “polypeptide,” “peptide” and “protein” are used interchangeably herein to refer to a polymer of amino acid residues. The terms apply to amino acid polymers in which one or more amino acid residue is an artificial chemical mimetic of a corresponding naturally occurring amino acid, as well as to naturally occurring amino acid polymers and non-naturally occurring amino acid polymers. As used herein, the terms encompass amino acid chains of any length, including full-length proteins (i.e., antigens), wherein the amino acid residues are linked by covalent peptide bonds.
- The term “amino acid” refers to naturally occurring and synthetic amino acids, as well as amino acid analogs and amino acid mimetics that function in a manner similar to the naturally occurring amino acids. Naturally occurring amino acids are those encoded by the genetic code, as well as those amino acids that are later modified, e.g., hydroxyproline, γ-carboxyglutamate, and O-phosphoserine. Amino acid analogs refers to compounds that have the same basic chemical structure as a naturally occurring amino acid, i.e., an ae carbon that is bound to a hydrogen, a carboxyl group, an amino group, and an R group, e.g., homoserine, norleucine, methionine sulfoxide, methionine methyl sulfonium. Such analogs have modified R groups (e.g., norleucine) or modified peptide backbones, but retain the same basic chemical structure as a naturally occurring amino acid. “Amino acid mimetics” refers to chemical compounds that have a structure that is different from the general chemical structure of an amino acid, but which functions in a manner similar to a naturally occurring amino acid.
- Amino acids may be referred to herein by either the commonly known three letter symbols or by the one-letter symbols recommended by the IUPAC-IUB Biochemical Nomenclature Commission. Nucleotides, likewise, may be referred to by their commonly accepted single-letter codes.
- “Conservatively modified variants” applies to both amino acid and nucleic acid sequences. With respect to particular nucleic acid sequences, “conservatively modified variants” refers to those nucleic acids that encode identical or essentially identical amino acid sequences, or where the nucleic acid does not encode an amino acid sequence, to essentially identical sequences. Because of the degeneracy of the genetic code, a large number of functionally identical nucleic acids encode any given protein. For instance, the codons GCA, GCC, GCG and GCU all encode the amino acid alanine. Thus, at every position where an alanine is specified by a codon, the codon can be altered to any of the corresponding codons described without altering the encoded polypeptide. Such nucleic acid variations are “silent variations,” which are one species of conservatively modified variations. Every nucleic acid sequence herein that encodes a polypeptide also describes every possible silent variation of the nucleic acid. One of skill will recognize that each codon in a nucleic acid (except AUG, which is ordinarily the only codon for methionine, and TGG, which is ordinarily the only codon for tryptophan) can be modified to yield a functionally identical molecule. Accordingly, each silent variation of a nucleic acid that encodes a polypeptide is implicit in each described sequence.
- As to amino acid sequences, one of skill will recognize that individual substitutions, deletions or additions to a nucleic acid, peptide, polypeptide, or protein sequence which alters, adds or deletes a single amino acid or a small percentage of amino acids in the encoded sequence is a “conservatively modified variant” where the alteration results in the substitution of an amino acid with a chemically similar amino acid. Conservative substitution tables providing functionally similar amino acids are well known in the art. Such conservatively modified variants are in addition to and do not exclude polymorphic variants, interspecies homologs, and alleles of the invention.
- The following eight groups each contain amino acids that are conservative substitutions for one another:
- 2) Aspartic acid (D), Glutamic acid (E);
- (see, e.g., Creighton, Proteins (1984)).
- “Percentage of sequence identity” is determined by comparing two optimally aligned sequences over a comparison window, wherein the portion of the polynucleotide sequence in the comparison window may comprise additions or deletions (i.e., gaps) as compared to the reference sequence (e.g., a polypeptide of the invention), which does not comprise additions or deletions, for optimal alignment of the two sequences. The percentage is calculated by determining the number of positions at which the identical nucleic acid base or amino acid residue occurs in both sequences to yield the number of matched positions, dividing the number of matched positions by the total number of positions in the window of comparison and multiplying the result by 100 to yield the percentage of sequence identity.
- The terms “identical” or percent “identity,” in the context of two or more nucleic acids or polypeptide sequences, refer to two or more sequences or subsequences that are the same sequences are substantially identical if two sequences have a specified percentage of amino acid residues or nucleotides that are the same (i.e., 60% identity, optionally 65%, 70%, 75%, 80%, 85%, 90%, or 95% identity over a specified region, or, when not specified, over the entire sequence), when compared and aligned for maximum correspondence over a comparison window, or designated region as measured using one of the following sequence comparison algorithms or by manual alignment and visual inspection. The invention provides polypeptides or polynucleotides that are substantially identical to the polynucleotides or polypeptides, respectively, exemplified herein in SEQ ID NOs:1 and 2. This definition also refers to the complement of a test sequence. Optionally, the identity exists over a region that is at least about 50 nucleotides in length, or more preferably over a region that is 100 to 500 or 1000 or more nucleotides in length.
- For sequence comparison, typically one sequence acts as a reference sequence, to which test sequences are compared. When using a sequence comparison algorithm, test and reference sequences are entered into a computer, subsequence coordinates are designated, if necessary, and sequence algorithm program parameters are designated. Default program parameters can be used, or alternative parameters can be designated. The sequence comparison algorithm then calculates the percent sequence identities for the test sequences relative to the reference sequence, based on the program parameters.
- A “comparison window”, as used herein, includes reference to a segment of any one of the number of contiguous positions selected from the group consisting of from 20 to 600, usually about 50 to about 200, more usually about 100 to about 150 in which a sequence may be compared to a reference sequence of the same number of contiguous positions after the two sequences are optimally aligned. Methods of alignment of sequences for comparison are well known in the art. Optimal alignment of sequences for comparison can be conducted, e.g., by the local homology algorithm of Smith and Waterman (1970) Adv. Appl. Math. 2:482c, by the homology alignment algorithm of Needleman and Wunsch (1970) J. Mol. Biol. 48:443, by the search for similarity method of Pearson and Lipman (1988) Proc. Nat'l. Acad. Sci. USA 85:2444, by computerized implementations of these algorithms (GAP, BESTFIT, FASTA, and TFASTA in the Wisconsin Genetics Software Package, Genetics Computer Group, 575 Science Dr., Madison, Wis.), or by manual alignment and visual inspection (see, e.g., Ausubel et al., Current Protocols in Molecular Biology (1995 supplement)).
- Two examples of algorithms that are suitable for determining percent sequence identity and sequence similarity are the BLAST and BLAST 2.0 algorithms, which are described in Altschul et al. (1977) Nuc. Acids Res. 25:3389-3402, and Altschul et al. (1990) J. Mol. Biol. 215:403-410, respectively. Software for performing BLAST analyses is publicly available through the National Center for Biotechnology Information (at www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov). This algorithm involves first identifying high scoring sequence pairs (HSPs) by identifying short words of length W in the query sequence, which either match or satisfy some positive-valued threshold score T when aligned with a word of the same length in a database sequence. T is referred to as the neighborhood word score threshold (Altschul et al., supra). These initial neighborhood word hits act as seeds for initiating searches to find longer HSPs containing them. The word hits are extended in both directions along each sequence for as far as the cumulative alignment score can be increased. Cumulative scores are calculated using, for nucleotide sequences, the parameters M (reward score for a pair of matching residues; always >0) and N (penalty score for mismatching residues; always <0). For amino acid sequences, a scoring matrix is used to calculate the cumulative score. Extension of the word hits in each direction are halted when: the cumulative alignment score falls off by the quantity X from its maximum achieved value; the cumulative score goes to zero or below, due to the accumulation of one or more negative-scoring residue alignments; or the end of either sequence is reached. The BLAST algorithm parameters W, T, and X determine the sensitivity and speed of the alignment. The BLASTN program (for nucleotide sequences) uses as defaults a wordlength (W) of 11, an expectation (E) or 10, M=5, N=−4 and a comparison of both strands. For amino acid sequences, the BLASTP program uses as defaults a wordlength of 3, and expectation (E) of 10, and the BLOSUM62 scoring matrix (see Henikoff and Henikoff (1989) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 89:10915) alignments (B) of 50, expectation (E) of 10, M=5, N=−4, and a comparison of both strands. For purposes of this patent application, sequence comparison are made using BLAST with default parameters.
- The BLAST algorithm also performs a statistical analysis of the similarity between two sequences (see, e.g., Karlin and Altschul (1993) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 90:5873-5787). One measure of similarity provided by the BLAST algorithm is the smallest sum probability (P(N)), which provides an indication of the probability by which a match between two nucleotide or amino acid sequences would occur by chance. For example, a nucleic acid is considered similar to a reference sequence if the smallest sum probability in a comparison of the test nucleic acid to the reference nucleic acid is less than about 0.2, more preferably less than about 0.01, and most preferably less than about 0.001.
- An indication that two nucleic acid sequences or polypeptides are substantially identical is that the polypeptide encoded by the first nucleic acid is immunologically cross reactive with the antibodies raised against the polypeptide encoded by the second nucleic acid, as described below. Thus, a polypeptide is typically substantially identical to a second polypeptide, for example, where the two peptides differ only by conservative substitutions. Another indication that two nucleic acid sequences are substantially identical is that the two molecules or their complements hybridize to each other under stringent conditions, as described below. Yet another indication that two nucleic acid sequences are substantially identical is that the same primers can be used to amplify the sequence.
- The phrase “selectively (or specifically) hybridizes to” refers to the binding, duplexing, or hybridizing of a molecule only to a particular nucleotide sequence under stringent hybridization conditions when that sequence is present in a complex mixture (e.g., total cellular or library DNA or RNA).
- The phrase “stringent hybridization conditions” refers to conditions under which a probe will hybridize to its target subsequence, typically in a complex mixture of nucleic acid, but to no other sequences. Stringent conditions are sequence-dependent and will be different in different circumstances. Longer sequences hybridize specifically at higher temperatures. An extensive guide to the hybridization of nucleic acids is found in Tijssen, Techniques in Biochemistry and Molecular Biology—Hybridization with Nucleic Probes, “Overview of principles of hybridization and the strategy of nucleic acid assays” (1993). Generally, stringent conditions are selected to be about 5-10° C. lower than the thermal melting point (Tm) for the specific sequence at a defined ionic strength pH. The Tm is the temperature (under defined ionic strength, pH, and nucleic concentration) at which 50% of the probes complementary to the target hybridize to the target sequence at equilibrium (as the target sequences are present in excess, at Tm, 50% of the probes are occupied at equilibrium). Stringent conditions will be those in which the salt concentration is less than about 1.0 M sodium ion, typically about 0.01 to 1.0 M sodium ion concentration (or other salts) at pH 7.0 to 8.3 and the temperature is at least about 30° C. for short probes (e.g., 10 to 50 nucleotides) and at least about 60° C. for long probes (e.g., greater than 50 nucleotides). Stringent conditions may also be achieved with the addition of destabilizing agents such as formamide. For selective or specific hybridization, a positive signal is at least two times background, optionally 10 times background hybridization. Exemplary stringent hybridization conditions can be as following: 50% formamide, 5×SSC, and 1% SDS, incubating at 42° C., or 5×SSC, 1% SDS, incubating at 65° C., with wash in 0.2×SSC, and 0.1% SDS at 55° C., 60° C., or 65° C. Such washes can be performed for 5, 15, 30, 60, 120, or more minutes.
- Nucleic acids that do not hybridize to each other under stringent conditions are still substantially identical if the polypeptides that they encode are substantially identical. This occurs, for example, when a copy of a nucleic acid is created using the maximum codon degeneracy permitted by the genetic code. In such cases, the nucleic acids typically hybridize under moderately stringent hybridization conditions. Exemplary “moderately stringent hybridization conditions” include a hybridization in a buffer of 40% formamide, 1 M NaCl, 1% SDS at 37° C., and a wash in 1×SSC at 45° C. Such washes can be performed for 5, 15, 30, 60, 120, or more minutes. A positive hybridization is at least twice background. Those of ordinary skill will readily recognize that alternative hybridization and wash conditions can be utilized to provide conditions of similar stringency.
- The phrase “a nucleic acid sequence encoding” refers to a nucleic acid which contains sequence information for a structural RNA such as rRNA, a tRNA, or the primary amino acid sequence of a specific protein or peptide, or a binding site for a trans-acting regulatory agent. This phrase specifically encompasses degenerate codons (i.e., different codons which encode a single amino acid) of the native sequence or sequences that may be introduced to conform with codon preference in a specific host cell.
- The term “recombinant” when used with reference, e.g., to a cell, or nucleic acid, protein, or vector, indicates that the cell, nucleic acid, protein or vector, has been modified by the introduction of a heterologous nucleic acid or protein or the alteration of a native nucleic acid or protein, or that the cell is derived from a cell so modified. Thus, for example, recombinant cells express genes that are not found within the native (nonrecombinant) form of the cell or express native genes that are otherwise abnormally expressed, under-expressed or not expressed at all.
- The term “heterologous” when used with reference to portions of a nucleic acid indicates that the nucleic acid comprises two or more subsequences that are not found in the same relationship to each other in nature. For instance, the nucleic acid is typically recombinantly produced, having two or more sequences from unrelated genes arranged to make a new functional nucleic acid, e.g., a promoter from one source and a coding region from another source. Similarly, a heterologous protein indicates that the protein comprises two or more subsequences that are not found in the same relationship to each other in nature (e.g., a fusion protein).
- An “expression vector” is a nucleic acid construct, generated recombinantly or synthetically, with a series of specified nucleic acid elements that permit transcription of a particular nucleic acid in a host cell. The expression vector can be part of a plasmid, virus, or nucleic acid fragment. Typically, the expression vector includes a nucleic acid to be transcribed operably linked to a promoter.
- The phrase “specifically (or selectively) binds to an antibody” or “specifically (or selectively) immunoreactive with”, when referring to a protein or peptide, refers to a binding reaction which is determinative of the presence of the protein in the presence of a heterogeneous population of proteins and other biologics. Thus, under designated immunoassay conditions, the specified antibodies bind to a particular protein and do not bind in a significant amount to other proteins present in the sample. Specific binding to an antibody under such conditions may require an antibody that is selected for its specificity for a particular protein. For example, antibodies raised against a protein having an amino acid sequence encoded by any of the polynucleotides of the invention can be selected to obtain antibodies specifically immunoreactive with that protein and not with other proteins, except for polymorphic variants. A variety of immunoassay formats may be used to select antibodies specifically immunoreactive with a particular protein. For example, solid-phase ELISA immunoassays, Western blots, or immunohistochemistry are routinely used to select monoclonal antibodies specifically immunoreactive with a protein. See, Harlow and Lane Antibodies, A Laboratory Manual, Cold Spring Harbor Publications, NY (1988) for a description of immunoassay formats and conditions that can be used to determine specific immunoreactivity. Typically, a specific or selective reaction will be at least twice the background signal or noise and more typically more than 10 to 100 times background.
- “Inhibitors” or “modulators” of expression or of activity are used to refer to inhibitory molecules that decrease ASKRK activity or expression. Such modulators are identified using in vitro and in vivo assays for expression or activity. Modulators encompass e.g., antagonists, and their homologs and mimetics. Inhibitors are agents that, e.g., inhibit expression of ASKRK or bind to, partially or totally block stimulation, decrease, prevent, delay activation, inactivate, desensitize, or down regulate the activity of ASKRK. Modulators include naturally occurring and synthetic ligands, antagonists, small chemical molecules and the like. Assays for inhibitors, e.g., applying putative modulator compounds to cells expressing ASKRK and then determining the functional effects on activity, as described above. Samples or assays comprising a ASKRK polypeptide that are treated with a potential modulator are compared to control samples without the modulator to examine the extent of effect. Control samples (untreated with modulators) are assigned a relative activity value of 100%. Inhibition of a polypeptide of the invention is achieved when the polypeptide activity value relative to the control is about 80%, optionally 50% or 25, 10%, 5% or 1%.
- This invention is based on the discovery ASKRK plays a role in apoptosis of pancreatic beta cells. ASKRK is expressed predominantly in pancreatic beta cells. Thus, inhibitors of ASKRK expression or activity can be used to treat disorders relating to glucose metabolism, e.g., diabetes. Inhibition of ASKRK in diabetic or pre-diabetic individuals can, e.g., promote pancreatic beta cell viability. Modulation of the expression or activity of ASKRK can be beneficial in treating diabetic, pre-diabetic or obese insulin resistant, non-diabetic patients.
- In numerous embodiments of the invention, nucleic acids encoding ASKRK polypeptides will be isolated and cloned using recombinant methods. Such embodiments are used, e.g., to isolate polynucleotides comprising a sequence that is identical or substantially identical to SEQ ID NO:1 for protein expression or for the generation of variants, derivatives, or other ASKRK sequences. Recombinant methodology is also used to generate expression cassettes, to monitor gene expression, for the isolation or detection of sequences in different species, for diagnostic purposes in a patient, e.g., to detect mutations in an ASKRK polynucleotide or polypeptide, or to detect expression levels of ASKRK nucleic acids or polypeptides. In some embodiments, the ASKRK sequences encoding the polypeptides are operably linked to a heterologous promoter. In one embodiment, the ASKRK nucleic acids are from any mammal, including, in particular, e.g., a human, a mouse, a rat, etc.
- The recombinant methodology used in the invention is routine in the field of recombinant genetics. Basic texts disclosing the general methods include Sambrook & Russell, Molecular Cloning, A Laboratory Manual (3rd ed. 2001); Kriegler, Gene Transfer and Expression: A Laboratory Manual (1990); and Current Protocols in Molecular Biology (Ausubel et al., eds., 1994)).
- For nucleic acids, sizes are given in either kilobases (kb) or base pairs (bp). These are estimates derived from agarose or acrylamide gel electrophoresis, from sequenced nucleic acids, or from published DNA sequences. For proteins, sizes are given in kilodaltons (kDa) or amino acid residue numbers. Proteins sizes are estimated from gel electrophoresis, from sequenced proteins, from derived amino acid sequences, or from published protein sequences.
- Oligonucleotides that are not commercially available can be chemically synthesized according to the solid phase phosphoramidite triester method first described by Beaucage & Caruthers, Tetrahedron Letts. 22:1859-1862 (1981), using an automated synthesizer, as described in Van Devanter et. al., Nucleic Acids Res. 12:6159-6168 (1984). Purification of oligonucleotides is typically by either native acrylamide gel electrophoresis or by anion-exchange HPLC as described in Pearson & Reanier, J. Chrom. 255:137-149 (1983).
- The sequences of the cloned genes and synthetic oligonucleotides can be verified after cloning using, e.g., the chain termination method for sequencing double-stranded templates of Wallace et al., Gene 16:21-26 (1981).
- In general, nucleic acids encoding the ASKRK proteins are cloned from cDNA or genomic libraries. The particular sequences can be identified, e.g., by hybridizing with a probe, the sequence of which can be derived from the sequences disclosed herein, which provide a reference for PCR primers and defines suitable regions for isolating probes specific for ASKRK polynucleotides. Alternatively, where the sequence is cloned into an expression library, the expressed recombinant protein can be detected immunologically with antisera or purified antibodies made against ASKRK polypeptides, e.g., SEQ ID NO:2. Methods of constructing cDNA and genomic libraries are well known in the art (see, e.g., Sambrook & Russell, supra; and Ausubel et al., supra).
- An alternative method of isolating ASKRK nucleic acids and their homologs combines the use of synthetic oligonucleotide primers and amplification of an RNA or DNA template (see, e.g., U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,683,195 and 4,683,202; PCR Protocols: A Guide to Methods and Applications (Innis et al., eds, 1990)). Methods such as polymerase chain reaction (PCR) and ligase chain reaction (LCR) can be used to amplify ASKRK nucleic acid sequences directly from mRNA, from cDNA, from genomic libraries or cDNA libraries. Degenerate oligonucleotides can be designed to amplify ASKRK homologs using the sequences provided herein. Restriction endonuclease sites can be incorporated into the primers. Polymerase chain reaction or other in vitro amplification methods may also be useful, for example, to clone nucleic acid sequences that code for proteins to be expressed, to make nucleic acids to use as probes for detecting the presence of ASKRK-encoding mRNA in physiological samples, for nucleic acid sequencing, or for other purposes. Genes amplified by the PCR reaction can be purified from agarose gels and cloned into an appropriate vector.
- Synthetic oligonucleotides can be used to construct recombinant ASKRK genes for use as probes or for expression of protein. This method is performed using a series of overlapping oligonucleotides usually 40-120 bp in length, representing both the sense and nonsense strands of the gene. These DNA fragments are then annealed, ligated and cloned. Alternatively, amplification techniques can be used with precise primers to amplify a specific subsequence of the ASKRK nucleic acid. The specific subsequence is then ligated into an expression vector.
- The nucleic acid encoding ASKRK is typically cloned into intermediate vectors before transformation into prokaryotic or eukaryotic cells for replication and/or expression. These intermediate vectors are typically prokaryote vectors, e.g., plasmids, or shuttle vectors.
- Optionally, nucleic acids encoding chimeric proteins comprising ASKRKor domains thereof can be made according to standard techniques. For example, a domain comprising the active site can be covalently linked to a heterologous protein.
- To obtain high level expression of an ASKRK nucleic acid, such as a cDNAs encoding SEQ ID NO:2, one typically subclones a nucleic acid sequence encoding the protein of into an expression vector that contains a promoter, typically a heterologous promoter, to direct transcription, a transcription/translation terminator, and a ribosome binding site for translational initiation. Suitable promoters are well known in the art and described, e.g., in Sambrook & Russell and Ausubel et al. Bacterial expression systems for expressing the protein are available in, e.g., E. coli, Bacillus sp., and Salmonella (Palva et al., Gene 22:229-235 (1983); Mosbach et al., Nature 302:543-545 (1983). Standard bacterial expression vectors include plasmids such as pBR322 based plasmids, pSKF, pET23D, and fusion expression systems such as GST and LacZ. Epitope tags can also be added to recombinant proteins to provide convenient methods of isolation, e.g., c-myc. Kits for such expression systems are commercially available.
- Eukaryotic expression systems for mammalian cells, yeast, and insect cells are also well known in the art and commercially available. For example, exemplary vectors include SV40-based vectors, papilloma virus vectors, baculovirus vectors, and other vectors allowing expression of proteins under the direction of eukaryotic promoters, e.g., SV40 early promoter, SV40 later promoter, metallothionein promoter, murine mammary tumor virus promoter, Rous sarcoma virus promoter, or other promoters shown effective for expression in eukaryotic cells. In one embodiment, the eukaryotic expression vector is a viral vector, e.g., an adenoviral vector, an adeno-associated vector, or a retroviral vector.
- Any of many well known procedures for introducing foreign nucleotide sequences into host cells may be used. These include the use of calcium phosphate transfection, polybrene, protoplast fusion, electroporation, liposomes, microinjection, plasma vectors, viral vectors and any of the other well known methods for introducing cloned genomic DNA, cDNA, synthetic DNA or other foreign genetic material into a host cell (see, e.g., Russell & Sambrook, supra). It is only necessary that the particular genetic engineering procedure used be capable of successfully introducing at least one gene into the host cell capable of expressing ASKRK.
- After the expression vector is introduced into the cells, the transfected cells are cultured under conditions favoring expression of the protein, which is recovered from the culture using standard techniques identified below.
- Transgenic animals, including knockout transgenic animals, that include additional copies of ASKRK and/or altered or mutated ASKRK transgenes can also be generated. A “transgenic animal” refers to any animal (e.g. mouse, rat, pig, bird, or an amphibian), preferably a non-human mammal, in which one or more cells contain heterologous nucleic acid introduced using transgenic techniques well known in the art. The nucleic acid is introduced into the cell, directly or indirectly, by introduction into a precursor of the cell, by way of deliberate genetic manipulation, such as by microinjection or by infection with a recombinant virus. The term genetic manipulation does not include classical cross-breeding, or in vitro fertilization, but rather is directed to the introduction of a recombinant DNA molecule. This molecule may be integrated within a chromosome, or it may be extrachromosomally replicating DNA.
- In other embodiments, transgenic animals are produced in which expression of ASKRK is silenced. Gene knockout by homologous recombination is a method that is commonly used to generate transgenic animals. Transgenic mice can be derived using methodology known to those of skill in the art, see, e.g., Hogan et al., Manipulating the Mouse Embryo: A Laboratory Manual, (1988); Teratocarcinomas and Embryonic Stem Cells: A Practical Approach, Robertson, ed., (1987); and Capecchi et al., Science 244:1288 (1989).
- Either naturally occurring or recombinant ASKRK polypeptides can be purified for use in functional assays. Naturally occurring ASKRK polypeptides of the invention can be purified from any source (e.g., tissues of an organism expressing an ortholog). Recombinant polypeptides can be purified from any suitable expression system. ASKRK polypeptides are purified to substantial purity by standard techniques, including selective precipitation with such substances as ammonium sulfate; column chromatography, immunopurification methods, and others (see, e.g., Scopes, Protein Purification: Principles and Practice (1982); U.S. Pat. No. 4,673,641; Ausubel et al., supra; and Sambrook & Russell, supra).
- A number of procedures can be employed when recombinant polypeptides are being purified. For example, proteins having established molecular adhesion properties can be reversibly fused to a polypeptide of the invention. With the appropriate ligand, either protein can be selectively adsorbed to a purification column and then freed from the column in a relatively pure form. The fused protein may be then removed by enzymatic activity. Finally polypeptides can be purified using immunoaffinity columns.
- When recombinant proteins are expressed by the transformed bacteria in large amounts, typically after promoter induction, although expression can be constitutive, the proteins may form insoluble aggregates. There are several protocols that are suitable for purification of protein inclusion bodies. For example, purification of aggregate proteins (hereinafter referred to as inclusion bodies) typically involves the extraction, separation and/or purification of inclusion bodies by disruption of bacterial cells typically, but not limited to, by incubation in a buffer of about 100-150 μg/ml lysozyme and 0.1% Nonidet P40, a non-ionic detergent. The cell suspension can be ground using a Polytron grinder (Brinkman Instruments, Westbury, N.Y.). Alternatively, the cells can be sonicated on ice. Alternate methods of lysing bacteria are described in Ausubel et al. and Sambrook et al., both supra, and will be apparent to those of skill in the art.
- Alternatively, it is possible to purify proteins from bacteria periplasm. Where the protein is exported into the periplasm of the bacteria, the periplasmic fraction of the bacteria can be isolated by cold osmotic shock in addition to other methods known to those of skill in the art (see, Ausubel et al., supra).
- Proteins can also be purified from eukaryotic gene expression systems as described in, e.g., Fernandez and Hoeffler, Gene Expression Systems (1999). In some embodiments, baculovirus expression systems are used to isolate proteins of the invention. Recombinant baculoviruses are generally generated by replacing the polyhedrin coding sequence of a baculovirus with a gene to be expressed (e.g., encoding a polypeptide of the invention). Viruses lacking the polyhedrin gene have a unique plaque morphology making them easy to recognize. In some embodiments, a recombinant baculovirus is generated by first cloning a polynucleotide of interest into a transfer vector (e.g., a pUC based vector) such that the polynucleotide is operably linked to a polyhedrin promoter. The transfer vector is transfected with wildtype DNA into an insect cell (e.g., Sf9, Sf21 or BT1-TN-5B1-4 cells), resulting in homologous recombination and replacement of the polyhedrin gene in the wildtype viral DNA with the polynucleotide of interest. Virus can then be generated and plaque purified. Protein expression results upon viral infection of insect cells. Expressed proteins can be harvested from cell supernatant if secreted, or from cell lysates if intracellular. See, e.g., Ausubel et al. and Fernandez and Hoeffler, supra.
- Proteins are purified using standard techniques including, for example, an initial salt fractionation. Other methods that rely on solubility of proteins, such as cold ethanol precipitation, are well known to those of skill in the art and can be used to fractionate complex protein mixtures.
- Proteins may also be separated based on a calculated molecular weight using techniques such as ultrafiltration and size separation on a column. The proteins of interest can also be separated from other proteins on the basis of their size, net surface charge, hydrophobicity and affinity for ligands. In addition, antibodies raised against proteins can be conjugated to column matrices and the proteins immunopurified. All of these methods are well known in the art.
- Immunoaffinity chromatography using antibodies raised to a variety of affinity tags such as hemagglutinin (HA), FLAG, Xpress, Myc, hexahistidine (His) (SEQ ID NO:7), glutathione S transferase (GST) and the like can be used to purify polypeptides. The His tag will also act as a chelating agent for certain metals (e.g., Ni) and thus the metals can also be used to purify His-containing polypeptides. After purification, the tag is optionally removed by specific proteolytic cleavage.
- Those of skill in the art will recognize that detection of expression of ASKRK polynucleotides and polypeptides has many uses. For example, as discussed herein, detection of levels of polynucleotides and polypeptides of the invention in a patient can be useful for diagnosing diabetes or a predisposition for at least some of the pathological effects of diabetes. Moreover, detection of gene expression is useful to identify modulators, e.g., inhibitors, of expression of ASKRK polynucleotides and polypeptides.
- Gene expression can be analyzed by techniques known in the art, e.g., reverse transcription and amplification of mRNA, isolation of total RNA or poly A+ RNA, northern blotting, dot blotting, in situ hybridization, RNase protection, probing DNA microchip arrays, and the like, as further described below.
- A variety of methods of specific DNA and RNA measurement that use nucleic acid hybridization techniques are known to those of skill in the art (see, Sambrook, supra). Some methods involve an electrophoretic separation (e.g., Southern blot for detecting DNA, and Northern blot for detecting RNA), but measurement of DNA and RNA can also be carried out in the absence of electrophoretic separation (e.g., by dot blot). Southern blot of genomic DNA (e.g., from a human) can be used for screening for restriction fragment length polymorphism (RFLP) to detect the presence of a genetic disorder affecting a polypeptide of the invention.
- The selection of a nucleic acid hybridization format is not critical. A variety of nucleic acid hybridization formats are known to those skilled in the art. For example, common formats include sandwich assays and competition or displacement assays. Hybridization techniques are generally described in Hames and Higgins Nucleic Acid Hybridization, A Practical Approach, IRL Press (1985); Gall and Pardue, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A., 63:378-383 (1969); and John et al. Nature, 223:582-587 (1969).
- Detection of a hybridization complex may require the binding of a signal-generating complex to a duplex of target and probe polynucleotides or nucleic acids. Typically, such binding occurs through ligand and anti-ligand interactions as between a ligand-conjugated probe and an anti-ligand conjugated with a signal. The binding of the signal generation complex is also readily amenable to accelerations by exposure to ultrasonic energy.
- The label may also allow indirect detection of the hybridization complex. For example, where the label is a hapten or antigen, the sample can be detected by using antibodies. In these systems, a signal is generated by attaching fluorescent or enzyme molecules to the antibodies or in some cases, by attachment to a radioactive label (see, e.g., Tijssen, “Practice and Theory of Enzyme Immunoassays,” Laboratory Techniques in Biochemistry and Molecular Biology, Burdon and van Knippenberg Eds., Elsevier (1985), pp. 9-20).
- The probes are typically labeled either directly, as with isotopes, chromophores, lumiphores, chromogens, or indirectly, such as with biotin, to which a streptavidin complex may later bind. Thus, the detectable labels used in the assays of the present invention can be primary labels (where the label comprises an element that is detected directly or that produces a directly detectable element) or secondary labels (where the detected label binds to a primary label, e.g., as is common in immunological labeling). Typically, labeled signal nucleic acids are used to detect hybridization. Complementary nucleic acids or signal nucleic acids may be labeled by any one of several methods typically used to detect the presence of hybridized polynucleotides. The most common method of detection is the use of autoradiography with 3H, 125I, 35S, 14C, or 32P-labeled probes or the like.
- Other labels include, e.g., ligands that bind to labeled antibodies, fluorophores, chemiluminescent agents, enzymes, and antibodies that can serve as specific binding pair members for a labeled ligand. An introduction to labels, labeling procedures and detection of labels is found in Polak and Van Noorden Introduction to Immunocytochemistry, 2nd ed., Springer Verlag, NY (1997); and in Haugland Handbook of Fluorescent Probes and Research Chemicals, a combined handbook and catalogue Published by Molecular Probes, Inc. (1996).
- In general, a detector that monitors a particular probe or probe combination is used to detect the detection reagent label. Typical detectors include spectrophotometers, phototubes and photodiodes, microscopes, scintillation counters, cameras, film and the like, as well as combinations thereof. Examples of suitable detectors are widely available from a variety of commercial sources known to persons of skill in the art. Commonly, an optical image of a substrate comprising bound labeling moieties is digitized for subsequent computer analysis.
- The amount of, for example, an ASKRK RNA is measured by quantifying the amount of label fixed to the solid support by binding of the detection reagent. Typically, the presence of a modulator during incubation will increase or decrease the amount of label fixed to the solid support relative to a control incubation that does not comprise the modulator, or as compared to a baseline established for a particular reaction type. Means of detecting and quantifying labels are well known to those of skill in the art.
- In some embodiments, the target nucleic acid or the probe is immobilized on a solid support. Solid supports suitable for use in the assays of the invention are known to those of skill in the art. As used herein, a solid support is a matrix of material in a substantially fixed arrangement.
- A variety of automated solid-phase assay techniques are also appropriate. For instance, very large scale immobilized polymer arrays (VLSIPS™), i.e. Gene Chips or microarrays, available from Affymetrix, Inc. in Santa Clara, Calif. can be used to detect changes in expression levels of a plurality of genes involved in the same regulatory pathways simultaneously. See, Tijssen, supra., Fodor et al. (1991) Science, 251: 767-777; Sheldon et al. (1993) Clinical Chemistry 39(4): 718-719, and Kozal et al. (1996) Nature Medicine 2(7): 753-759. Similarly, spotted cDNA arrays (arrays of cDNA sequences bound to nylon, glass or another solid support) can also be used to monitor expression of a plurality of genes.
- Typically, the array elements are organized in an ordered fashion so that each element is present at a specified location on the substrate. Because the array elements are at specified locations on the substrate, the hybridization patterns and intensities (which together create a unique expression profile) can be interpreted in terms of expression levels of particular genes and can be correlated with a particular disease or condition or treatment. See, e.g., Schena et al., Science 270: 467-470 (1995)) and (Lockhart et al., Nature Biotech. 14: 1675-1680 (1996)).
- Hybridization specificity can be evaluated by comparing the hybridization of specificity-control polynucleotide sequences to specificity-control polynucleotide probes that are added to a sample in a known amount. The specificity-control target polynucleotides may have one or more sequence mismatches compared with the corresponding polynucleotide sequences. In this manner, whether only complementary target polynucleotides are hybridizing to the polynucleotide sequences or whether mismatched hybrid duplexes are forming is determined.
- Hybridization reactions can be performed in absolute or differential hybridization formats. In the absolute hybridization format, polynucleotide probes from one sample are hybridized to the sequences in a microarray format and signals detected after hybridization complex formation correlate to polynucleotide probe levels in a sample. In the differential hybridization format, the differential expression of a set of genes in two biological samples is analyzed. For differential hybridization, polynucleotide probes from both biological samples are prepared and labeled with different labeling moieties. A mixture of the two labeled polynucleotide probes is added to a microarray. The microarray is then examined under conditions in which the emissions from the two different labels are individually detectable. Sequences in the microarray that are hybridized to substantially equal numbers of polynucleotide probes derived from both biological samples give a distinct combined fluorescence (Shalon et al. PCT publication WO95/35505). In some embodiments, the labels are fluorescent labels with distinguishable emission spectra, such as Cy3 and Cy5 fluorophores.
- After hybridization, the microarray is washed to remove nonhybridized nucleic acids and complex formation between the hybridizable array elements and the polynucleotide probes is detected. Methods for detecting complex formation are well known to those skilled in the art. In some embodiments, the polynucleotide probes are labeled with a fluorescent label and measurement of levels and patterns of fluorescence indicative of complex formation is accomplished by fluorescence microscopy, such as confocal fluorescence microscopy.
- In a differential hybridization experiment, polynucleotide probes from two or more different biological samples are labeled with two or more different fluorescent labels with different emission wavelengths. Fluorescent signals are detected separately with different photomultipliers set to detect specific wavelengths. The relative abundances/expression levels of the polynucleotide probes in two or more samples are obtained.
- Typically, microarray fluorescence intensities can be normalized to take into account variations in hybridization intensities when more than one microarray is used under similar test conditions. In some embodiments, individual polynucleotide probe/target complex hybridization intensities are normalized using the intensities derived from internal normalization controls contained on each microarray.
- Detection of nucleic acids can also be accomplished, for example, by using a labeled detection moiety that binds specifically to duplex nucleic acids (e.g., an antibody that is specific for RNA-DNA duplexes). One example uses an antibody that recognizes DNA-RNA heteroduplexes in which the antibody is linked to an enzyme (typically by recombinant or covalent chemical bonding). The antibody is detected when the enzyme reacts with its substrate, producing a detectable product. Coutlee et al. (1989) Analytical Biochemistry 181:153-162; Bogulavski (1986) et al. J. Immunol. Methods 89:123-130; Prooijen-Knegt (1982) Exp. Cell Res. 141:397-407; Rudkin (1976) Nature 265:472-473, Stollar (1970) PNAS 65:993-1000; Ballard (1982) Mol. Immunol. 19:793-799; Pisetsky and Caster (1982) Mol. Immunol. 19:645-650; Viscidi et al. (1988) J. Clin. Microbial. 41:199-209; and Kiney et al. (1989) J. Clin. Microbiol. 27:6-12 describe antibodies to RNA duplexes, including homo and heteroduplexes. Kits comprising antibodies specific for DNA:RNA hybrids are available, e.g., from Digene Diagnostics, Inc. (Beltsville, Md.).
- In addition to available antibodies, one of skill in the art can easily make antibodies specific for nucleic acid duplexes using existing techniques, or modify those antibodies that are commercially or publicly available. In addition to the art referenced above, general methods for producing polyclonal and monoclonal antibodies are known to those of skill in the art (see, e.g., Paul (ed) Fundamental Immunology, Third Edition Raven Press, Ltd., NY (1993); Coligan Current Protocols in Immunology Wiley/Greene, NY (1991); Harlow and Lane Antibodies: A Laboratory Manual Cold Spring Harbor Press, NY (1989); Stites et al. (eds.) Basic and Clinical Immunology (4th ed.) Lange Medical Publications, Los Altos, Calif., and references cited therein; Goding Monoclonal Antibodies: Principles and Practice (2d ed.) Academic Press, New York, N.Y., (1986); and Kohler and Milstein Nature 256: 495-497 (1975)). Other suitable techniques for antibody preparation include selection of libraries of recombinant antibodies in phage or similar vectors (see, Huse et al. Science 246:1275-1281 (1989); and Ward et al. Nature 341:544-546 (1989)). Specific monoclonal and polyclonal antibodies and antisera will usually bind with a KD of at least about 0.1 μM, preferably at least about 0.01 μM or better, and most typically and preferably, 0.001 μM or better.
- The ASKRK nucleic acids used in this invention can be either positive or negative probes. Positive probes bind to their targets and the presence of duplex formation is evidence of the presence of the target. Negative probes fail to bind to the suspect target and the absence of duplex formation is evidence of the presence of the target. For example, the use of a wild type specific nucleic acid probe or PCR primers may serve as a negative probe in an assay sample where only the nucleotide sequence of interest is present.
- The sensitivity of the hybridization assays may be enhanced through use of a nucleic acid amplification system that multiplies the target nucleic acid being detected. Examples of such systems include the polymerase chain reaction (PCR) system and the ligase chain reaction (LCR) system. Other methods recently described in the art are the nucleic acid sequence based amplification (NASBA, Cangene, Mississauga, Ontario) and Q Beta Replicase systems. These systems can be used to directly identify mutants where the PCR or LCR primers are designed to be extended or ligated only when a selected sequence is present. Alternatively, the selected sequences can be generally amplified using, for example, nonspecific PCR primers and the amplified target region later probed for a specific sequence indicative of a mutation. It is understood that various detection probes, including Taqman and molecular beacon probes can be used to monitor amplification reaction products, e.g., in real time.
- An alternative means for determining the level of expression of the nucleic acids of the present invention is in situ hybridization. In situ hybridization assays are well known and are generally described in Angerer et al., Methods Enzymol. 152:649-660 (1987). In an in situ hybridization assay, cells, preferentially human cells from the cerebellum or the hippocampus, are fixed to a solid support, typically a glass slide. If DNA is to be probed, the cells are denatured with heat or alkali. The cells are then contacted with a hybridization solution at a moderate temperature to permit annealing of specific probes that are labeled. The probes are preferably labeled with radioisotopes or fluorescent reporters.
- Single nucleotide polymorphism (SNP) analysis is also useful for detecting differences between ASKRK alleles. SNPs linked to genes encoding polypeptides of the invention are useful, for instance, for diagnosis of diabetes or a predisposition to diabetes whose occurrence is linked to the gene sequences of the invention. For example, if an individual carries at least one SNP linked to a disease-associated allele of the gene sequences of the invention, the individual is likely predisposed for one or more of those diseases. If the individual is homozygous for a disease-linked SNP, the individual is particularly predisposed for occurrence of that disease (e.g., diabetes). In some embodiments, the SNP associated with the gene sequences of the invention is located within 300,000; 200,000; 100,000; 75,000; 50,000; or 10,000 base pairs from the gene sequence.
- Various real-time PCR methods including, e.g., Taqman or molecular beacon-based assays (e.g., U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,210,015; 5,487,972; Tyagi et al., Nature Biotechnology 14:303 (1996); and PCT WO 95/13399 are useful to monitor for the presence of absence of a SNP. Additional SNP detection methods include, e.g., DNA sequencing, sequencing by hybridization, dot blotting, oligonucleotide array (DNA Chip) hybridization analysis, or are described in, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 6,177,249; Landegren et al., Genome Research, 8:769-776 (1998); Botstein et al., Am J Human Genetics 32:314-331 (1980); Meyers et al., Methods in Enzymology 155:501-527 (1987); Keen et al., Trends in Genetics 7:5 (1991); Myers et al., Science 230:1242-1246 (1985); and Kwok et al., Genomics 23:138-144 (1994).
- In addition to the detection of ASKRK polynucleotides and gene expression using nucleic acid hybridization technology, one can also use immunoassays to detect ASKRK polypeptides. Immunoassays can be used to qualitatively or quantitatively analyze polypeptides of the invention. A general overview of the applicable technology can be found, e.g., in Harlow & Lane, Antibodies: A Laboratory Manual (1988) and Harlow & Lane, Using Antibodies (1999).
- Methods for producing polyclonal and monoclonal antibodies that react specifically with an ASKRK protein or other immunogen are known to those of skill in the art (see, e.g., Coligan, supra; and Harlow and Lane, supra; Stites et al., supra and references cited therein; Goding, supra; and Kohler and Milstein Nature, 256:495-497 (1975)). Such techniques include antibody preparation by selection of antibodies from libraries of recombinant antibodies in phage or similar vectors (see, Huse et al., supra; and Ward et al., supra). For example, in order to produce antisera for use in an immunoassay, the protein of interest or an antigenic fragment thereof, is isolated as described herein. For example, a recombinant ASKRK protein is produced in a transformed cell line. An inbred strain of mice or rabbits is immunized with the protein using a standard adjuvant, such as Freund's adjuvant, and a standard immunization protocol. Alternatively, a synthetic peptide derived from the ASKRK sequences disclosed herein is conjugated to a carrier protein and used as an immunogen.
- Polyclonal sera are collected and titered against the immunogen in an immunoassay, for example, a solid phase immunoassay with the immunogen immobilized on a solid support. Polyclonal antisera with a titer of 104 or greater are selected and tested for their crossreactivity against proteins other than the polypeptides of the invention or even other homologous proteins from other organisms, using a competitive binding immunoassay. Specific monoclonal and polyclonal antibodies and antisera will usually bind with a KD of at least about 0.1 mM, more usually at least about 1 μM, preferably at least about 0.1 μM or better, and most preferably, 0.01 μM or better.
- Recombinant protein is the preferred immunogen for the production of monoclonal or polyclonal antibodies. Naturally occurring protein may also be used either in pure or impure form. Synthetic peptides made using the protein sequences described herein may also be used as an immunogen for the production of antibodies to the protein. Recombinant protein can be expressed in eukaryotic or prokaryotic cells and purified as generally described supra. The product is then injected into an animal capable of producing antibodies. Either monoclonal or polyclonal antibodies may be generated for subsequent use in immunoassays to measure the protein.
- Methods of production of polyclonal antibodies are known to those of skill in the art. In brief, an immunogen, preferably a purified protein, is mixed with an adjuvant and animals are immunized. The animal's immune response to the immunogen preparation is monitored by taking test bleeds and determining the titer of reactivity to polypeptides of the invention. When appropriately high titers of antibody to the immunogen are obtained, blood is collected from the animal and antisera are prepared. Further fractionation of the antisera to enrich for antibodies reactive to the protein can be done if desired (see, Harlow and Lane, supra).
- Monoclonal antibodies may be obtained using various techniques familiar to those of skill in the art. Typically, spleen cells from an animal immunized with a desired antigen are immortalized, commonly by fusion with a myeloma cell (see, Kohler and Milstein, Eur. J. Immunol. 6:511-519 (1976)). Alternative methods of immortalization include, e.g., transformation with Epstein Barr Virus, oncogenes, or retroviruses, or other methods well known in the art. Colonies arising from single immortalized cells are screened for production of antibodies of the desired specificity and affinity for the antigen, and yield of the monoclonal antibodies produced by such cells may be enhanced by various techniques, including injection into the peritoneal cavity of a vertebrate host. Alternatively, one may isolate DNA sequences that encode a monoclonal antibody or a binding fragment thereof by screening a DNA library from human B cells according to the general protocol outlined by Huse et al., supra.
- Once target immunogen-specific antibodies are available, the immunogen can be measured by a variety of immunoassay methods with qualitative and quantitative results available to the clinician. For a review of immunological and immunoassay procedures in general see, Stites, supra. Moreover, the immunoassays of the present invention can be performed in any of several configurations, which are reviewed extensively in Maggio Enzyme Immunoassay, CRC Press, Boca Raton, Fla. (1980); Tijssen, supra; and Harlow and Lane, supra.
- Immunoassays to measure target proteins in a human sample may use a polyclonal antiserum that was raised to full-length polypeptides of the invention or a fragment thereof. This antiserum is selected to have low cross-reactivity against other proteins and any such cross-reactivity is removed by immunoabsorption prior to use in the immunoassay.
- In some embodiments, a protein of interest is detected and/or quantified using any of a number of well-known immunological binding assays (see, e.g., U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,366,241; 4,376,110; 4,517,288; and 4,837,168). For a review of the general immunoassays, see also Asai Methods in Cell Biology Volume 37: Antibodies in Cell Biology, Academic Press, Inc. NY (1993); Stites, supra. Immunological binding assays (or immunoassays) typically utilize a “capture agent” to specifically bind to and often immobilize the analyte (e.g., full-length polypeptides of the present invention, or antigenic subsequences thereof). The capture agent is a moiety that specifically binds to the analyte. The antibody may be produced by any of a number of means well known to those of skill in the art and as described above.
- Immunoassays also often utilize a labeling agent to bind specifically to and label the binding complex formed by the capture agent and the analyte. The labeling agent may itself be one of the moieties comprising the antibody/analyte complex. Alternatively, the labeling agent may be a third moiety, such as another antibody, that specifically binds to the antibody/protein complex.
- In a preferred embodiment, the labeling agent is a second antibody bearing a label. Alternatively, the second antibody may lack a label, but it may, in turn, be bound by a labeled third antibody specific to antibodies of the species from which the second antibody is derived. The second antibody can be modified with a detectable moiety, such as biotin, to which a third labeled molecule can specifically bind, such as enzyme-labeled streptavidin.
- Other proteins capable of specifically binding immunoglobulin constant regions, such as protein A or protein G, can also be used as the label agents. These proteins are normal constituents of the cell walls of streptococcal bacteria. They exhibit a strong non-immunogenic reactivity with immunoglobulin constant regions from a variety of species (see, generally, Kronval, et al. J. Immunol., 111:1401-1406 (1973); and Akerstrom, et al. J. Immunol., 135:2589-2542 (1985)).
- Throughout the assays, incubation and/or washing steps may be required after each combination of reagents. Incubation steps can vary from about 5 seconds to several hours, preferably from about 5 minutes to about 24 hours. The incubation time will depend upon the assay format, analyte, volume of solution, concentrations, and the like. Usually, the assays will be carried out at ambient temperature, although they can be conducted over a range of temperatures, such as 10° C. to 40° C.
- Immunoassays for detecting ASKRK proteins or other analytes of interest from tissue samples may be either competitive or noncompetitive. Noncompetitive immunoassays are assays in which the amount of captured protein or analyte is directly measured. In one preferred “sandwich” assay, for example, the capture agent (e.g., antibodies specific for the polypeptides of the invention) can be bound directly to a solid substrate where it is immobilized. These immobilized antibodies then capture the polypeptide present in the test sample. The polypeptide of the invention thus immobilized is then bound by a labeling agent, such as a second labelled antibody specific for the polypeptide. Alternatively, the second antibody may lack a label, but it may, in turn, be bound by a labeled third antibody specific to antibodies of the species from which the second antibody is derived. The second can be modified with a detectable moiety, such as biotin, to which a third labeled molecule can specifically bind, such as enzyme-labeled streptavidin.
- In some embodiments, western blot (immunoblot) analysis is used to detect and quantify the presence of a polypeptide of the invention in the sample. The technique generally comprises separating sample proteins by gel electrophoresis, transferring the separated proteins to a suitable solid support and incubating the sample with the antibodies that specifically bind the protein of interest. These antibodies may be directly labeled or alternatively may be subsequently detected using labeled antibodies (e.g., labeled sheep anti-mouse antibodies) that specifically bind to the antibodies against the protein of interest.
- Other assay formats include liposome immunoassays (LIA), which use liposomes designed to bind specific molecules (e.g., antibodies) and release encapsulated reagents or markers. The released chemicals are then detected according to standard techniques (see, Monroe et al. (1986) Amer. Clin. Prod. Rev. 5:34-41).
- In competitive assays, the amount of protein or analyte present in the sample is measured indirectly by measuring the amount of an added (exogenous) protein or analyte displaced (or competed away) from a specific capture agent (e.g., antibodies specific for a polypeptide of the invention) by the protein or analyte present in the sample. The amount of immunogen bound to the antibody is inversely proportional to the concentration of immunogen present in the sample. In a particularly preferred embodiment, the antibody is immobilized on a solid substrate. The amount of analyte may be detected by providing a labeled analyte molecule. It is understood that labels can include, e.g., radioactive labels as well as peptide or other tags that can be recognized by detection reagents such as antibodies.
- Immunoassays in the competitive binding format can be used for cross-reactivity determinations. For example, the protein encoded by the sequences described herein can be immobilized on a solid support. Proteins are added to the assay and compete with the binding of the antisera to the immobilized antigen. The ability of the above proteins to compete with the binding of the antisera to the immobilized protein is compared to that of the protein encoded by any of the sequences described herein. The percent cross-reactivity for the above proteins is calculated, using standard calculations. Those antisera with less than 10% cross-reactivity with each of the proteins listed above are selected and pooled. The cross-reacting antibodies are optionally removed from the pooled antisera by immunoabsorption with the considered proteins, e.g., distantly related homologs.
- The immunoabsorbed and pooled antisera are then used in a competitive binding immunoassay as described above to compare a second protein, thought to be perhaps a protein of the present invention, to the immunogen protein. In order to make this comparison, the two proteins are each assayed at a wide range of concentrations and the amount of each protein required to inhibit 50% of the binding of the antisera to the immobilized protein is determined. If the amount of the second protein required is less than 10 times the amount of the protein partially encoded by a sequence herein that is required, then the second protein is said to specifically bind to an antibody generated to an immunogen consisting of the target protein.
- The particular label or detectable group used in various assays is not a critical aspect of the invention, as long as it does not significantly interfere with the specific binding of the antibody used in the assay. The detectable group can be any material having a detectable physical or chemical property. Such detectable labels have been well-developed in the field of immunoassays and, in general, most labels useful in such methods can be applied to the present invention. Thus, a label is any composition detectable by spectroscopic, photochemical, biochemical, immunochemical, electrical, optical or chemical means. Useful labels in the present invention include magnetic beads (e.g., Dynabeads™), fluorescent dyes (e.g., fluorescein isothiocyanate, Texas red, rhodamine, and the like), radiolabels (e.g., 3H, 125I, 35s, 14C, or 32P), enzymes (e.g., horse radish peroxidase, alkaline phosphatase and others commonly used in an ELISA), and calorimetric labels such as colloidal gold or colored glass or plastic (e.g., polystyrene, polypropylene, latex, etc.) beads.
- The label may be coupled directly or indirectly to the desired component of the assay according to methods well known in the art. As indicated above, a wide variety of labels may be used, with the choice of label depending on the sensitivity required, the ease of conjugation with the compound, stability requirements, available instrumentation, and disposal provisions.
- Non-radioactive labels are often attached by indirect means. The molecules can also be conjugated directly to signal generating compounds, e.g., by conjugation with an enzyme or fluorescent compound. A variety of enzymes and fluorescent compounds can be used with the methods of the present invention and are well-known to those of skill in the art (for a review of various labeling or signal producing systems which may be used, see, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 4,391,904).
- Means of detecting labels are well known to those of skill in the art. Thus, for example, where the label is a radioactive label, means for detection include a scintillation counter or photographic film as in autoradiography. Where the label is a fluorescent label, it may be detected by exciting the fluorochrome with the appropriate wavelength of light and detecting the resulting fluorescence. The fluorescence may be detected visually, by means of photographic film, by the use of electronic detectors such as charge coupled devices (CCDs) or photomultipliers and the like. Similarly, enzymatic labels may be detected by providing the appropriate substrates for the enzyme and detecting the resulting reaction product. Finally simple colorimetric labels may be detected directly by observing the color associated with the label. Thus, in various dipstick assays, conjugated gold often appears pink, while various conjugated beads appear the color of the bead.
- Some assay formats do not require the use of labeled components. For instance, agglutination assays can be used to detect the presence of the target antibodies. In this case, antigen-coated particles are agglutinated by samples comprising the target antibodies. In this format, none of the components need to be labeled and the presence of the target antibody is detected by simple visual inspection.
- Inhibitors of ASKRK, i.e., inhibitors of ASKRK activity or expression, are useful for treating a number of human diseases relating to glucose metabolism, including diabetes. For example, administration of inhibitors can be used to treat diabetic patients or prediabetic individuals to prevent progression, and therefore symptoms, associated with diabetes.
- A. Agents that Modulate ASKRK Polypeptides
- The agents tested as modulators of polypeptides of the invention can be any small chemical compound, or a biological entity, such as a protein, sugar, nucleic acid or lipid. Typically, test compounds will be small chemical molecules and peptides. Essentially any chemical compound can be used as a potential modulator or ligand in the assays of the invention, although most often compounds that can be dissolved in aqueous or organic (especially DMSO-based) solutions are used. The assays are designed to screen large chemical libraries by automating the assay steps and providing compounds from any convenient source to assays, which are typically run in parallel (e.g., in microtiter formats on microtiter plates in robotic assays). Modulators also include agents designed to reduce the level of mRNA encoding an ASKRK polypeptide (e.g., antisense molecules, ribozymes, DNAzymes, small inhibitory RNAs and the like) or the level of translation from an mRNA (e.g., translation blockers such as an antisense molecules that are complementary to translation start or other sequences on an mRNA molecule). Modulators can also be variants or mutant proteins of an ASKRK polypeptide. It will be appreciated that there are many suppliers of chemical compounds, including Sigma (St. Louis, Mo.), Aldrich (St. Louis, Mo.), Sigma-Aldrich (St. Louis, Mo.), Fluka Chemika-Biochemica Analytika (Buchs, Switzerland) and the like.
- In some embodiments, high throughput screening methods involve providing a combinatorial chemical or peptide library containing a large number of potential therapeutic compounds (potential modulator compounds). Such “combinatorial chemical libraries” or “ligand libraries” are then screened in one or more assays, as described herein, to identify those library members (particular chemical species or subclasses) that display a desired characteristic activity. The compounds thus identified can serve as conventional “lead compounds” or can themselves be used as potential or actual therapeutics.
- A combinatorial chemical library is a collection of diverse chemical compounds generated by either chemical synthesis or biological synthesis, by combining a number of chemical “building blocks” such as reagents. For example, a linear combinatorial chemical library such as a polypeptide library is formed by combining a set of chemical building blocks (amino acids) in every possible way for a given compound length (i.e., the number of amino acids in a polypeptide compound). Millions of chemical compounds can be synthesized through such combinatorial mixing of chemical building blocks.
- Preparation and screening of combinatorial chemical libraries is well known to those of skill in the art. Such combinatorial chemical libraries include, but are not limited to, peptide libraries (see, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 5,010,175, Furka, Int. J. Pept. Prot. Res. 37:487-493 (1991) and Houghton et al., Nature 354:84-88 (1991)). Other chemistries for generating chemical diversity libraries can also be used. Such chemistries include, but are not limited to: peptoids (e.g., PCT Publication No. WO 91/19735), encoded peptides (e.g., PCT Publication WO 93/20242), random bio-oligomers (e.g., PCT Publication No. WO 92/00091), benzodiazepines (e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 5,288,514), diversomers such as hydantoins, benzodiazepines and dipeptides (Hobbs et al., Proc. Nat. Acad. Sci. USA 90:6909-6913 (1993)), vinylogous polypeptides (Hagihara et al., J. Amer. Chem. Soc. 114:6568 (1992)), nonpeptidal peptidomimetics with glucose scaffolding (Hirschmann et al., J. Amer. Chem. Soc. 114:9217-9218 (1992)), analogous organic syntheses of small compound libraries (Chen et al., J. Amer. Chem. Soc. 116:2661 (1994)), oligocarbamates (Cho et al., Science 261:1303 (1993)), and/or peptidyl phosphonates (Campbell et al., J. Org. Chem. 59:658 (1994)), nucleic acid libraries (see Ausubel, Berger and Sambrook, all supra), peptide nucleic acid libraries (see, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 5,539,083), antibody libraries (see, e.g., Vaughn et al., Nature Biotechnology, 14(3):309-314 (1996) and PCT/US96/10287), carbohydrate libraries (see, e.g., Liang et al., Science, 274:1520-1522 (1996) and U.S. Pat. No. 5,593,853), small organic molecule libraries (see, e.g., benzodiazepines, Baum C&EN, January 18, page 33 (1993); isoprenoids, U.S. Pat. No. 5,569,588; thiazolidinones and metathiazanones, U.S. Pat. No. 5,549,974; pyrrolidines, U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,525,735 and 5,519,134; morpholino compounds, U.S. Pat. No. 5,506,337; benzodiazepines, U.S. Pat. No. 5,288,514, and the like).
- Devices for the preparation of combinatorial libraries are commercially available (see, e.g., 357 MPS, 390 MPS, Advanced Chem Tech, Louisville Ky., Symphony, Rainin, Woburn, Mass., 433A Applied Biosystems, Foster City, Calif., 9050 Plus, Millipore, Bedford, Mass.). In addition, numerous combinatorial libraries are themselves commercially available (see, e.g., ComGenex, Princeton, N.J., Tripos, Inc., St. Louis, Mo., 3D Pharmaceuticals, Exton, Pa., Martek Biosciences, Columbia, Md., etc.).
- A number of different screening protocols can be utilized to identify agents that modulate the level of expression or activity of a polynucleotide of a polypeptide of the invention in cells, particularly mammalian cells, and especially human cells. In general terms, the screening methods involve screening a plurality of agents to identify an agent that modulates the activity of a polypeptide of the invention by, e.g., binding to the polypeptide, preventing an inhibitor or activator from binding to the polypeptide, increasing association of an inhibitor or activator with the polypeptide, or activating or inhibiting expression of the polypeptide.
- Any cell expressing a full-length polypeptide of the invention or a fragment thereof can be used to identify modulators. In some embodiments, the cells are eukaryotic cells lines (e.g., HEK293) transformed to express a heterologous ASKRK polypeptide. In some embodiments, a cell expressing an endogenous ASKRK polypeptide, e.g., a pancreatic cell or adrenal cell, is used in screens.
- Preliminary screens can be conducted by screening for agents capable of binding to ASKRK polypeptides, as at least some of the agents so identified are likely modulators of a polypeptide of the invention. Binding assays are also useful, e.g., for identifying endogenous proteins that interact with ASKRK. For example, antibodies or other molecules that bind polypeptides of the invention can be identified in binding assays.
- Binding assays usually involve contacting an ASKRK polypeptide with one or more test agents and allowing sufficient time for the protein and test agents to form a binding complex. Any binding complexes formed can be detected using any of a number of established analytical techniques. Protein binding assays include, but are not limited to, methods that measure co-precipitation or co-migration on non-denaturing SDS-polyacrylamide gels, and co-migration on Western blots (see, e.g., Bennet, J. P. and Yamamura, H. I. (1985) “Neurotransmitter, Hormone or Drug Receptor Binding Methods,” in Neurotransmitter Receptor Binding (Yamamura, H. I., et al., eds.), pp. 61-89. Other binding assays involve the use of mass spectrometry or NMR techniques to identify molecules bound the ASKRK polypeptide or displacement of labeled substrates. The ASKRK polypeptides used in these assays can be naturally expressed, cloned or synthesized.
- In addition, mammalian or yeast two-hybrid approaches (see, e.g., Bartel, P. L. et. al. Methods Enzymol, 254:241 (1995)) can be used to identify polypeptides or other molecules that interact or bind to ASKRK when expressed together in a host cell.
- ASKRK activity can be assessed using a variety of in vitro and in vivo assays to determine functional, chemical, and physical effects. These assays include monitoring, for example, catalytic phosphorylation of substrate. An exemplary kinase assay is provided in the examples. Briefly, the ability of ASKRK to phosphorylate a MAP kinase kinase (MKK6) is tested by incubating the substrate with an ASKRK polypeptide in a buffer with 32P-γATP and measuring the amount of phosphorylated substrate.
- Assays formatted for highthroughput use can also be used. For example, kinases catalyze the transfer of a gamma-phosphoryl group from ATP to an appropriate hydroxyl acceptor with the release of a proton. An assay based on the detection of this proton using an appropriately matched buffer/indicator system may therefore be used to detect activity (see, e.g., Chapman & Wong Bioorg Med Chem 10:551-5, 2002).
- Alternatively, ASKRK-mediated apoptosis can be used to assay for ASKRK activity. In such assays, hallmarks of apoptosis, e.g., DNA fragmentation, cell viability are measured. Cell viability can be measured using an assay suitable for a high throughput screening format, such as a colorimetric or fluorescent viability assay. For example, an Alamar blue (AB) assay, incorporates a redox indicator that changes the colour or fluorescence in response to metabolic activity. The Alamar blue fluoresces in the presence of living, but not dead, cells. Such an assay can be conveniently read in a microtiter plate or by flow cytometry. Colorimetric assays such as the MTT assay, which measures the reduction of MTT (3-(4.5-dimethyl) thiazol-2-yl-2,5-diphenyl tetrazolium bromide) to formazan, may also be used conveniently in a high throughput format to measure cell viability and proliferation.
- Other assays that measure cell number may also be used. These include assays that measure intercalation of dyes into the DNA of a cell. The amount of intercalated dye is directly proportional to cell number. For example, cells can be stained with a dye such as Hoechst 33342, which intercalates in the DNA of vital cell, an cell number determined by measuring the amount of fluorescence. Cells may also be directly counted.
- The ASKRK polypeptide of the assay will be selected from a polypeptide with substantial identity to a sequence of SEQ ID NO:2 or other conservatively modified variants thereof. Generally, the amino acid sequence identity will be at least 70%, optionally at least 85%, optionally at least 90-95% to the ASKRK polypeptides exemplified herein, or the polypeptide will have at least 10 contiguous amino acids, more often 20, 25, 30, 25, 50, or 100 contiguous amino acids of SEQ ID NO:2. Optionally, the ASKRK polypeptide used in activity assays will comprise a fragment of a polypeptide of the invention, such as a kinase domain and the like. Either a polypeptide of the invention or a domain thereof can be covalently linked to a heterologous protein to create a chimeric protein used in the assays described herein. A polypeptide of the invention is active when it has an activity value, relative to the control, that is 110%, optionally 150%, 200%, 300%, 400%, 500%, or 1000-2000%.
- Candidate inhibitors of ASKRK activity are tested using either recombinant or naturally occurring polypeptides. The protein can be isolated, expressed in a cell, expressed in a membrane derived from a cell, expressed in tissue or in an animal, either recombinant or naturally occurring. For example, tissue slices, dissociated cells, e.g., from tissues expressing polypeptides of the invention, transformed cells, or membranes can be used. Inhibition is tested using one of the in vitro or in vivo assays described herein.
- Test compound binding to polypeptides of the invention, a domain, or chimeric protein can be tested in solution, in a bilayer membrane, attached to a solid phase, in a lipid monolayer, or in vesicles. Binding of a test compound can be tested using, e.g., changes in spectroscopic characteristics (e.g., fluorescence, absorbance, refractive index), hydrodynamic (e.g., shape), chromatographic, or solubility properties.
- Samples or assays that are treated with a potential inhibitor (e.g., a “test compound”) are compared to control samples without the test compound, to examine the extent of modulation. Control samples (untreated with candidate compounds are assigned a relative activity value of 100. Inhibition of the polypeptides of the invention is achieved when the activity value relative to the control is about 90%, optionally 50%, optionally 25-0%.
- Screening assays for a compound that modulates the expression of ASKRK polynucleotides and polypeptides are also provided. Screening methods generally involve conducting cell-based assays in which test compounds are contacted with one or more cells expressing ASKRK, and then detecting an increase or decrease in expression (either transcript or translation product). Assays can be performed with any cells that express a ASKRK polypeptide. Some assays may employ cells that express ASKRK at high levels e.g., a pancreatic beta cell or islet cell.
- Expression can be detected in a number of different ways. As described infra, the expression level of an ASKRK polynucleotide can be determined by probing the mRNA expressed in a cell with a probe that specifically hybridizes with an ASKRK transcript (or complementary nucleic acid derived therefrom). Alternatively, an ASKRK polypeptide can be detected using immunological methods, e.g., an assay in which a cell lysate is probed with antibodies that specifically bind to the polypeptide.
- Reporter systems can also be used to identify modulators of ASKRK expression. A variety of different types of cells can be utilized in reporter assays. Cells that do not endogenously express an ASKRK polypeptide can be prokaryotic, but are preferably eukaryotic. The eukaryotic cells can be any of the cells typically utilized in generating cells that harbor recombinant nucleic acid constructs. Exemplary eukaryotic cells include, but are not limited to, yeast, and various higher eukaryotic cells such as the HEK293, HepG2, COS, CHO and HeLa cell lines.
- Various controls can be conducted to ensure that an observed activity is authentic including running parallel reactions with cells that lack the reporter construct or by not contacting a cell harboring the reporter construct with test compound. Compounds can also be further validated as described below.
- Agents that are initially identified by any of the foregoing screening methods can be further tested to validate the activity. Modulators that are selected for further study can be tested on a variety of cells, e.g., pancreatic cells such as the beta cell lines HIT-T15, RiNm5, betaTC3, betaHC9, and INS1. Cells that have been engineered to express ASKRK may also be used. For example, fibroblasts that overexpress ASKRK may be used to further validate the activity of the candidate modulator. In an example of such an analysis, cells that express ASKRK are pre-incubated with the modulators and tested for apoptotic activity.
- Following such studies, validity of the modulators is tested in suitable animal models. The basic format of such methods involves administering a lead compound identified during an initial screen to an animal that serves as a model for humans and then determining if expression or activity of ASKRK is in fact modulated.
- The effect of the compound will be assessed in either diabetic animals or in diet-induced insulin resistant animals. The blood glucose and insulin levels will be determined. The animal models utilized in validation studies generally are mammals of any kind. Specific examples of suitable animals include, but are not limited to, primates, mice and rats. For example, monogenic models of diabetes (e.g., ob/ob and db/db mice, Zucker rats and Zucker Diabetic Fatty rats etc) or polygenic models of diabetes (e.g., OLETF rats, GK rats, NSY mice, and KK mice) can be useful for validating modulation of a polypeptide of the invention in a diabetic or insulin resistant animal. In addition, transgenic animals expressing human ASKRK polypeptides can be used to further validate drug candidates.
- Compounds are typically selected that increase beta cell viability or improve islet function. Assays to assess insulin sensitivity and islet function include fasting blood glucose assays, fasting insulin level assays, assessment of glucose levels during an oral or intraperitoneal glucose tolerance test, assessment of insulin or C-peptide levels during an oral or intraperitoneal glucose tolerance test. Other secretagogues, e.g., arginine or glyburide can also be used to test for the glucose specificity of the improvement in islet function.
- In the high throughput assays of the invention, it is possible to screen up to several thousand different modulators or ligands in a single day. In particular, each well of a microtiter plate can be used to run a separate assay against a selected potential modulator, or, if concentration or incubation time effects are to be observed, every 5-10 wells can test a single modulator. Thus, a single standard microtiter plate can assay about 100 (e.g., 96) modulators. If 1536 well plates are used, then a single plate can easily assay from about 100 to about 1500 different compounds. It is possible to assay several different plates per day; assay screens for up to about 6,000-20,000 or more different compounds are possible using the integrated systems of the invention. In addition, microfluidic approaches to reagent manipulation can be used.
- A molecule of interest (e.g., a ASKRK polypeptide or polynucleotide, or a modulator thereof) can be bound to the solid-state component, directly or indirectly, via covalent or non-covalent linkage, e.g., via a tag. The tag can be any of a variety of components. In general, a molecule that binds the tag (a tag binder) is fixed to a solid support, and the tagged molecule of interest is attached to the solid support by interaction of the tag and the tag binder.
- A number of tags and tag binders can be used, based upon known molecular interactions well described in the literature. For example, where a tag has a natural binder, for example, biotin, protein A, or protein G, it can be used in conjunction with appropriate tag binders (avidin, streptavidin, neutravidin, the Fc region of an immunoglobulin, poly-His, etc.) Antibodies to molecules with natural binders such as biotin are also widely available and appropriate tag binders (see, SIGMA Immunochemicals 1998 catalogue SIGMA, St. Louis Mo.).
- Similarly, any haptenic or antigenic compound can be used in combination with an appropriate antibody to form a tag/tag binder pair. Thousands of specific antibodies are commercially available and many additional antibodies are described in the literature. For example, in one common configuration, the tag is a first antibody and the tag binder is a second antibody that recognizes the first antibody. In addition to antibody-antigen interactions, receptor-ligand interactions are also appropriate as tag and tag-binder pairs, such as agonists and antagonists of cell membrane receptors (e.g., cell receptor-ligand interactions such as transferrin, c-kit, viral receptor ligands, cytokine receptors, chemokine receptors, interleukin receptors, immunoglobulin receptors and antibodies, the cadherin family, the integrin family, the selectin family, and the like; see, e.g., Pigott & Power, The Adhesion Molecule Facts Book I (1993)). Similarly, toxins and venoms, viral epitopes, hormones (e.g., opiates, steroids, etc.), intracellular receptors (e.g., which mediate the effects of various small ligands, including steroids, thyroid hormone, retinoids and vitamin D; peptides), drugs, lectins, sugars, nucleic acids (both linear and cyclic polymer configurations), oligosaccharides, proteins, phospholipids and antibodies can all interact with various cell receptors.
- Synthetic polymers, such as polyurethanes, polyesters, polycarbonates, polyureas, polyamides, polyethyleneimines, polyarylene sulfides, polysiloxanes, polyimides, and polyacetates can also form an appropriate tag or tag binder. Many other tag/tag binder pairs are also useful in assay systems described herein, as would be apparent to one of skill upon review of this disclosure.
- Common linkers such as peptides, polyethers, and the like can also serve as tags, and include polypeptide sequences, such as poly-Gly sequences of between about 5 and 200 amino acids (SEQ ID NO:8). Such flexible linkers are known to those of skill in the art. For example, poly(ethylene glycol) linkers are available from Shearwater Polymers, Inc., Huntsville, Ala. These linkers optionally have amide linkages, sulfhydryl linkages, or heterofunctional linkages.
- Tag binders are fixed to solid substrates using any of a variety of methods currently available. Solid substrates are commonly derivatized or functionalized by exposing all or a portion of the substrate to a chemical reagent that fixes a chemical group to the surface that is reactive with a portion of the tag binder. For example, groups that are suitable for attachment to a longer chain portion would include amines, hydroxyl, thiol, and carboxyl groups. Aminoalkylsilanes and hydroxyalkylsilanes can be used to functionalize a variety of surfaces, such as glass surfaces. The construction of such solid phase biopolymer arrays is well described in the literature (see, e.g., Merrifield, J. Am. Chem. Soc. 85:2149-2154 (1963) (describing solid phase synthesis of, e.g., peptides); Geysen et al., J. Immun. Meth. 102:259-274 (1987) (describing synthesis of solid phase components on pins); Frank and Doring, Tetrahedron 44:60316040 (1988) (describing synthesis of various peptide sequences on cellulose disks); Fodor et al., Science, 251:767-777 (1991); Sheldon et al., Clinical Chemistry 39(4):718-719 (1993); and Kozal et al., Nature Medicine 2(7):753759 (1996) (all describing arrays of biopolymers fixed to solid substrates). Non-chemical approaches for fixing tag binders to substrates include other common methods, such as heat, cross-linking by UV radiation, and the like.
- The invention provides in vitro assays for identifying, in a high throughput format, compounds that can modulate the expression or activity of ASKRK. Control reactions that measure ASKRK activity in a cell in a reaction that does not include a potential modulator are optional, as the assays are highly uniform. Such optional control reactions are appropriate and increase the reliability of the assay. Accordingly, in some embodiments, the methods of the invention include such a control reaction. For each of the assay formats described, “no modulator” control reactions that do not include a modulator provide a background level of binding activity.
- In some assays it will be desirable to have positive controls. At least two types of positive controls are appropriate. First, a known activator of ASKRK can be incubated with one sample of the assay, and the resulting increase in signal resulting from an increased expression level or activity of a ASKRK polypeptide or polynucleotide are determined according to the methods herein. Second, a known inhibitor of a polypeptide or a polynucleotide of the invention can be added, and the resulting decrease in signal for the expression or activity of the ASKRK polypeptide or polynucleotide can be similarly detected. It will be appreciated that modulators can also be combined with activators or inhibitors to find modulators that inhibit the increase or decrease that is otherwise caused by the presence of the known modulator of an ASKRK polypeptide or polynucleotide.
- The invention provides compositions, kits and integrated systems for practicing the assays described herein using ASKRK nucleic acids or polypeptides, antibodies, etc.
- The invention provides assay compositions for use in solid phase assays; such compositions can include, for example, one or more nucleic acids encoding ASKRK immobilized on a solid support, and a labeling reagent. In each case, the assay compositions can also include additional reagents that are desirable for hybridization. Modulators of ASKRK expression or activity can also be included in the assay compositions.
- The invention also provides kits for carrying out the assays described herein. The kits typically include a probe that comprises an antibody that specifically binds an ASKRK polypeptide or a polynucleotide sequence encoding an ASKRK polypeptide, and a label for detecting the presence of the probe. Kits can include any of the compositions noted above, and optionally further include additional components such as instructions to practice a high-throughput method of assaying for an effect on ASKRK expression or activity, one or more containers or compartments (e.g., to hold the probe, labels, or the like), a control modulator of ASKRK expression or activity, a robotic armature for mixing kit components or the like.
- The invention also provides integrated systems for high-throughput screening of potential modulators for an effect on ASKRK expression or activity. The systems can include a robotic armature which transfers fluid from a source to a destination, a controller which controls the robotic armature, a label detector, a data storage unit which records label detection, and an assay component such as a microtiter dish comprising a well having a reaction mixture or a substrate comprising a fixed nucleic acid or immobilization moiety.
- A number of robotic fluid transfer systems are available, or can easily be made from existing components. For example, a Zymate XP (Zymark Corporation; Hopkinton, Mass.) automated robot using a Microlab 2200 (Hamilton; Reno, Nev.) pipetting station can be used to transfer parallel samples to 96 well microtiter plates to set up several parallel simultaneous binding assays.
- Optical images viewed (and, optionally, recorded) by a camera or other recording device (e.g., a photodiode and data storage device) are optionally further processed in any of the embodiments herein, e.g., by digitizing the image and storing and analyzing the image on a computer. A variety of commercially available peripheral equipment and software is available for digitizing, storing and analyzing a digitized video or digitized optical image.
- One conventional system carries light from the specimen field to a cooled charge-coupled device (CCD) camera, in common use in the art. A CCD camera includes an array of picture elements (pixels). The light from the specimen is imaged on the CCD. Particular pixels corresponding to regions of the specimen (e.g., individual hybridization sites on an array of biological polymers) are sampled to obtain light intensity readings for each position. Multiple pixels are processed in parallel to increase speed. The apparatus and methods of the invention are easily used for viewing any sample, e.g., by fluorescent or dark field microscopic techniques.
- ASKRK modulators, e.g., inhibitors can be administered directly to the mammalian subject for modulation of activity of a polypeptide of the invention in vivo. Administration is by any of the routes normally used for introducing a modulator compound into ultimate contact with the tissue to be treated and is well known to those of skill in the art. Although more than one route can be used to administer a particular composition, a particular route can often provide a more immediate and more effective reaction than another route.
- The pharmaceutical compositions of the invention may comprise a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier. Pharmaceutically acceptable carriers are determined in part by the particular composition being administered, as well as by the particular method used to administer the composition. Accordingly, there are a wide variety of suitable formulations of pharmaceutical compositions of the present invention (see, e.g., Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences, 17th ed. 1985)).
- Inhibitors of the expression or activity of ASKRK alone or in combination with other suitable components, can be prepared for injection or for use in a pump device. Pump devices (also known as “insulin pumps”) are commonly used to administer insulin to patients and therefore can be easily adapted to include compositions of the present invention. Manufacturers of insulin pumps include Animas, Disetronic and MiniMed.
- ASKRK inhibitors, alone or in combination with other suitable components, can also be made into aerosol formulations (i.e., they can be “nebulized”) to be administered via inhalation. Aerosol formulations can be placed into pressurized acceptable propellants, such as dichlorodifluoromethane, propane, nitrogen, and the like.
- Formulations suitable for administration include aqueous and non-aqueous solutions, isotonic sterile solutions, which can contain antioxidants, buffers, bacteriostats, and solutes that render the formulation isotonic, and aqueous and non-aqueous sterile suspensions that can include suspending agents, solubilizers, thickening agents, stabilizers, and preservatives. In the practice of this invention, compositions can be administered, for example, orally, nasally, topically, intravenously, intraperitoneally, or intrathecally. The formulations of compounds can be presented in unit-dose or multi-dose sealed containers, such as ampoules and vials. Solutions and suspensions can be prepared from sterile powders, granules, and tablets of the kind previously described. The modulators can also be administered as part of a prepared food or drug.
- The dose administered to a patient, in the context of the present invention should be sufficient to induce a beneficial response in the subject over time. The optimal dose level for any patient will depend on a variety of factors including the efficacy of the specific modulator employed, the age, body weight, physical activity, and diet of the patient, on a possible combination with other drugs, and on the severity of the case of diabetes. It is recommended that the daily dosage of the modulator be determined for each individual patient by those skilled in the art in a similar way as for known insulin compositions. The size of the dose also will be determined by the existence, nature, and extent of any adverse side-effects that accompany the administration of a particular compound or vector in a particular subject.
- In determining the effective amount of the modulator to be administered a physician may evaluate circulating plasma levels of the modulator, modulator toxicity, and the production of anti-modulator antibodies. In general, the dose equivalent of a modulator is from about 1 ng/kg to 10 mg/kg for a typical subject.
- For administration, modulators of the present invention can be administered at a rate determined by the LD-50 of the modulator, and the side-effects of the modulator at various concentrations, as applied to the mass and overall health of the subject. Administration can be accomplished via single or divided doses.
- The compounds of the present invention can also be used effectively in combination with one or more additional active agents depending on the desired target therapy (see, e.g., Turner, N. et al. Prog. Drug Res. (1998) 51: 33-94; Haffner, S. Diabetes Care (1998) 21: 160-178; and DeFronzo, R. et al. (eds.), Diabetes Reviews (1997) Vol. 5 No. 4). A number of studies have investigated the benefits of combination therapies with oral agents (see, e.g., Mahler, R., J. Clin. Endocrinol. Metab. (1999) 84: 1165-71; United Kingdom Prospective Diabetes Study Group: UKPDS 28, Diabetes Care (1998) 21: 87-92; Bardin, C. W., (ed.), Current Therapy In Endocrinology And Metabolism, 6th Edition (Mosby—Year Book, Inc., St. Louis, Mo. 1997); Chiasson, J. et al., Ann. Intern. Med. (1994) 121: 928-935; Coniff, R. et al., Clin. Ther. (1997) 19: 16-26; Coniff, R. et al., Am. J. Med. (1995) 98: 443-451; and Iwamoto, Y. et al., Diabet. Med. (1996) 13 365-370; Kwiterovich, P. Am. J. Cardiol (1998) 82(12A): 3U-17U). These studies indicate that modulation of diabetes, among other diseases, can be further improved by the addition of a second agent to the therapeutic regimen. Combination therapy includes administration of a single pharmaceutical dosage formulation that contains a modulator of the invention and one or more additional active agents, as well as administration of a modulator and each active agent in its own separate pharmaceutical dosage formulation. For example, a modulator and a thiazolidinedione can be administered to the human subject together in a single oral dosage composition, such as a tablet or capsule, or each agent can be administered in separate oral dosage formulations. Where separate dosage formulations are used, a modulator and one or more additional active agents can be administered at essentially the same time (i.e., concurrently), or at separately staggered times (i.e., sequentially). Combination therapy is understood to include all these regimens.
- One example of combination therapy can be seen in treating pre-diabetic individuals (e.g., to prevent progression into type 2 diabetes) or diabetic individuals (or treating diabetes and its related symptoms, complications, and disorders), wherein the modulators can be effectively used in combination with, for example, sulfonylureas (such as chlorpropamide, tolbutamide, acetohexamide, tolazamide, glyburide, gliclazide, glynase, glimepiride, and glipizide); biguanides (such as metformin); a PPAR beta delta agonist; a ligand or agonist of PPAR gamma such as thiazolidinediones (such as ciglitazone, pioglitazone (see, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 6,218,409), troglitazone, and rosiglitazone (see, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 5,859,037)); PPAR alpha agonists such as clofibrate, gemfibrozil, fenofibrate, ciprofibrate, and bezafibrate; dehydroepiandrosterone (also referred to as DHEA or its conjugated sulphate ester, DHEA-SO4); antiglucocorticoids; TNFα inhibitors; α-glucosidase inhibitors (such as acarbose, miglitol, and voglibose); amylin and amylin derivatives (such as pramlintide, (see, also, U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,902,726; 5,124,314; 5,175,145 and 6,143,718)); insulin secretogogues (such as repaglinide, gliquidone, and nateglinide (see, also, U.S. Pat. Nos. 6,251,856; 6,251,865; 6,221,633; 6,174,856)), and insulin.
- Conventional viral and non-viral based gene transfer methods can be used to introduce nucleic acids encoding engineered ASKRK polypeptides, e.g., dominant negative polypeptide, in mammalian cells or target tissues, or alternatively, nucleic acids that are inhibitors of ASKRK activity, e.g., siRNAs, anti-sense RNAs, ribozymes and the like. Such methods can be used to administer nucleic acids in vitro. In some embodiments, the nucleic acids encoding polypeptides of the invention are administered for in vivo or ex vivo gene therapy uses. Non-viral vector delivery systems include DNA plasmids, naked nucleic acid, and nucleic acid complexed with a delivery vehicle such as a liposome. Viral vector delivery systems include DNA and RNA viruses, which have either episomal or integrated genomes after delivery to the cell. For a review of gene therapy procedures, see Anderson, Science 256:808-813 (1992); Nabel & Felgner, TIBTECH 11:211-217 (1993); Mitani & Caskey, TIBTECH 11:162-166 (1993); Dillon, TIBTECH 11:167-175 (1993); Miller, Nature 357:455-460 (1992); Van Brunt, Biotechnology 6(10):1149-1154 (1988); Vigne, Restorative Neurology and Neuroscience 8:35-36 (1995); Kremer & Perricaudet, British Medical Bulletin 51(1):31-44 (1995); Haddada et al., in Current Topics in Microbiology and Immunology Doerfler and Böhm (eds) (1995); and Yu et al., Gene Therapy 1:13-26 (1994).
- In some embodiments, small interfering RNAs are administered. In mammalian cells, introduction of long dsRNA (>30 nt) often initiates a potent antiviral response, exemplified by nonspecific inhibition of protein synthesis and RNA degradation. The phenomenon of RNA interference is described and discussed, e.g., in Bass, Nature 411:428-29 (2001); Elbahir et al., Nature 411:494-98 (2001); and Fire et al., Nature 391:806-11 (1998), where methods of making interfering RNA also are discussed. The siRNAs based upon the ASKRK sequence disclosed herein are less than 100 base pairs, typically 30 bps or shorter, and are made by approaches known in the art. Exemplary siRNAs according to the invention could have up to 29 bps, 25 bps, 22 bps, 21 bps, 20 bps, 15 bps, 10 bps, 5 bps or any integer thereabout or therebetween.
- Methods of non-viral delivery of nucleic acids encoding engineered polypeptides of the invention include lipofection, microinjection, biolistics, virosomes, liposomes, immunoliposomes, polycation or lipid:nucleic acid conjugates, naked DNA, artificial virions, and agent-enhanced uptake of DNA. Lipofection is described in e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 5,049,386, U.S. Pat. No. 4,946,787; and U.S. Pat. No. 4,897,355) and lipofection reagents are sold commercially (e.g., Transfectam™ and Lipofectin™). Cationic and neutral lipids that are suitable for efficient receptor-recognition lipofection of polynucleotides include those of Felgner, WO 91/17424, WO 91/16024. Delivery can be to cells (ex vivo administration) or target tissues (in vivo administration).
- The preparation of lipid:nucleic acid complexes, including targeted liposomes such as immunolipid complexes, is well known to one of skill in the art (see, e.g., Crystal, Science 270:404-410 (1995); Blaese et al., Cancer Gene Ther. 2:291-297 (1995); Behr et al., Bioconjugate Chem. 5:382-389 (1994); Remy et al., Bioconjugate Chem. 5:647-654 (1994); Gao et al., Gene Therapy 2:710-722 (1995); Ahmad et al., Cancer Res. 52:4817-4820 (1992); U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,186,183, 4,217,344, 4,235,871, 4,261,975, 4,485,054, 4,501,728, 4,774,085, 4,837,028, and 4,946,787).
- The use of RNA or DNA viral based systems for the delivery of nucleic acids encoding engineered ASKRK polypeptides or nucleic acids take advantage of highly evolved processes for targeting a virus to specific cells in the body and trafficking the viral payload to the nucleus. Viral vectors can be administered directly to patients (in vivo) or they can be used to treat cells in vitro and the modified cells are administered to patients (ex vivo). Conventional viral based systems for the delivery of polypeptides of the invention could include retroviral, lentivirus, adenoviral, adeno-associated and herpes simplex virus vectors for gene transfer. Viral vectors are currently the most efficient and versatile method of gene transfer in target cells and tissues. Integration in the host genome is possible with the retrovirus, lentivirus, and adeno-associated virus gene transfer methods, often resulting in long term expression of the inserted transgene. Additionally, high transduction efficiencies have been observed in many different cell types and target tissues.
- The tropism of a retrovirus can be altered by incorporating foreign envelope proteins, expanding the potential target population of target cells. Lentiviral vectors are retroviral vectors that are able to transduce or infect non-dividing cells and typically produce high viral titers. Selection of a retroviral gene transfer system would therefore depend on the target tissue. Retroviral vectors are comprised of cis-acting long terminal repeats with packaging capacity for up to 6-10 kb of foreign sequence. The minimum cis-acting LTRs are sufficient for replication and packaging of the vectors, which are then used to integrate the therapeutic gene into the target cell to provide permanent transgene expression. Widely used retroviral vectors include those based upon murine leukemia virus (MuLV), gibbon ape leukemia virus (GaLV), Simian Immuno deficiency virus (SIV), human immuno deficiency virus (HIV), and combinations thereof (see, e.g., Buchscher et al., J. Virol. 66:2731-2739 (1992); Johann et al., J. Virol. 66:1635-1640 (1992); Sommerfelt et al., Virol. 176:58-59 (1990); Wilson et al., J. Virol. 63:2374-2378 (1989); Miller et al., J. Virol. 65:2220-2224 (1991); PCT/US94/05700).
- In applications where transient expression of a nucleic acid is preferred, adenoviral based systems are typically used. Adenoviral based vectors are capable of very high transduction efficiency in many cell types and do not require cell division. With such vectors, high titer and levels of expression have been obtained. This vector can be produced in large quantities in a relatively simple system. Adeno-associated virus (“AAV”) vectors are also used to transduce cells with target nucleic acids, e.g., in the in vitro production of nucleic acids and peptides, and for in vivo and ex vivo gene therapy procedures (see, e.g., West et al., Virology 160:38-47 (1987); U.S. Pat. No. 4,797,368; WO 93/24641; Kotin, Human Gene Therapy 5:793-801 (1994); Muzyczka, J. Clin. Invest. 94:1351 (1994)). Construction of recombinant AAV vectors are described in a number of publications, including U.S. Pat. No. 5,173,414; Tratschin et al., Mol. Cell. Biol. 5:3251-3260 (1985); Tratschin, et al., Mol. Cell. Biol. 4:2072-2081 (1984); Hermonat & Muzyczka, PNAS 81:6466-6470 (1984); and Samulski et al., J. Virol. 63:03822-3828 (1989).
- pLASN and MFG-S are examples are retroviral vectors that have been used in clinical trials (Dunbar et al., Blood 85:3048-305 (1995); Kohn et al., Nat. Med. 1:1017-102 (1995); Malech et al., PNAS 94:22 12133-12138 (1997)). PA317/pLASN was the first therapeutic vector used in a gene therapy trial. (Blaese et al., Science 270:475-480 (1995)). Transduction efficiencies of 50% or greater have been observed for MFG-S packaged vectors. (Ellem et al., Immunol Immunother. 44(1):10-20 (1997); Dranoff et al., Hum. Gene Ther. 1:111-2 (1997).
- Recombinant adeno-associated virus vectors (rAAV) are a promising alternative gene delivery systems based on the defective and nonpathogenic parvovirus adeno-associated type 2 virus. All vectors are derived from a plasmid that retains only the AAV 145 bp inverted terminal repeats flanking the transgene expression cassette. Efficient gene transfer and stable transgene delivery due to integration into the genomes of the transduced cell are key features for this vector system. (Wagner et al., Lancet 351:9117 1702-3 (1998), Kearns et al., Gene Ther. 9:748-55 (1996)).
- Replication-deficient recombinant adenoviral vectors (Ad) can be engineered such that a desired nucleic acid replaces the Ad E1a, E1b, and E3 genes; subsequently the replication defector vector is propagated in human 293 cells that supply deleted gene function in trans. Ad vectors can transduce multiply types of tissues in vivo, including nondividing, differentiated cells such as those found in the liver, kidney, muscle, and pancreatic system tissues. Conventional Ad vectors have a large carrying capacity. An example of the use of an Ad vector in a clinical trial involved polynucleotide therapy for antitumor immunization with intramuscular injection (Sterman et al., Hum. Gene Ther. 7:1083-9 (1998)). Additional examples of the use of adenovirus vectors for gene transfer in clinical trials include Rosenecker et al., Infection 24:15-10 (1996); Sterman et al., Hum. Gene Ther. 9:7 1083-1089 (1998); Welsh et al., Hum. Gene Ther. 2:205-18 (1995); Alvarez et al., Hum. Gene Ther. 5:597-613 (1997); Topf et al., Gene Ther. 5:507-513 (1998); Sterman et al., Hum. Gene Ther. 7:1083-1089 (1998).
- Packaging cells are used to form virus particles that are capable of infecting a host cell. Such cells include 293 cells, which package adenovirus, and χ2 cells or PA317 cells, which package retrovirus. Viral vectors used in gene therapy are usually generated by producer cell line that packages a nucleic acid vector into a viral particle. The vectors typically contain the minimal viral sequences required for packaging and subsequent integration into a host, other viral sequences being replaced by an expression cassette for the protein to be expressed. The missing viral functions are supplied in trans by the packaging cell line. For example, AAV vectors used in gene therapy typically only possess ITR sequences from the AAV genome which are required for packaging and integration into the host genome. Viral DNA is packaged in a cell line, which contains a helper plasmid encoding the other AAV genes, namely rep and cap, but lacking ITR sequences. The cell line is also infected with adenovirus as a helper. The helper virus promotes replication of the AAV vector and expression of AAV genes from the helper plasmid. The helper plasmid is not packaged in significant amounts due to a lack of ITR sequences. Contamination with adenovirus can be reduced by, e.g., heat treatment to which adenovirus is more sensitive than AAV.
- In many gene therapy applications, it is desirable that the gene therapy vector be delivered with a high degree of specificity to a particular tissue type, e.g., pancreatic tissue. A viral vector is typically modified to have specificity for a given cell type by expressing a ligand as a fusion protein with a viral coat protein on the viruses outer surface. The ligand is chosen to have affinity for a receptor known to be present on the cell type of interest. For example, Han et al., PNAS 92:9747-9751 (1995), reported that Moloney murine leukemia virus can be modified to express human heregulin fused to gp70, and the recombinant virus infects certain human breast cancer cells expressing human epidermal growth factor receptor. This principle can be extended to other pairs of virus expressing a ligand fusion protein and target cell expressing a receptor. For example, filamentous phage can be engineered to display antibody fragments (e.g., FAB or Fv) having specific binding affinity for virtually any chosen cellular receptor. Although the above description applies primarily to viral vectors, the same principles can be applied to nonviral vectors. Such vectors can be engineered to contain specific uptake sequences thought to favor uptake by specific target cells.
- Gene therapy vectors can be delivered in vivo by administration to an individual patient, typically by systemic administration (e.g., intravenous, intraperitoneal, intramuscular, subdermal, or intracranial infusion) or topical application, as described below. Alternatively, vectors can be delivered to cells ex vivo, such as cells explanted from an individual patient.
- Ex vivo cell transfection for diagnostics, research, or for gene therapy (e.g., via re-infusion of the transfected cells into the host organism) is well known to those of skill in the art. In some embodiments, cells are isolated from the subject organism, transfected with a nucleic acid, e.g., an antisense ASKRK nucleic acid, an expression construct expressing an dominant negative construct, a ribozyme and the like, and re-infused back into the subject organism (e.g., patient). Various cell types suitable for ex vivo transfection are well known to those of skill in the art (see, e.g., Freshney et al., Culture of Animal Cells, A Manual of Basic Technique (3rd ed. 1994)) and the references cited therein for a discussion of how to isolate and culture cells from patients).
- Vectors (e.g., retroviruses, adenoviruses, liposomes, etc.) containing therapeutic nucleic acids can be also administered directly to the organism for transduction of cells in vivo. Alternatively, naked DNA can be administered. Administration is by any of the routes normally used for introducing a molecule into ultimate contact with blood or tissue cells. Suitable methods of administering such nucleic acids are available and well known to those of skill in the art, and, although more than one route can be used to administer a particular composition, a particular route can often provide a more immediate and more effective reaction than another route.
- Pharmaceutically acceptable carriers are determined in part by the particular composition being administered, as well as by the particular method used to administer the composition. Accordingly, there is a wide variety of suitable formulations of pharmaceutical compositions of the present invention, as described below (see, e.g., Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences, 17th ed., 1989).
- The present invention also provides methods of diagnosing diabetes or a predisposition of at least some of the pathologies of diabetes. Diagnosis can involve determination of a genotype of an individual (e.g., with SNPs) and comparison of the genotype with alleles known to have an association with the occurrence of diabetes. Alternatively, diagnosis also involves determining the level of an ASKRK polypeptide or polynucleotide in a patient and then comparing the level to a baseline or range. Typically, the baseline value is representative of a polypeptide or polynucleotide of the invention in a healthy (e.g., non-diabetic) person.
- As discussed above, variation of levels (e.g., low or high levels) of a polypeptide or polynucleotide of the invention compared to the baseline range indicates that the patient is either diabetic or at risk of developing at least some of the pathologies of diabetes (e.g., pre-diabetic). For example, a patient with increased levels of ASKRK polypeptide, nucleic acid, e.g., mRNA, or and/or ASKRK activity in pancreas relative to normal may have an increased risk for diabetes. The level of a polypeptide in a non-diabetic individual can be a reading from a single individual, but is typically a statistically relevant average from a group of non-diabetic individuals. The level of a polypeptide in a lean individual can be represented by a value, for example in a computer program.
- In some embodiments, the level of ASKRK polypeptide or polynucleotide is measured by taking a blood, urine or tissue sample from a patient and measuring the amount of a polypeptide or polynucleotide of the invention in the sample using any number of detection methods, such as those discussed herein. For instance, fasting and fed blood or urine levels can be tested.
- In some embodiments, the baseline level and the level in a non-diabetic sample from an individual, or at least two samples from the same individual, differ by at least about 5%, 10%, 20%, 50%, 75%, 100%, 150%, 200%, 300%, 400%, 500%, 1000% or more. In some embodiments, the sample from the individual is greater by at least one of the above-listed percentages relative to the baseline level. In some embodiments, the sample from the individual is lower by at least one of the above-listed percentages relative to the baseline level.
- In some embodiments, the level of an ASKRK polypeptide or polynucleotide is used to monitor the effectiveness of treatments for diabetes such as thiazolidinediones, metformin, sulfonylureas and other standard therapies. In some embodiments the activity or expression of an ASKRK polypeptide or polynucleotide is measured prior to and after treatment of diabetic or pre-diabetic patients with antidiabetic therapies as a surrogate marker of clinical effectiveness. For example, the greater the reduction in expression or activity ASKRK indicates greater effectiveness.
- Glucose/insulin tolerance tests can also be used to detect the effect of glucose levels on levels of ASKRK polypeptides or polynucleotides. In glucose tolerance tests, the patient's ability to tolerate a standard oral glucose load is evaluated by assessing serum and urine specimens for glucose levels. Blood samples are taken before the glucose is ingested, glucose is given by mouth, and blood or urine glucose levels are tested at set intervals after glucose ingestion. Similarly, meal tolerance tests can also be used to detect the effect of insulin or food, respectively, on levels of ASKRK.
- A custom Affymetrix oligonucleotide array probe set MBXMUSISL25681_at was identified as being highly enriched in mouse islets and a beta cell line (βHC9) (
FIG. 1 ). This sequence was then used to design primers to obtain a larger clone containing a coding sequence that is 59% identical to the mouse ASK1 coding sequence. The kinase domains are 86% identical between the ASK1 and ASKRK. Anti-mASKRK antibodies were generated using the C-terminal peptide sequence SQHRRQMQESSQ (SEQ ID NO:9) for both immunization and affinity purification. The affinity purified antibody was used to demonstrate that ASKRK protein is abundant in islet beta cells, but is much less abundant in alpha cells and the surrounding acinar tissue (data not shown). - The mouse ASKRK sequence was used to find homologous human genomic sequences, and these were, in turn, used to design primers for RT-PCR to obtain a partial coding sequence for human ASKRK. Also, by comparison of the synteny between rat and human genomic sequences 5′ of this partial sequence, the full coding sequence of human ASKRK (SEQ ID NO:1, nucleic acid sequence, SEQ ID NO:2, protein sequence) was obtained. A sequence comparison of the full-length human and partial mouse ASKRK amino acid sequences is shown in
FIG. 2 . - The DNA encoding human ASKRK was assembled for the full coding and deletion constructs described below. Human ASKRK-specific primers were also used for TaqMan (ABI) analysis to confirm that the human ASKRK mRNA was also enriched in islets relative to most other tissues. ASKRK mRNA is also expressed in human adrenal gland (
FIG. 3 ). Anti hASKRK antibodies were raised by immunizing rabbits with the C-terminal peptide sequence YRRAQEASETKDKA (SEQ ID NO:10). This antibody was used to confirm ASKRK expression in functional studies. - To examine the function of ASKRK in cells, we transfected HEK293 fibroblasts with constructs containing the full coding sequence in pcDNA3.1 with an N-terminal His tag or with an identical construct in which the codon for K681 was altered to produce M681. The anti-human ASKRK antibody specifically detects a 150 kilodalton protein in the ASKRK-His- and ASKRK-His(K681M)-transfected cells that is not produced in cells transfected with pcDNA3.1 alone. The predicted molecular weight of the 1313 amino acid ASKRK protein is 147 kilodaltons. Lysates from cells expressing hASKRK-HisM, but not hASKRK-HisM(K681M), displayed MKK6 phosphorylating activity similar to that of lysates from HASK1ΔN transfected cells (
FIG. 4 ). - To determine whether this MKK6 phosphorylating activity was intrinsic to hASKRK, we generated an N-terminally truncated version of the protein missing the first 168 amino acids, but tagged with a FLAG epitope sequence for purification. After expression of a baculovirus construct containing hASKRK-ΔN-flag in sf21 cells, we purified this protein on an M2-FLAG antibody column. Purified hASKRK-AN-flag was able to transfer phosphate to MKK6, and this phosphorylation was inhibited by the protein kinase inhibitor staurosporine. A protein with a larger N-terminal deletion (missing the first 678 amino acids), but also produced as a flag-tagged protein in baculovirus construct infected sf21 cells, did not have significant MKK6 phosphorylating activity (
FIG. 5 ). - Since an N-terminally truncated version of ASK1 induces cell death in a HeLa cells via apoptosis, we examined whether adenovirus constructs expressing N-terminally truncated versions of hASKRK promoted loss of viability when used to infect HeLa cells in culture. Adenovirus hASKRK-ΔN infection caused a 60% loss of viability by XTT assay, whereas the similar adenovirus without the hASKRK coding sequence did not reduce viability at the same multiplicity of infection (MOI). The inactivating K681M mutation reduced the loss-of-viability inducing activity of the protein by 50% at the same MOI (
FIG. 6 ). - A variety of proapoptotic stimuli can reduce the viability of beta cells in culture. The NO donor sodium nitroprusside (SNP), and the cytokines IL-1, TNF-α and interferon γ promote loss of viability in the beta cell line PHC9, and this activity is enhanced by prior infection with the hASKRK-ΔN adenovirus, but not with the same virus without hASKRK coding sequence and not with a kinase activity-deficient hASKRK-ΔN(K681 M) adenovirus (
FIG. 7 ). - We conclude that ASKRK is a loss-of-viability inducing kinase that is abundantly and selectively expressed in beta cells. Reducing the kinase activity of this protein also causes a reduction in its capacity to cause cell death.
- Although the foregoing invention has been described in some detail by way of illustration and example for purposes of clarity of understanding, it will be readily apparent to one of ordinary skill in the art in light of the teachings of this invention that certain changes and modifications may be made thereto without departing from the spirit or scope of the appended claims one of ordinary skill in the art in light of the teachings of this invention that certain changes and modifications may be made thereto without departing from the spirit or scope of the appended claims.
- All publications and patent applications cited in this specification are herein incorporated by reference as if each individual publication or patent application were specifically and individually indicated to be incorporated by reference.
-
TABLE OF SEQUENCES SEQ ID NO:1 human ASKRK nucleic acid sequence ATGGAGAGCGGCGGTGGGAATGCTCCGGCCGGGGCCCTCGGGGCGGCGAGCGAGTCCCCT CAGTGCCCGCCGCCGCCGGGGGTGGAGGGCGCGGCCGGGCCGGCGGAGCCCGACGGGGCG GCGGAGGGCGCGGCAGGCGGCAGCGGCGAGGGGGAGAGTGGGGGCGGGCCGCGGCGGGCT CTGCGGGCAGTATACGTGCGCAGTGAGAGCTCGCAGGGCGGCGCGGCCGGCGGCCCGGAG GCTGGGGCGCGGCAGTGCCTGCTGCGGGCCTGCGAGGCCGAGGGCGCTCACCTCACCTCC GTGCCCTTCGGGGAGCTGGACTTCGGGGAGACGGCCGTGCTCGACGCCTTCTACGACGCA GATGTTGCTGTGGTQAGACATGAGCGATGTCTCCAGACAGCCTTCCCTCTTCTACCATCT TGGAGTCCGAGAAAGCTTTGACATGGCCAATAATGTGATCTTGTACCATGACACCGATGC CGACACTGCTCTCTCTTTGAAGGACATGGTAACTCAAAAAAACACAGCATCCAGTGGAAA TTATTATTTCATCCCATACATCGTGACACCGTGCACTGATTATTTTTGCTGCGAGAGTGA TGCCCAGAGACGAGCCTCCGAGTACATGCAGCCCAACTGGGACAACATCCTGGGCCCGCT GTGCATGCCTTTGGTGGACAGGTTCATTAGCCTCCTTAAGGACATCCACGTGACCTCATG TGTTTATTACAAAGAAACCTTGTTAAATGACATCCGGAAAGCCAGAGAGAAATACCAAGG TGAGGAACTGGCGAAGGAGCTAGCTCGGATCAAGCTCCGCATGGATAATACTGAGGTTCT GACCTCAGACATCATCATTAACTTACTCCTGTCCTACCGTGATATCCAGGACTATGATGC GATGGTGAAGCTGGTGGAAACACTGGAGATGCTGCCTACGTGTGATTTGGCCGATCAGCA TAACACTAAATTCCACTATGCGTTTGCACTGAATAGGAGAAACAGCACAGGTGACCGTGA GAAGGCTCTGCAGATCATGCTCCAGGTTCTGCAGAGCTGTGATCACCCGGGCCCCGACAT GTTCTGCCTGTGTGGGAGGATCTACAAGGACATCTTCTTGGATTCAGACTGCAAAGATGA CACCAGCCGCGACAGCGCCATTGAGTGGTATCGCAAAGGGTTTGAACTCCAGTCATCCCT CTATTCGGGAATTAATCTTGCAGTTTTGCTGATTGTTGCTGGACAACAATTTGAAACTTC CTTGGAACTAAGGAAAATAGGTGTCCGGCTGAACAGTTTGTTGGGAAGAAAAGGGAGCTT GGAGAAAATGAACAATTACTGGGATGTGGGTCAGTTCTTCAGCGTCAGCATGCTGGCCCA TGATGTCGGGAAAGCCGTCCAGGCAGCAGAGAGGTTGTTCAAACTGAAACCTCCAGTCTG GTACCTGCGATCATTAGTTCAGAACTTGTTACTAATTCGGCGCTTCAAGAAAACCATTAT TGAACACTCGCCCAGGCAAGAGCGGCTGAACTTCTGGTTAGATATAATTTTTGAGGCAAC AAATGAAGTCACTAATGGACTCAGATTTCCAGTTCTGGTCATAGAGCCAACCAAAGTGTA CCAGCCTTCTTATGTTTCCATAAACAATGAAGCCGAGGAGAGAACAGTTTCTTTATGGCA TGTCTCACCCACAGAAATGAAACAGATGCACGAATGGAATTTTACAGCCTCTTCCATAAA GGGAATAAGCCTATCAAAGTTTGATGAAAGGTGTTGTTTTCTTTATGTCCATGATAATTC TGATGACTTTCAAATCTACTTTTCCACCGAAGAGCAGTGCAGTAGATTTTTCTCTTTGGT CAAAGAGATGATAACCAATACAGCAGGCAGTACGGTGGAGCTGGAGGGAGAGACCGATGG AGACACCTTGGAGTATGAGTATGACCATGATGCAAATGGTGAGAGAGTTGTCTTGGGGAA AGGCACGTATGGGATTGTGTATGCTGGCCGAGATCTGAGCAATCAAGTGCGAATAGCCAT CAAAGAAATCCCGGAGAGAGATAGCAGGTATTCTCAGCCTCTGCACGAGGAGATAGCCCT GCACAAGTACCTTAAGCACCGCAATATCGTTCAGTACCTGGGCTCTGTTTCAGAGAACGG CTACATTAAGATATTTATGGAGCAGGTGCCTGGAGGAAGCCTTTCTGCTCTTCTGCGATC CAAATGGGGGCCGATGAAGGAACCGACAATCAAGTTTTACACCAAACAGATCCTGGAGGG CCTTAAGTATCTTCATGAAAACCAGATCGTGCACAGAGACATAAAGGGCGATAATGTTCT GGTGAACACCTACAGCGGAGTGGTGAAAATCTCCGATTTTGGAACCTCGAAACGTCTTGC GGGTGTGAACCCCTGCACAGAGACTTTTACTGGCACCCTGCAGTACATGGCACCTGAGAT AATTGACCAAGGGCCTCGCGGATATGGTGCCCCAGCCGATATCTGGTCCCTGGGCTGCAC CATCATTGAGATGGCCACCAGCAAGCCTCCGTTCCATGAGCTTGGTGAGCCGCAGGCAGC CATGTTCAAAGTGGGCATGTTTAAGATCCACCCTGAGATTCCAGAAGCCCTTTCAGCTGA AGCCCGAGCCTTCATTTTATCCTGTTTCGAGCCTGACCCCCACAAACGTGCCACCACTGC TGAGTTACTGAGAGAGGGTTTCTTAAGGCAGGTGAACAAGGGCAAGAAGAACCGAATTGC CTTCAAGCCCTCAGAAGGTCCCCGCGGTGTCGTCCTGGCCCTGCCCACACAGGGAGAGCC CATGGCCACCAGCAGCAGCGAGCACGGCTCTGTCTCCCCAGACTCCGACGGCCAGCCTGA CGCACTCTTTGAGAGGACCCGGGCGCCCAGGCACCACCTTGGCCACCTCCTCAGTGTTCC AGACGAGAGCTCAGCCTTGGAAGACCGGGGCTTGGCCTCGTCCCCGGAGGACAGGGACCA GGGCCTCTTCCTGCTACGCAAGGACAGTGAGCGCCGTGCCATCCTGTACAAAATCCTCTG GGAGGAGCAGAACCAGGTGGCTTCCAACCTGCAGGAGTGTGTGGCCCAGAGTTCCGAAGA GTTGCATCTCTCAGTTGGACACATCAAGCAAATCATTGGGATCGTGAGGGACTFCATCCG CTCCCCAGAGCACCGGGTGATGGCGACCACAATATCAAAGCTCAAGGTGGACCTGGACTT TGACAGCTCGTCCATCAGTCAGATTCACCTGGTGCTGTTCGGATTTCAGGATGCCGTAAA TAAAATTTTGAGGAACCACTTAATTAGGCCCCACTGGATGTTCGCGATGGACAACATCAT CCGCCGAGCGGTGCAGGCCGCGGTCACCATTCTCATCCCAGAGCTCCGAGCCCACTTTGA GCCTACCTGTGAGACTGAAGGGGTAGATAAGGACATGGATGAAGCGGAAGAGGGCTATCC CCCAGCCACCGGACCTGGCCAGGAGGCCCAGCGCCACCAGCAGCACCTGAGCCTCCAGCT GGGTGAGCTCAGAGAGGAGACCAACAGACTTTTGGAACACCTAGTTGAAAAAGAGAGAGA GTACCAGAATCTTCTGCGGCAAACTCTAGAACAGAAAACTCAAGAATTGTATCACCTTCA GTTAAAATTAAAATCGAATTGTATTACAGAGAACCCAGCAGGCCCCTACGGGCAGAGAAC AGATAAAGAGCTTATAGACTGGTTGCGGCTGCAAGGAGCTGATGCAAAGACAATTGAAAA GATTGTTGAAGAGGGTTATACACTTTCGGATATTCTTAATGAGATCACTAAGGAAGATCT AAGATACCTCCGACTACGGGGTGGTCTCCTCTGCAGACTCTGGAGTGCGGTCTCCCAGTA CAGAAGGGCTCAGGAGGCCTCAGAAACCAAAGACAAGGCTTGATACCAATCAGCTAAGCT GTGGCAGAGTGTCCCACCACGCTACATGTTTTGTTAAAGCTTCTGTTAGTGTATACACGA ATTCCGCTGTGTTTACATATTTAAAAATGCCATTGTTCAATTAATAGTTTAAGAACTTGT TTTAAATACTGTCCTGAGTTTCTTTTGAAACCTGTTATTTATAAACATAGAACTGTGTGT ATTGTGAAAACAGTGAGCCTTGGTTTTGACCTCCCGGAATATTAGGAAATTCACTTGTAG TCCCAGCTATGCAGGAGGCTGAGGTGGGAGGATTGCTTGAGCCCAGGAGGTGTGGAGGCT GCAGTGAGCCATGATCACACCA SEQ ID NO:2 human ASKRK polypeptide sequence The kinase domain is underlined; K68 1 is indicated in bold 1 MESGGGNAPA GALGAASESP QCPPPPGVEG AAGPAEPDGA AEGAAGGSGE 51 GESGGGPRRA LRAVYVRSES SQGGAAGGPE AGARQCLLRA CEAEGAHLTS 101 VPFGELDFGE TAVLDAFYDA DVAVVDMSDV SRQPSLFYHL GVRESFDMAN 151 NVILYHDTDA DTALSLKDMV TQKNTASSGN YYFIPYIVTP CTDYFCCESD 201 AQRPASEYMQ PNWDNILGPL CMPLVDRFIS LLKDIHVTSC VYYKETLLND 251 IRKAREKYQG EELAKELARI KLRMDNTEVL TSDIIINLLL SYRDIQDYDA 301 MVKLVETLEM LPTCDLADQH NTKFHYAFAL NRRNSTGDRE KALQIMLQVL 351 QSCDHPGPDM FCLCGRIYKD IFLDSDCKDD TSRDSAIEWY RKGFELQSSL 401 YSGINLAVLL IVAGQQFETS LELRKIGVRL NSLLGRKGSL EKMNNYWDVG 451 QFFSVSMLAH DVGKAVQAAE RLFKLKPPVW YLRSLVQNLL LIRRFKKTII 501 EHSPRQERLN FWLDIIFEAT NEVTNGLRFP VLVIEPTKVY QPSYVSINNE 551 AEERTVSLWH VSPTEMKQMH EWNFTASSIK GISLSKFDER CCFLYVHDNS 601 DDFQIYFSTE EQCSRFFSLV KEMITNTAGS TVELEGETDG DTLEYEYDHD 651 ANGERVVLGK GTYGIVYAGR DLSNQVRIAI KEIPERDSRY SQPLHEEIAL 701 HKYLKHRNIV QYLGSVSENG YIKIFMEQVP GGSLSALLRS KWGPMKEPTI 751 KFYTKQILEG LKYLHENQIV HRDIKGDNVL VNTYSGVVKI SDFGTSKRLA 801 GVNPCTETFT GTLQYMAPEI IDQGPRGYGA PADIWSLGCT IIEMATSKPP 851 FHELGEPQAA MFKVGMFKIH PEIPEALSAE ARAFILSCFE PDPHKRATTA 901 ELLREGFLRQ VNKGKKNRIA FKPSEGPRGV VLALPTQGEP MATSSSEHGS 951 VSPDSDAQPD ALFERTRAPR HHLGHLLSVP DESSALEDRG LASSPEDRDQ 1001 GLFLLRKDSE RRAILYKILW EEQNQVASNL QECVAQSSEE LHLSVGHIKQ 1051 IIGILRDFIR SPEHRVMATT ISKLKVDLDF DSSSISQIHL VLFGFQDAVN 1101 KILRNHLIRP HWMFAMDNII RRAVQAAVTI LIPELRAHFE PTCETEGVDK 1151 DMDEAEEGYP PATGPGQEAQ PHQQHLSLQL GELRQETNRL LEHLVEKERE 1201 YQNLLRQTLE QKTQELYHLQ LKLKSNCITE NPAGPYGQRT DKELIDWLRL 1251 QGADAKTIEK IVEEGYTLSD ILNEITKEDL RYLRLRGGLL CRLWSAVSQY 1301 RRAQEASETK DKA SEQ ID NO:3 partial mouse ASKRK nucleic acid sequence 1 GCCGAGGGCG GGCGCGGGCC ACGCCGGGCT CTGCGGGCTG TCTACGTGCG 51 CAGCGAAAGT TCGCAGGGGG CAGCCGCCGG CGGCGGCCCC GAGGCCGGGG 101 CGCTCAAGTG CCTGCTTCGG GCTTGCGAAG CCGAGGGCGC CCACCTCACC 151 TCCGTCCCCT TCGGGGAGCT CGACTTCGGG GAGACGGCCG TGCTCGATGC 201 CTTCTACGAT GCAGATGTTG CCATTGTGGA CATGAGTGAT ATCTCCAGAC 251 AGCCTTCCCT TTTCTACCAT CTTGGAGTCC GAGAGAGTTT TGACATGGCT 301 AACAATGTAA TTCTCTACTA TGATACTGAT GCTGACACTG CTCTGTCATT 351 GAAGGATATG GTCACTCAAA AAAACACAGC ATCCAGTGGA AATTATTATT 401 TTATCCCCTA CACTGTGACA CCATGTGCTG ACTATTTTTG CTGTGAGAGT 451 GATGCCCAAA GGAGAGCCTC AGAGTACATG CAGCCTAACT GGGACACCAT 501 ACTGGGCCCG CTGTGTATGC CCCTGGTCGA CAGGTTCACT AGCCTCCTTA 551 AGGACATCCG TGTGACTTCA TGTGCTTATT ATAAAGAAAC ATTGTTAAAT 601 GACATCCGGA AAGCCAGAGA GAAATACCAA GGTGATGAAC TGGCGAAAGA 651 GTTGACTCGG ATCAAATTCC GTATGGATAA CATTGAGGTT CTGACATCAG 701 ACATCATCAT TAACTTACTT CTGTCCTACC GTGATATCCA GGACTACGAT 751 GCAATGGTCA AGCTGGTAGA GACACTGAAG ATGCTGCCAA CGTGTGATTT 801 GGCTGATCAG CACAACATTA AATTTCACTA TGCATTTGCA CTGAATAGGA 851 GAAACAGCAC AGGTGACCGT GAAAAGGCTC TTCAGGTTAT GCTCCAAGTT 901 CTGCAAAGCT GTGACCACCC AGCTCCTGAC ATGTTTTGCC TGTGTGGGCG 951 GATATACAAG GACATCTTCC TGGATTCAGG TTGTGAAGAG GATGCAAGCA 1001 GAGACAGTGC CATTGAGTGG TATCGCAAAG GGTTTGAACT CCAGTCATCC 1051 CTTTATTCAG GAATTAACCT TGCAGTTTTG CTGATAGTTT CTGGACAACA 1101 GTTTGAAACT TCGATGGAAC TAAGGAAAAT AGGTGTCCGG CTGAACAGTT 1151 TATTGGGAAG AAAAGGGAGC CTGGAGAAAA TGAACAATTA CTGGGATGTA 1201 GGTCAGTTCT TCACCGTCAG CATGCTGGCA AGTGATATTG GGAAAGCTGT 1251 CCAGGCAGCA GAGAGGTTGT TCAAACTGAA ACCCCCAGTC TGGTACCTGC 1301 GGTCATTAGT TCAGAACTTG CTGTTAATTC AACGCTTCAA GAAACCCATT 1351 ACAGAACATT CACCCAGGCA GGAACGGCTT AACTTCTGGT TAGATATCAT 1401 TTTTGAAGCA ACGAATGAAG TTACTAATGG ACTCAGATTT CCAGTTCTGG 1451 TAATAGAGCC AACCAAAGTC TACCAGCCTT CTTATGTTTC TATCAACAAT 1501 GAAGCTGAAG AAAGAACTGT TTCTTTATGG CATGTCTCAC CCACAGAAAT 1551 GAAACAAATC CATGAGTGGA ATTTTACAGC CTCTTCTATT AAAGGAATAA 1601 GCCTATCCAA GTTTGATGAA CGGTGCTGTT TTCTTTATGT CCATGATAAT 1651 TCTGATGACT TTCAAATCTA CTTTTCCACC GAAGACCAGT GTAATAGATT 1701 TTGTTCTTTG GTCAAAGAGA TGCTAAACAA TGGAGTGGGC AGTACAGTGG 1751 AGTTGGAGGG AGAGGCTGAT GGAGACACCT TAGAGTATGA GTATGACCAT 1801 GATGCGAATG GGGAGAGAGT TGTCTTGGGG AAAGGCTCCT ATGGGATTGT 1851 GTATGCCGGC CGTGATCTCA GTAATCAAGT ACGGATAGCC ATCAAGGAAA 1901 TCCCAGAGAG AGATATCAGG TACTCTCAGC CTCTGCATGA AGAAATAGCT 1951 CTGCACAAGT ATCTCAAACA TCGCAACATC GTCCAGTACC TTGGCTCTGT 2001 TTCAGAGAAT GGCTACATTA AGATATTTAT GGAGCAGGTG CCTGGAGGAA 2051 GCCTTTCTGC TCTCTTACGA TCTAAATGGG GACCTATGAA GGAACCCACT 2101 ATCAAGTTTT ATACCAAACA GATCCTGGAA GGCCTGAAGT ATCTCCATGA 2151 AAACCAGATA GTGCACAGAG ACATAAAGGG AGATAATGTT CTGGTGAACA 2201 CCTATAGTGG AGTGGTAAAA ATCTCTGATT TTGGAACCTC TAAACGCCTC 2251 GCAGGAATTA ACCCATGCAC CGAGACCTTT ACAGGAACTC TGCAGTACAT 2301 GGCACCTGAG ATTATTGATC AAGGACCTCG GGGATATGGT GCTCCAGCTG 2351 ATATCTGGTC CTTGGGCTGC ACCATCATTG AGATGGCAAC CAGCAGGCCT 2401 CCATTCCATG AGCTTGGTGA GCCCCAAGCA GCCATGTTTA AGGTAGGGAT 2451 GTTTAAGATC CACCCTGAAA TTCCAGAGGC CCTTTCAGCT GAAGCCAGAG 2501 CCTTCATCTT GTCTTGTTTT GAGCCTGACC CTCAGAAACG TGTCACTGCT 2551 GCTGACCTTC TCCAAGAAGG GTTCTTAAGG CAGGTGAACA AAGGCAAAAA 2601 GAACCGAATT GCTTTCAAGC CTTCAGAGGG TGTTCGGAGT GGCACTGGTA 2651 CTCTGGCTCT GCCTTCATCA GGAGAGCTTG TGGGCAGCAG CAGCAGCGAG 2701 CATGGCTCAA TCTCCCCAGA CTCGGATGCC CAGCCTGATG CATTCTTTGA 2751 GAAAGTCCAG GTGCCCAAAC ATCAGCTCAG CCACCTTCTC AGTGTCCCAG 2801 ATGAAAGCCC AGCCTTAGAT GACCGAAGCA CAGCCTTACC CCCAGAGGAG 2851 AGGGACCCTG GTCTCTTTCT GCTGCGCAAG GACAGTGAGC GCAGAGCCAT 2901 CCTTTACAGA ATCCTTTGGG AGGAACAGAA CCAAGTGGCT TCCAACTTGC 2951 AAGAGTGTGT GGTCCAGAGT TCAGAAGAGT TGCTTCTCTC AGTTAGCCAC 3001 ATCAAACAGA TAATTGGAAT CCTGAGGGAC TTCATCCGCT CCCCAGAGCA 3051 CAGGGTGATG GCAGCCACAA TATCAAAACT AAAGGTGGAC CTGGACTTTG 3101 ACAGCTCATC CATCAACCAG ATTCACCTGA TTCTGTTTGG GTTCCAAGAT 3151 GCTGTCAATA GAATTTTGAG AAACCACTTA ATTAGGCCCC ACTGGATGTT 3201 TGCAATGGAC AACATCATTC GCAGAGCTGT GCAGGCTGCA GTCACCATTC 3251 TCATTCCAGA GCTCCAAGCC CACTTTGAGC CTGCTTCTGA GACTGAAGGG 3301 GTAGACAAGG ACACAGAAGT AGAAGGGGAC TATCCCCTAG TAGACCTCCT 3351 CAGCCAAGAA GTGCATGTGA CACCTAGAGG CACCAGACCT GGCTCAGTGG 3401 CTATCCAGGA GGGCCAGCCC CACCAGCAAG ACCCAAGTCT CCAACTGAGC 3451 AAGCTCAGGC AAGAGACCAA CAGACTTTGG GAACACCTAG TTCAAAAAGA 3501 GAAGGGAGTA CCAGAATCTT CTTCGCCTAA TTCTAGACCA GAAAACTCAA 3551 GAATTGTATC ACCTTCAGTT ACAGTACAAA TCCAATGGTG GTACAGAGAA 3601 CCCTCCACCC CTGATGGACT GGGAACCGAC AGAGAGCTTA TAGACTGGTT 3651 GCAACTACAA GGAGTGGATG CCAATACAAT AGAAAAGATT GTTGAAGAGG 3701 ACTATACACT TTCTGATATT CTCAATGATA TCACTAAGGA AGACCTAAGG 3751 TGCCTCCGAC TACGGGGTGG TGTCCTCTGT AGGCTCTGGC ATGCAGTCTC 3801 CCAGCACAGA AGACAAATGC AGGAGTCTTC ACAGTGAGCC AAGCCTGGGG 3851 AGAATGGGCA AAAAGTCCCC TACACCTGCT CATGATTAAA GCTTCTGTTG 3901 GCGTACTCAC AAACTCCGAG TTTCCACAGA AAGACCCTTG TCCATTTAAT 3951 TCAAGCACGT GTGATTGTAG AGCATCCTTG TTTATAAACA AGATTGTAAG 4001 TAATGTCAGC CCTGACCTAA TATTTAAAAA GTCAGCATAT CGCTGGAAAG 4051 ATAAAGCATA CGTATTTTAT AAACTAGTGT AATTACTTAA ATGTGAAAGG 4101 TTAAAAAGTG TGCCTTGCAA TGGGAGTACA GTTTCATGTA TGTTAAATGT 4151 CTAAATGGAA AAAATTAAAC TATTTTACCT TTAAAAAAAA AAAAAAAAAA 4201 ACTCGACGAG CTCACTAGTC G SEQ ID NO:4 partial mouse ASKRK polypeptide sequence The kinase domain is underlined. 1 AEGGRGPRRA LRAVYVRSES SQGAAAGGGP EAGALKCLLR ACEAEGAHLT 51 SVPFGELDFG ETAVLDAFYD ADVAIVDMSD ISRQPSLFYH LGVRESFDMA 101 NNVILYYDTD ADTALSLKDM VTQKNTASSG NYYFIPYTVT PCADYFCCES 151 DAQRRASEYM QPNWDTILGP LCMPLVDRFT SLLKDIRVTS CAYYKETLLN 201 DIRKAREKYQ GDELAKELTR IKFRMDNIEV LTSDIIINLL LSYRDIQDYD 251 AMVKLVETLK MLPTCDLADQ HNIKFHYAFA LNRRNSTGDR EKALQVMLQV 301 LQSCDHPAPD MFCLCGRIYK DIFLDSGCEE DASRDSAIEW YRKGFELQSS 351 LYSGINLAVL LIVSGQQFET SMELRKIGVR LNSLLGRKGS LEKMNNYWDV 401 GQFFTVSMLA SDIGKAVQAA ERLFKLKPPV WYLRSLVQNL LLIQRFKKPI 451 TEHSPRQERL NFWLDIIFEA TNEVTNGLRF PVLVIEPTKV YQPSYVSINN 501 EAEERTVSLW HVSPTEMKQI HEWNFTASSI KGISLSKFDE RCCFLYVHDN 551 SDDFQIYFST EDQCNRFCSL VKEMLNNGVG STVELEGEAD GDTLEYEYDH 601 DANGERVVLG KGSYGIVYAG RDLSNQVRIA IKEIPERDIR YSQPLHEEIA 651 LHKYLKHRNI VQYLGSVSEN GYIKIFMEQV PGGSLSALLR SKWGPMKEPT 701 IKFYTKQILE GLKYLHENQI VHRDIKGDNV LVNTYSGVVK ISDFGTSKRL 751 AGINPCTETF TGTLQYMAPE IIDQGPRGYG APADIWSLGC TIIEMATSRP 801 PFHELGEPQA AMFKVGMFKI HPEIPEALSA EARAFILSCF EPDPQKRVTA 851 ADLLQEGFLR QVNKGKKNRI AFKPSEGVRS GTGTLALPSS GELVGSSSSE 901 HGSISPDSDA QPDAFFEKVQ VPKHQLSHLL SVPDESPALD DRSTALPPEE 951 RDPGLFLLRK DSERRATLYR ILWEEQNQVA SNLQECVVQS SEELLLSVSH 1001 IKQIIGILRD FIRSPEHRVM AATISKLKVD LDFDSSSINQ IHLILFGFQD 1051 AVNRILRNHL IRPHWMFAND NIIRRAVQAA VTILIPELQA HFEPASETEG 1101 VDKDTEVEGD YPLVDLLSQE VHVTPRGTRP GSVAIQEGQP HQQDPSLQLS 1151 KLRQETNRLW EHLVQKEKGV PESSSPNSRP ENSRIVSPSV TVQIQWWYRE 1201 PSTPDGLGTD RELIDWLQLQ GVDANTIEKI VEEDYTLSDI LNDITKEDLR 1251 CLRLRGGVLC RLWHAVSQHR RQMQESSQ
Claims (25)
1. An isolated polypeptide comprising SEQ ID NO:2 or SEQ ID NO:4.
2. A method for identifying an agent for treating a diabetic or pre-diabetic individual, the method comprising the steps of:
(i) contacting a candidate agent with a pancreatic or kidney cell that expresses a nucleic acid encoding a polypeptide having kinase activity that comprises at least 50 contiguous amino acids of SEQ ID NO:2;
(ii) determining the activity of the polypeptide; and
(ii) selecting an agent that inhibits the activity of the polypeptide, thereby identifying an agent for treating a diabetic or pre-diabetic individual.
3. The method of claim 2 , wherein the polypeptide comprises SEQ ID NO:2 or SEQ ID NO:4.
4. The method of claim 2 , wherein the polypeptide is overexpressed relative to normal.
5. The method of claim 2 , wherein the cell is a pancreatic cell.
6. The method of claim 2 , wherein the pancreatic cell is from a diabetic animal.
7. The method of claim 2 , wherein the step of determining the activity of activity of the polypeptide comprises determining the ability of the polypeptide to phosphorylate a substrate.
8. The method of claim 2 , wherein the step of determining the activity of activity of the polypeptide comprises determining the level of apoptosis.
9. The method of claim 2 , wherein the step of determining the activity of the polypeptide comprises determining the amount of protein present using an immunoassay.
10. The method of claim 2 , wherein the agent is an siRNA.
11. The method of claim 2 , wherein the agent is an antisense RNA.
12. The method of claim 2 , further comprising:
administering the agent to a pancreatic beta cell population;
determining the level of apoptosis in the population; and
selecting a candidate agent that decreases the level of apoptosis
13. A method for identifying an agent for treating a diabetic or pre-diabetic individual, the method comprising the steps of:
(i) contacting a candidate agent with a kidney or pancreatic cell that expresses a nucleic acid encoding a polypeptide having phosphorylating activity that comprises at least 50 contiguous amino acids of SEQ ID NO:2;
(ii) determining the level of an RNA that encodes the polypeptide; and
(ii) selecting an agent that inhibits the level of the RNA relative to normal, thereby identifying an agent for treating a diabetic or pre-diabetic individual.
14. The method of claim 13 , wherein the polypeptide comprises SEQ ID NO:2 or SEQ ID NO:4.
15. The method of claim 13 , wherein the cell is a pancreatic cell.
16. The method of claim 13 wherein the pancreatic cell is from a diabetic animal.
17. The method of claim 13 , wherein the step of determining the level of an RNA that encodes the polypeptide comprises an amplification reaction.
18. The method of claim 13 , wherein the cell is a pancreatic islet cell.
19. The method of claim 13 , wherein the agent is an siRNA.
20. The method of claim 13 , wherein the agent is an antisense RNA.
21. The method of claim 13 , further comprising:
administering the agent to a pancreatic beta cell population;
determining the level of apoptosis in the population; and
selecting a candidate agent that decreases the level of apoptosis.
22. A method of introducing an expression cassette into a pancreatic cell, the method comprising,
introducing into the cell an expression vector comprising a nucleic acid that, when expressed, inhibits the expression of a nucleic acid encoding a polypeptide having phosphorylating activity that comprises at least 50 contiguous amino acids of SEQ ID NO:2.
23. The method of claim 22 , wherein the polypeptide comprises SEQ ID NO:2.
24. The method of claim 22 , further comprising introducing the cell into a diabetic animal.
25. The method of claim 24 , wherein the cell is from the human.
Priority Applications (1)
| Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
|---|---|---|---|
| US12/077,408 US20080248010A1 (en) | 2003-11-04 | 2008-03-17 | Compositions and methods of using apoptosis signaling kinase related kinase (ASKRK) |
Applications Claiming Priority (4)
| Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
|---|---|---|---|
| US51747703P | 2003-11-04 | 2003-11-04 | |
| US10/980,974 US7109021B2 (en) | 2003-11-04 | 2004-11-03 | Compositions and methods of using apoptosis signaling kinase related kinase (ASKRK) |
| US11/488,338 US7344844B2 (en) | 2003-11-04 | 2006-07-17 | Compositions and methods of using apoptosis signaling kinase related kinase (ASKRK) |
| US12/077,408 US20080248010A1 (en) | 2003-11-04 | 2008-03-17 | Compositions and methods of using apoptosis signaling kinase related kinase (ASKRK) |
Related Parent Applications (1)
| Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
|---|---|---|---|
| US11/488,338 Division US7344844B2 (en) | 2003-11-04 | 2006-07-17 | Compositions and methods of using apoptosis signaling kinase related kinase (ASKRK) |
Publications (1)
| Publication Number | Publication Date |
|---|---|
| US20080248010A1 true US20080248010A1 (en) | 2008-10-09 |
Family
ID=34572945
Family Applications (4)
| Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
|---|---|---|---|
| US10/980,974 Ceased US7109021B2 (en) | 2003-11-04 | 2004-11-03 | Compositions and methods of using apoptosis signaling kinase related kinase (ASKRK) |
| US11/488,338 Expired - Fee Related US7344844B2 (en) | 2003-11-04 | 2006-07-17 | Compositions and methods of using apoptosis signaling kinase related kinase (ASKRK) |
| US11/900,008 Expired - Fee Related USRE40624E1 (en) | 2003-11-04 | 2007-09-07 | Compositions and methods of using apoptosis signaling kinase related kinase (ASKRK) |
| US12/077,408 Abandoned US20080248010A1 (en) | 2003-11-04 | 2008-03-17 | Compositions and methods of using apoptosis signaling kinase related kinase (ASKRK) |
Family Applications Before (3)
| Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
|---|---|---|---|
| US10/980,974 Ceased US7109021B2 (en) | 2003-11-04 | 2004-11-03 | Compositions and methods of using apoptosis signaling kinase related kinase (ASKRK) |
| US11/488,338 Expired - Fee Related US7344844B2 (en) | 2003-11-04 | 2006-07-17 | Compositions and methods of using apoptosis signaling kinase related kinase (ASKRK) |
| US11/900,008 Expired - Fee Related USRE40624E1 (en) | 2003-11-04 | 2007-09-07 | Compositions and methods of using apoptosis signaling kinase related kinase (ASKRK) |
Country Status (6)
| Country | Link |
|---|---|
| US (4) | US7109021B2 (en) |
| EP (1) | EP1697542A4 (en) |
| JP (1) | JP2007510428A (en) |
| AU (1) | AU2004288222A1 (en) |
| CA (1) | CA2544807A1 (en) |
| WO (1) | WO2005044993A2 (en) |
Families Citing this family (3)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| WO2006054770A1 (en) * | 2004-11-22 | 2006-05-26 | The University Of Tokyo | Novel map kinase kinase kinase (mapkkk) |
| CA2698812A1 (en) | 2007-09-14 | 2009-03-19 | Nitto Denko Corporation | Drug carriers |
| WO2023066881A1 (en) * | 2021-10-18 | 2023-04-27 | Astrazeneca Ab | Inhibition of map3k15 for treating and preventing diabetes |
Family Cites Families (3)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| EP1278859A2 (en) * | 2000-04-10 | 2003-01-29 | Sugen, Inc. | Human protein kinases and protein kinase-like enzymes |
| EP1379628A2 (en) * | 2000-12-06 | 2004-01-14 | Incyte Genomics, Inc. | Kinases and phosphatases sequences, and use thereof |
| WO2003064639A1 (en) * | 2002-02-01 | 2003-08-07 | Bayer Healthcare Ag | Regulation of human mitogen-activate protein kinase catalytic domain |
-
2004
- 2004-11-03 EP EP04810311A patent/EP1697542A4/en not_active Withdrawn
- 2004-11-03 AU AU2004288222A patent/AU2004288222A1/en not_active Abandoned
- 2004-11-03 CA CA002544807A patent/CA2544807A1/en not_active Abandoned
- 2004-11-03 WO PCT/US2004/036740 patent/WO2005044993A2/en not_active Ceased
- 2004-11-03 JP JP2006539643A patent/JP2007510428A/en not_active Withdrawn
- 2004-11-03 US US10/980,974 patent/US7109021B2/en not_active Ceased
-
2006
- 2006-07-17 US US11/488,338 patent/US7344844B2/en not_active Expired - Fee Related
-
2007
- 2007-09-07 US US11/900,008 patent/USRE40624E1/en not_active Expired - Fee Related
-
2008
- 2008-03-17 US US12/077,408 patent/US20080248010A1/en not_active Abandoned
Also Published As
| Publication number | Publication date |
|---|---|
| JP2007510428A (en) | 2007-04-26 |
| US20060252100A1 (en) | 2006-11-09 |
| US20050233347A1 (en) | 2005-10-20 |
| USRE40624E1 (en) | 2009-01-20 |
| EP1697542A4 (en) | 2007-08-29 |
| US7344844B2 (en) | 2008-03-18 |
| CA2544807A1 (en) | 2005-05-19 |
| WO2005044993A3 (en) | 2006-03-09 |
| EP1697542A2 (en) | 2006-09-06 |
| AU2004288222A1 (en) | 2005-05-19 |
| US7109021B2 (en) | 2006-09-19 |
| WO2005044993A2 (en) | 2005-05-19 |
Similar Documents
| Publication | Publication Date | Title |
|---|---|---|
| AU2007317722A1 (en) | SNP detection and other methods for characterizing and treating bipolar disorder and other ailments | |
| US20070122802A1 (en) | Methods of diagnosing and treating diabetes and insulin resistance | |
| USRE40624E1 (en) | Compositions and methods of using apoptosis signaling kinase related kinase (ASKRK) | |
| US20060228706A1 (en) | Methods of diagnosing and treating diabetes and insulin resistance | |
| WO2006007400A2 (en) | Methods of diagnosing and treating obesity, diabetes and insulin resistance | |
| US8034564B2 (en) | Obesity gene and use thereof | |
| US20060292563A1 (en) | Methods of diagnosing & treating diabetes and insulin resistance | |
| US20060160076A1 (en) | Methods of treating and diagnosing diabetes with cx3cr1 modulators | |
| US20060234292A1 (en) | Methods of diagnosing and treating diabetes and insulin resistance | |
| US20060074018A1 (en) | Methods of diagnosing & treating diabetes and insulin resistance | |
| US20050186582A1 (en) | Compositions and methods of using hexokinase V | |
| US20050208516A1 (en) | Methods and reagents for diagnosis and treatment of diabetes | |
| WO2005124359A2 (en) | Methods of diagnosing and treating diabetes and insulin resistance | |
| WO2006010051A2 (en) | Methods of diagnosing & treating diabetes and insulin resistance |
Legal Events
| Date | Code | Title | Description |
|---|---|---|---|
| STCB | Information on status: application discontinuation |
Free format text: ABANDONED -- FAILURE TO RESPOND TO AN OFFICE ACTION |